Huawei CG9812

Part I System Description
Table of Contents .........................................................................................

Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812 .........................................................
1.1 Orientation ........................................................................................
1.2 Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network ..................................
1.2.1 Network Architecture ................................................................
1.2.2 External Interfaces ....................................................................
1.3 CG9812 Networking Implementation ................................................
Chapter 2 Key Benefits ................................................................................
2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ...............................................................
2.2 System Features ...............................................................................
2.2.1 Multi-access..............................................................................
2.2.2 Flexible CDR Format Conversion .............................................
2.2.3 Large Capacity and Powerful Processing Capability ................
2.2.4 High Reliability ..........................................................................
2.2.5 Scalability .................................................................................
2.3 Networking Capability .......................................................................
Chapter 3 System Architecture ....................................................................
3.2 Hardware Architecture ......................................................................
3.2.1 Appearance of CG9812 Cabinet ..............................................
3.2.2 Cabinet Configuration ...............................................................
3.2.3 Typical Configuration ................................................................
3.3 Functional Architecture .....................................................................
3.3.1 Logical Architecture ..................................................................
3.3.2 CG9812 Network Adapters .......................................................
3.3.3 Communicating with the GSN ..................................................
3.3.4 Communicating with the Billing Center .....................................
3.3.5 Communicating with the LMT and the NMS .............................
3.3.6 Heartbeat Path .........................................................................
3.4 Software Architecture........................................................................
3.4.1 Key Terminologies ....................................................................
3.4.2 Overall Architecture ..................................................................
3.4.3 Service Processes ....................................................................
Chapter 4 Services and Functions ...............................................................
4.2 Network Functions ............................................................................
4.2.1 Interface to GSN .......................................................................
4.2.2 Interface to Billing Center .........................................................
4.3 Service Functions .............................................................................
i
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-11
3-11
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4.3.1 CDR Processing .......................................................................

4.3.2 Cluster System Function ..........................................................
4.3.3 CDR Browsing and Querying Function .....................................
Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance ........................................................
5.2 OMC Networking ...............................................................................
5.3 Operation and Maintenance Functions .............................................
5.3.1 Security Management...............................................................
5.3.2 Configuration Management ......................................................
5.3.3 Performance Management .......................................................
5.3.4 Fault Management ....................................................................
Chapter 6 Reliability .....................................................................................
6.2 System Reliability..............................................................................
6.2.1 Redundancy Design .................................................................
6.2.2 Component Selection, Control and Unification .........................
6.2.3 Maintainability Design...............................................................
6.2.4 Power Reliability Design ...........................................................
6.3 Hardware Reliability ..........................................................................
6.3.1 Power Supply Design ...............................................................
6.3.2 Common Hardware Design ......................................................
6.3.3 Redundancy Design .................................................................
6.3.4 Over-voltage and Over-current Protection ................................
6.3.5 Hot Backup ...............................................................................
6.4 Software Reliability ...........................................................................
6.4.1 Protection Measures .................................................................
6.4.2 Error Tolerance .........................................................................
6.4.3 Fault Monitoring and Processing ..............................................
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications ..............................................................
7.2 System Performance ........................................................................
7.2.1 Basic Performance ...................................................................
7.2.2 Reliability Specifications ...........................................................
7.3 Mechanical Data ...............................................................................
7.3.1 Dimensions ...............................................................................
7.3.2 Weight ......................................................................................
7.3.3 Power Consumption .................................................................
7.4 Environmental Requirements............................................................
7.4.1 Storage Environment ................................................................
7.4.2 Transportation Environment .....................................................
7.4.3 Running Environment ...............................................................
4-1
4-3
4-3
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-5
7-7
Part II System Installation (Netra 240)

Chapter 1 Installation Overview ...................................................................
1.2 Installation Flow ................................................................................
1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart ..............................................................
1.2.2 Installation Time Planning ........................................................
1.3 Installation Preparations ...................................................................
1.3.1 Hardware Preparations .............................................................
1.3.2 Software Preparations ..............................................................
1.4 Resource Planning ............................................................................
1.4.1 HA System Planning .................................................................
1.4.2 IP Address Planning .................................................................
1.4.3 Disk Space Planning ................................................................
Chapter 2 Installing and Configuring Hardware ...........................................
2.2 Cabinet Configuration .......................................................................
2.3 Hardware Description .......................................................................
2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 240...................................................
2.3.2 Introduction to SUN StorEdge 3310 Disk Array........................
2.3.3 Introduction to Quidway S3528G LAN Switch ..........................
2.4 Hardware Connections .....................................................................
2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning ...........................................................
2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning .................................................
2.4.3 Hardware Connections .............................................................
2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections ...........................................
2.4.5 Hardware Power-on..................................................................
Chapter 3 Configuring SC and Disk Array ....................................................
3.2 Configuring SC ..................................................................................
3.2.1 Introduction to SC .....................................................................
3.2.2 Configuring SC .........................................................................
3.3 Configuring Disk Array ......................................................................
Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris ................................................
4.2 Installing Solaris 8 .............................................................................
4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Netra 240 ...........................................
4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8 ....................................................................
4.3 Installing Solaris Patches ..................................................................
4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools ...............................................................
i
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-8
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-10
2-15
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-4
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-7
4-7
4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch ..........................................................

4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches .............................................................
4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver .......................................................
4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch ............................................
4.4 Configuring Solaris ............................................................................
4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files ................................................
4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files .........................
4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root ..............................................
4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root .................................................
4.4.5 Executing the .profile File .........................................................
4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File .......................................
4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File ..................................................
4.4.8 Modifying the /etc/inet/netmasks File .......................................
4.4.9 Restarting the Hosts .................................................................
4.5 Installing Utilities ...............................................................................
4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software ......................................................
4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software ......................................................
Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software ....................................................
5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File .....................................................
5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network
Adapters ............................................................................................
5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File ...........................................
5.2.4 Cleaning out Data .....................................................................
5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0 ..................................................................
5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1 .........................................
5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2 .........................................
5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device ...............................................
5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes ................................
5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5 ...............................
5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager .......................................................
5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches .........................................
5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters.................................
5.4.4 Checking the Installation ..........................................................
5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses .................................................
5.5.1 Checking Hostid .......................................................................
5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent ......................................
5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License ..............................................
5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered ...........................
5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters .................................................
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-10
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-19
5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk ...................................................................

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group ......................................
5.6.3 Configuring NAFO ....................................................................
5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group ..................................
5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script ....................................................
5.6.6 Checking the Configuration ......................................................
Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface .............................................................
6.2 Installing FTP ....................................................................................
6.3 Installing FTAM .................................................................................
6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 ............................................
6.3.2 Installation Preparations ...........................................................
6.3.3 Installation Steps ......................................................................
6.3.4 Configuring Parameters............................................................
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands .........................
Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server ............................................................
7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections .............................................
7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation ....................................
7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites ..........................................................
7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know .....................................
7.3 Installing Server Software .................................................................
7.4 Upgrading Server ..............................................................................
7.4.1 General Upgrade ......................................................................
7.4.2 Special Upgrade .......................................................................
7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version .............................................................
Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client ..............................................................
8.2 Installing Client Software ..................................................................
8.3 Upgrading Client ...............................................................................
8.4 Checking Client Software..................................................................
5-20
5-21
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-26
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-3
6-4
6-11
6-14
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-4
7-6
7-7
7-9
7-9
7-11
7-13
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-6
8-8
Part II System Installation (Netra 20)

Chapter 1 Installation Overview ...................................................................
1.2 Installation Flow ................................................................................
1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart ..............................................................
1.2.2 Installation Time Planning ........................................................
i
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1.3.1 Hardware Preparations .............................................................

1.3.2 Software Preparations ..............................................................
1.4 Resource Planning ............................................................................
1.4.1 HA System Planning .................................................................
1.4.2 IP Address Planning .................................................................
1.4.3 Disk Space Planning ................................................................
Chapter 2 Installing Hardware ......................................................................
2.2 Cabinet Configuration .......................................................................
2.3 Hardware Description .......................................................................
2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 20 .....................................................
2.3.2 Introduction to Sun StorEdge 3310 Disk Array .........................
2.3.3 Introduction to TC .....................................................................
2.3.4 Introduction to Quidway S3526 LAN Switch .............................
2.4 Hardware Connections .....................................................................
2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning ...........................................................
2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning .................................................
2.4.3 Hardware Connections .............................................................
2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections ...........................................
2.4.5 Hardware Power-on..................................................................
Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra 20 ...................................
3.2 Configuring TC ..................................................................................
3.2.1 Introduction to TC .....................................................................
3.2.2 Configuring TC .........................................................................
3.3 Configuring Disk Array ......................................................................
3.4 Configuring Netra 20 .........................................................................
Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris ................................................
4.2 Installing Solaris 8 .............................................................................
4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Host ...................................................
4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8 ....................................................................
4.3 Installing Solaris Patches ..................................................................
4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools ...............................................................
4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch ..........................................................
4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches .............................................................
4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver .......................................................
4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch ............................................
4.4 Configuring Solaris ............................................................................
4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files ................................................
4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files .........................
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-8
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-11
2-14
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-26
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-9
4-9
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-16
4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root ..............................................

4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root .................................................
4.4.5 Executing the .profile File .........................................................
4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File .......................................
4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File ..................................................
4.4.8 Restarting the Hosts .................................................................
4.5 Installing Utilities ...............................................................................
4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software ......................................................
4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software ......................................................
Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software ....................................................
5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File .....................................................
5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network
Adapters ............................................................................................
5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File ...........................................
5.2.4 Cleaning Out Device Data ........................................................
5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0 ..................................................................
5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1 ..........................
5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2 ..........................
5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device ...............................................
5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes ................................
5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5 ...............................
5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager .......................................................
5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches .........................................
5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters.................................
5.4.4 Checking the Installation ..........................................................
5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses .................................................
5.5.1 Checking Hostid .......................................................................
5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent ......................................
5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License ..............................................
5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered ...........................
5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters .................................................
5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk ...................................................................
5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group ......................................
5.6.3 Configuring NAFO ....................................................................
5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group ..................................
5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script ....................................................
5.6.6 Checking the Configuration ......................................................
Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface .............................................................
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-18
4-18
4-19
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-7
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-16
5-16
5-17
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-23
6-1
6-1
6.2 Installing FTP ....................................................................................

6.3 Installing FTAM .................................................................................
6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 ............................................
6.3.2 Installation Preparations ...........................................................
6.3.3 Installation Steps ......................................................................
6.3.4 Configuring Parameters............................................................
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands .........................
Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server ............................................................
7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections .............................................
7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation ....................................
7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites ..........................................................
7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know .....................................
7.3 Installing Server Software .................................................................
7.4 Upgrading Server ..............................................................................
7.4.1 General Upgrade ......................................................................
7.4.2 Special Upgrade .......................................................................
7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version .............................................................
Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client ..............................................................
8.2 Installing Client Software ..................................................................
8.3 Upgrading Client ...............................................................................
8.4 Checking Client Software..................................................................
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-10
6-13
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-4
7-6
7-7
7-9
7-9
7-11
7-13
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-6
8-8
Part III Parameter Configuration and System

Commissioning
Chapter 1 Parameter Configuration .............................................................
1.1 Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console .............................
1.2 Common Operations .........................................................................
1.2.1 Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console .......................
1.2.2 Locking System ........................................................................
1.2.3 Adding Login .............................................................................
1.2.4 Logging out Office ....................................................................
1.2.5 Changing Password .................................................................
1.2.6 Closing Parameter Configuration Console ...............................
1.2.7 Viewing igwb.ini Parameter File ...............................................
1.2.8 Adding Parameter Sections ......................................................
1.2.9 Deleting Parameter Sections ....................................................
1.2.10 Adding Parameters .................................................................
i
1-1
1-1
1-6
1-6
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-15
1-16
1.2.11 Deleting Parameters ...............................................................

1.2.12 Modifying Parameter Value ....................................................
1.2.13 Comparing Parameters of Different Offices ............................
1.2.14 Saving the Configuration ........................................................
1.2.15 Loading the Parameter Configuration File ..............................
1.2.16 Obtaining the Configuration Information .................................
1.2.17 Customized Setting ................................................................
1.3 Configuring the igwb.ini File ..............................................................
1.3.1 Common Parameters ...............................................................
1.3.2 Cluster Parameters ...................................................................
1.3.3 Access Point Parameters .........................................................
1.3.4 MML Server Parameters ..........................................................
1.3.5 Log Parameters ........................................................................
1.3.6 Disk and File Control Parameters.............................................
1.3.7 Network Backup Parameters ....................................................
1.4 CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance ..................................
1.4.1 Networking Diagram .................................................................
1.4.2 Configuration of IP Addresses of Network Adapters ................
1.4.3 Content of the igwb.ini Configuration Files ...............................
1.5 Port Usage ........................................................................................
1.6 Modifying Client Settings ..................................................................
1.7 Network Backup Configuration Instance ...........................................
1.7.1 Network Backup Instance .........................................................
1.7.2 Simplest Backup Configuration ................................................
1.7.3 Configuring Two Backup Tasks ................................................
1.7.4 Configuring Two Backup Tasks with Different User Names
and Passwords ..................................................................................
1.7.5 Configuring Defaulted Backup Mode ........................................
1.7.6 Configuring Backup Time List...................................................
1.7.7 Configuring the Backup Start Time and End Time ...................
1.7.8 Configuring One-off Backup List ...............................................
1.7.9 Configuring the Last File Backup ..............................................
1.7.10 Configuring the Deletion of Source File after Backup .............
1.7.11 Configuring the Deletion of the Second Bill Copy without
Date Directory after Backup ..............................................................
1.7.12 Configuring the Save Days for Files under the Destination
Path ...................................................................................................
1.7.13 Configuring Connection Retry Times When Backup Fails......
1.7.14 Configuring the Source Backup Path for Status Files ............
1.7.15 Backup Precautions ................................................................
Chapter 2 System Running ..........................................................................
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-24
1-26
1-28
1-28
1-29
1-31
1-31
1-32
1-34
1-37
1-38
1-39
1-39
1-41
1-42
1-42
1-43
1-44
1-45
1-46
1-46
1-47
1-48
1-49
1-49
1-50
1-51
2-1
2.1 Introduction .......................................................................................

2.2 Program Startup on the CG9812 Server ...........................................
2.3 Program Close at the CG9812 Server ..............................................
2.4 Running Status of the CG9812 Client ...............................................
Chapter 3 System Commissioning ...............................................................
3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................
3.2 Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain ...............................
3.2.1 CG9812 and GSN ....................................................................
3.2.2 CG9812 and Billing Center .......................................................
3.2.3 CG9812 and NMS ....................................................................
3.3 CG9812 and Other Devices ..............................................................
3.3.1 CG9812 Receives CDRs ..........................................................
3.3.2 Billing Center Collects CDRs ....................................................
3.3.3 Connectivity Between NMS and CG9812.................................
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
Part IV Basic Operations

Chapter 1 Quick Start ...................................................................................
1.2 Introduction to CG9812 Client ...........................................................
1.3 GUI of the CDR Console ...................................................................
1.4 GUI of the Debugging Console .........................................................
Chapter 2 Common Operations ...................................................................
2.2 Logging in to the CDR Console ........................................................
2.3 Locking CDR Console .......................................................................
2.4 Logging out of the CDR Console ......................................................
2.5 Closing the CDR Console .................................................................
2.6 Customizing the Layout ....................................................................
2.7 Managing Operators .........................................................................
2.7.1 Adding an Operator ..................................................................
2.7.2 Deleting an Operator ................................................................
2.7.3 Modifying an Operator ..............................................................
2.8 Managing Offices ..............................................................................
2.8.1 Adding an Office .......................................................................
2.8.2 Deleting an Office .....................................................................
2.8.3 Modifying an Office ...................................................................
2.9 Customizing the System ...................................................................
2.9.1 Customizing Timeout Setting ....................................................
2.9.2 Customizing Lock Time ............................................................
2.10 Managing CDRs..............................................................................
i
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-6
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-6
2-8
2-8
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-15
2.10.1 Browsing CDRs by Type ........................................................

2.10.2 Browsing CDRs by Format .....................................................
2.10.3 Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions ..................................
2.10.4 Saving CDR Information .........................................................
2.10.5 Printing a CDR........................................................................
2.11 Managing Performance ...................................................................
2.11.1 Querying System Performance Status ...................................
2.11.2 Setting State Query Properties ...............................................
2.11.3 Clearing State Information ......................................................
2.12 Managing Logs ...............................................................................
2.12.1 Browsing Logs ........................................................................
2.12.2 Saving Logs ............................................................................
2.12.3 Clearing Logs .........................................................................
2.12.4 Printing Logs...........................................................................
2.13 Manual Switchover ..........................................................................
2.14 Auxiliary Upgrade ............................................................................
2.15 Logging in to the Debugging Console .............................................
2.16 Exiting the Debugging Console .......................................................
2.17 Managing Debugging Messages ....................................................
2.17.1 Browsing Debug Messages ....................................................
2.17.2 Saving Debug Messages ........................................................
2.17.3 Masking the Debug Level .......................................................
2.17.4 Setting Debug Colors .............................................................
2.18 Managing Protocol Messages.........................................................
2.18.1 Browsing Protocol Messages .................................................
2.18.2 Saving Protocol Messages .....................................................
2.19 Managing Workflow Messages .......................................................
2.19.1 Browsing Workflow Messages................................................
2.19.2 Saving Workflow Messages ...................................................
2-15
2-18
2-20
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-25
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-32
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-49
Part V System Maintenance

Chapter 1 System Overview .........................................................................
1.2 Types of System Users .....................................................................
1.3 System Directory and Main Files ......................................................
1.3.1 Directory structure and main files of the server ........................
1.3.2 CDR storage directory and main files .......................................
1.3.3 Common directory structure and main files ..............................
1.4 Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client .........................................
Chapter 2 Routine Maintenance ...................................................................
i
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-5
1-6
2-1

2.2 System Running ................................................................................
2.3 Hard Disk Detection ..........................................................................
2.4 Operation Maintenance.....................................................................
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................
3.2 Fault Positioning Information on the CG9812 ...................................
3.3 Fault positioning information on OS ..................................................
3.4 Collection of Fault Positioning Information ........................................
3.5 Trace Information and Maintenance .................................................
3.5.1 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum
Alarming Space .................................................................................
3.5.2 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum
Alarming Space .................................................................................
3.5.3 Usable Backup Medium Space Insufficient for the Minimum
Alarming Space .................................................................................
3.5.4 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum
Switchover Space ..............................................................................
3.5.5 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum
Switchover Space ..............................................................................
3.5.6 Access Point Type, Access Point Type Being %d ....................
3.5.7 Failure of Reading IP Address from MML Server (Default
Value %s) ..........................................................................................
3.5.8 Error Code %d Returned in Socket Registration When
Connecting Kernel Process ...............................................................
3.5.9 Kernel Process Not Running ....................................................
3.5.10 Failure of Opening Listening Port with Error Code %d ...........
3.5.11 Activation Failure of Asynchronous Resource ........................
3.5.12 Dual-System Activation Failure ..............................................
3.5.13 Switchover ..............................................................................
3.5.14 Switchover Failure ..................................................................
3.5.15 Operation Failure at Failover Response End .........................
3.5.16 Starting to Perform Handover Operation ................................
3.5.17 Multiple Failed Activation Attempts at Local Node and can
Never be Activated Unless Heartbeat is Interrupted .........................
Chapter 4 Frequently Asked Questions .......................................................
4.2 Logging in to CDR console failed......................................................
4.3 Conflicting TCP Port 6000 ................................................................
4.4 Failure to Decode ASN.1 CDR .........................................................
4.5 Failure to Run Setup Script ...............................................................
4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System ...........................................
4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System ...........................................
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4.8 Delayed CDR Fetching .....................................................................

4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after Sudden Power- off ........
4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System ........................
4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File.........................................................
4.12 A 3MB Original CDR Generated after One or Two Calls ................
4.13 Connection Failure Alarm During Backup over Network .................
4.14 Making Generated CDRs Meeting Special Requirements ..............
4.15 SUN Netra 20 cannot be started .....................................................
4.16 Sun Netra t1405 cannot be switched over ......................................
Chapter 5 System Alarms ............................................................................
5.2 ALM-0001 Insufficient Disk Space ....................................................
5.3 ALM-0003 BS Not Fetch CDRs for a Long Time ..............................
5.4 ALM-0005 Heartbeat Interruption .....................................................
5.5 ALM-0007 Cluster Switchover ..........................................................
5.6 ALM-0009 Private Network Interruption ............................................
5.7 ALM-0013 IP Resource Failure.........................................................
5.8 ALM-0015 Volume Resource Failure ................................................
5.9 ALM-0017 Hardware Failure .............................................................
5.10 ALM-0019 Write File Failure ...........................................................
5.11 ALM-0021 Abnormal CDR ..............................................................
5.12 ALM-0023 File Backup Failure ........................................................
5.13 ALM-0025 Backup Connection Failure ...........................................
5.14 ALM-0027 CPU Busy ......................................................................
5.15 ALM-0029 Insufficient Available Memory ........................................
5.16 ALM-0031 Unauthorized Client Login .............................................
5.17 ALM-0033 License Notice ...............................................................
5.18 ALM-0035 Cluster Handover ..........................................................
5.19 ALM-0037 Hardware Failure ...........................................................
5.20 ALM-0039 Software Reset ..............................................................
5.21 ALM-0051 Alarm Box Disconnection ..............................................
5.22 ALM-0053 User information Change ..............................................
5.23 ALM-0055 Insufficient Disk Space (major) ......................................
5.24 ALM-0057 Insufficient Available Memory (major) ...........................
5.25 ALM-0059 No GSN Response ........................................................
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-10
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-12
Appendix
Appendix A Common UNIX Commands ......................................................
A.1 Introduction to the Chapter ...............................................................
A.2 Common Operations in UNIX System ..............................................
i
A-1
A-1
A-1
A.3 Common Commands for UNIX User Management ..........................

A.4 UNIX Utility Commands and Programs ............................................
A.5 UNIX System Resource Commands ................................................
A.6 UNIX Network Communication Commands .....................................
Appendix B Abbreviations ............................................................................
Index ................................................................................................
A-6
A-6
A-7
A-7
B-1
HUAWEI
System Description
System Installation (Netra 240)
System Installation (Netra 20)
Parameter Configuration and System
Commissioning
Basic Operations
System Maintenance
Appendix
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
V200R002
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Manual Version
T2-030187-20050728-C-2.23
Product Version
V200R002
BOM
31013387
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Phone:0755-28560000 8008302118
Fax:0755-28560111
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,
, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,
Ltd.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual

Contents
The manual presents the principle, installation, operation, and maintenance of the
CG9812 in the following structure.
The manual contains five parts and two appendixes.
z
Part I System Description introduces the functional features, hardware structure,

software structure, networking, and technical specifications.
Part II System Installation (Netra 240) details the installation and configuration
of the CG9812 when SUN Netra 240 is used as the server of the CG9812.
Part II System Installation (Netra 20) details the installation and configuration of
the CG9812 when SUN Netra 20 is used as the server of the CG9812.
Part III Parameter Configuration and System Commissioning introduces the

parameter configuration and system commissioning of the CG9812.
Part IV Basic Operations presents the basic operations performed on the

CG9812, including user management, CDR browsing, CDR statistics, CDR query,
log browsing, and debugging trace.
Part V System Maintenance describes the software directory structure, routine

maintenance, troubleshooting, common trace information, common fault handling,
and alarm information of the CG9812.
Appendix A Common UNIX Commands gathers the common UNIX commands

for your reference.
Appendix B Abbreviations lists the full names of the acronyms and abbreviated
used in the manual.
Intended Readers
The manual is intended for the following readers:
z
Installation engineers
Project engineering technicians
Operation & maintenance specialists
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention
Description
Arial
Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow
Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.
Terminal Display
Terminal Display is in Courier New. Message input by the

user via the terminal is in boldface.
II. GUI conventions

Convention
Description
<>
Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click

the <OK> button.
[]
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are
inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User]
window.
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For

example, [File/Create/Folder].
III. Keyboard operation

Format
Description
<Key>
Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For
example, <Enter>, <Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A>.
<Key1+Key2>
Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A>

means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
IV. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.
Environmental Protection
This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental
protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws and
regulations must be observed.
HUAWEI
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Part I System Description
User Manual Part I System Description

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Orientation ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network ................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1 Network Architecture............................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 CG9812 Networking Implementation................................................................................. 1-4
Chapter 2 Key Benefits ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 System Features................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.1 Multi-access ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.2 Flexible CDR Format Conversion ........................................................................... 2-1
2.2.3 Large Capacity and Powerful Processing Capability .............................................. 2-1
2.2.4 High Reliability......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.5 Scalability ................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Networking Capability ........................................................................................................ 2-2
Chapter 3 System Architecture.................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Hardware Architecture ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Appearance of CG9812 Cabinet ............................................................................. 3-1
3.2.2 Cabinet Configuration ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.3 Typical Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Functional Architecture ...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Logical Architecture................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2 CG9812 Network Adapters ..................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.3 Communicating with the GSN ................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.4 Communicating with the Billing Center ................................................................... 3-9
3.3.5 Communicating with the LMT and the NMS ........................................................... 3-9
3.3.6 Heartbeat Path ........................................................................................................ 3-9
3.4 Software Architecture ........................................................................................................ 3-9
3.4.1 Key Terminologies................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.2 Overall Architecture............................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.3 Service Processes ................................................................................................ 3-11
Chapter 4 Services and Functions .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Network Functions ............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1 Interface to GSN...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Interface to Billing Center........................................................................................ 4-1
i

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
4.3 Service Functions .............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.3.1 CDR Processing...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.3.2 Cluster System Function ......................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.3 CDR Browsing and Querying Function ................................................................... 4-3
Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 OMC Networking................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.3 Operation and Maintenance Functions.............................................................................. 5-1
5.3.1 Security Management ............................................................................................. 5-2
5.3.2 Configuration Management..................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.3 Performance Management...................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.4 Fault Management .................................................................................................. 5-3
Chapter 6 Reliability ...................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 System Reliability............................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.1 Redundancy Design................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2.2 Component Selection, Control and Unification ....................................................... 6-1
6.2.3 Maintainability Design ............................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.4 Power Reliability Design ......................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Hardware Reliability........................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1 Power Supply Design.............................................................................................. 6-2
6.3.2 Common Hardware Design..................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.3 Redundancy Design................................................................................................ 6-3
6.3.4 Over-voltage and Over-current Protection .............................................................. 6-3
6.3.5 Hot Backup.............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.4 Software Reliability ............................................................................................................ 6-3
6.4.1 Protection Measures ............................................................................................... 6-3
6.4.2 Error Tolerance ....................................................................................................... 6-3
6.4.3 Fault Monitoring and Processing............................................................................. 6-4
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 System Performance ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.1 Basic Performance.................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2.2 Reliability Specifications.......................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 Mechanical Data ................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3.1 Dimensions.............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.3.2 Weight ..................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.3 Power Consumption................................................................................................ 7-2
7.4 Environmental Requirements ............................................................................................ 7-3
7.4.1 Storage Environment .............................................................................................. 7-3
7.4.2 Transportation Environment.................................................................................... 7-5

ii

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
7.4.3 Running Environment.............................................................................................. 7-7

iii

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812

1.1 Orientation
The CG9812 (Charging Gateway) is a product developed with well compliance with
relevant 3GPP standards by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as
Huawei) for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) solutions. It can
help operators construct cost-efficient and future-oriented mobile communication
networks.
The CG9812 is located between the UMTS network entities (including GGSN and
SGSN) and the billing center, and provides the mechanism to transfer charging
information from the UMTS network entities to the billing center. It supports
R98/R99/R4 protocol and related functions:
z
Collecting CDRs from the UMTS network entities.
Intermediating CDR storage buffering.
Processing CDR data.
Transferring the CDR data to the Billing Center.
This chapter contains the following:

z
Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network
CG9812 Networking Implementation
1.2 Position of CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS Network

1.2.1 Network Architecture
Figure 1-1 illustrates the typical networking of the CG9812 in UMTS/GPRS subsystem.
In the UMTS/GPRS network architecture, the CG9812 is a separate network element
(NE) installed in one cabinet and sits between GSN and the billing center, and provides
the functionality to transfer CDRs from the UMTS/GPRS network entities to the billing
center.
In doing so, the CG9812 interconnects with GSN and the billing center by LAN/WAN. In
addition, the CG9812 provides O&M interface and supports interconnection with the
NMS by LAN/WAN.

1-1

HUAWEI CG9812
GGSN
WAN
CG server
DDN/E1/X.25
TCP/IP
Ga
Billing center
FTP/FTAM
R
MML
SGSN
Ga
Custom interf ace
CDR collector
MML
NM center
CG client (Local end)
CG client (Remote end)
Equipment room
NM center
GGSN: Gateway GPRS Support Node

MML: Human-Machine Language
(formerly Man-Machine Language)
SGSN: Serving GPRS Support Node

FTP/FTAM: File Transfer Protocol/ File
Transfer, Access & Management
Figure 1-1 Typical networking of the CG9812

The external network entities/systems with which the CG9812 interconnects include
the GSN (including GGSN and SGSN), the Billing Center and the Network
Management System (NMS).
I. GSN
The CG9812 is interconnected with the GSN through LAN or WAN. A separate
10M/100M network adapter is provided on the CG9812 for this purpose.
The CG9812 supports the simultaneous accesses from the GSN (GGSN/SGSN) with
different versions. The GSN transfers CDRs in real time to the CG9812. Then the
CG9812 processes the CDRs and generates the final ones which will be transferred to
the billing center.
II. Billing Center

The CG9812 can interconnect with the billing center through LAN or WAN. A separate
10M/100M network adapter is provided on the CG9812 for this purpose.
The CG9812 supports the open and standard FTP/ FTAM protocol for the transfer of
CDR data to the billing center, which facilitates the integration with the billing center.
z
In the case of FTP, the CG9812 supports two modes, that is, the PULL mode and
the PUSH mode. In the PULL mode, the CG9812 acts as the server, and the CDR
collector as the client. The CDR collector collects the CDR file from the CG9812.
1-2

HUAWEI CG9812
In the PUSH mode, the CG9812 acts as the client, and the CDR collector acts as
the server. The CG9812 sends the CDR file to the billing center.
z
In the case of FTAM, the CG9812 supports the PULL mode. It acts as the
responder, and the CDR collector acts as the initiator in a way similar to FTP
communication. The CDR collector collects the CDR file from the CG9812.
III. LMT and NMS

The CG9812 provides the O&M interface and supports the management from the Local
Management Tool (LMT) and NMS. The CG9812 can interconnect with LMT/NMS by
LAN/WAN. A separate 10M/100M network adapter is provided on the CG9812 for this
purpose.
The LMT, which is the client end of the CG9812, is a friendly GUI tool, and can be run
on a PC placed at the local end of the CG9812 or remote NMS. The LMT can be easily
integrated into the remote NMS. The LMT talks with the CG9812 through MML over
TCP/IP, and provides abundant functions, for example, User Management,
Configuration Management, Fault Management, CDR Query and Browse, and so on,
which facilitate the O&M of the CG9812 locally or remotely from the NMS. The CG9812
can report all fault events to the NMS, accept instructions on respective fault events
from NMS, and trigger respective mechanisms, through MML over TCP/IP.
1.2.2 External Interfaces

Figure 1-2 shows the external interfaces of the CG9812.
OSS
FTP/FTAM
MML
M2000
BC
Core Network
Ga
GSN(GGSN/SGSN)
CG9812
OSS: Operating Support System
Figure 1-2 External interface of the CG9812

The CG9812 complies with UMTS specifications, and provides standard, open protocol
interfaces. Table 1-1 lists the major external interfaces of the CG9812.

1-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 1-1 External interfaces of the CG9812

Connected entities
Interface name
Applied protocol
GSN(GGSN/SGSN)CG
Ga
GTP
CGBilling Center
Billing Center Interface
FTP/FTAM
CGNMS
O&M Interface
MML Over TCP/IP
1.3 CG9812 Networking Implementation

The CG9812 features excellent compatibility and scalability, and can be smoothly
evolved to UMTS R98, R99, R4, and so on.

1-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 2 Key Benefits

2.1 Introduction to the Chapter
The CG9812 features advanced and stable system architecture, powerful networking
capability, and abundant service functions.
This chapter presents the features of the CG9812 in following aspects:
z
System Features
Networking Capability
2.2 System Features

2.2.1 Multi-access
The CG9812 supports the simultaneous accesses from GSN (GGSN/SGSN) with
different versions. It can collect CDRs from GSN (GGSN/SGSN). The CDRs originated
from GSN (GGSN/SGSN) with different versions can be stored separately and open to
the billing center.
2.2.2 Flexible CDR Format Conversion

The billing center of the operator has special requirements on the CDR formats. For
example, the system may require converting the original CDRs of binary format into the
final CDRs of other formats like binary, text or ASN.1 format, or require extracting some
specific fields in the original CDR to combine into a new CDR to provide to the billing
center. The CG allows you to configure and convert the CDR format. This meets the
requirements of operators.
2.2.3 Large Capacity and Powerful Processing Capability

The valid capacity of hard disks configured for the CG is directly related to the CDR
buffer capability of the CG. The higher the CDR buffer capability, the less urgent for
CDR storage in the billing center and the more secure for CDRs. Currently, the valid
capacity of the hard disk configured for the CG is enough to support 1,800,000
subscribers. The CDR processing capability can be 3000 CDRs/second. Whats more,
the CDR data can be stored for at least seven days in the CG. In addition, this capacity
can be further expanded.
2.2.4 High Reliability

The CG9812 has implemented the following mechanisms to ensure its high reliability:

2-1

HUAWEI CG9812
z
The CG9812 employs two minicomputers to compose a High Availability (HA)

System which supports auto-switchover between the primary and the secondary
nodes. When the current active node fails or cannot work properly, the peer node
will activate itself automatically to ensures its service uninterrupted.
The storage device is highly secured with 1+1 backup, each of which adopts
RAID5 plus hotspare.
Key interface/Path redundancy for the Ga interface and CG-BC interface. For
reliable communication, the CG9812 can connect to a SGSN, GGSN and BC
respectively by two redundancy links.
The CDRs can be transferred in real time to multiple remote workstations for
backup and reserved there for a pre-defined or configured period before being
deleted automatically. When required by the billing center, these CDRs can be
reopened to the billing center.
At least two copies of system data are kept in separate locations for redundancy
and in case of any accident. These copies of system data will be loaded and
validated against each other automatically by the restoration or recovering
process.
The whole system can be backed up to the tape drive regularly. In this case, you
can recover the system if a fault occurs.
2.2.5 Scalability
The CG9812 employs a modular structure. It is convenient and flexible in capacity and
function expansion, for which new modules can be added to import new functions and
technologies and to extend application areas.
When the capacity of the CG9812 need to be expanded to satisfy the requirement of
increased system capacity, the following measures can be considered, including
adding CPU and memory, adding hard disks, and so on.
2.3 Networking Capability

The CG9812 provides separate 10M/100M network adapters for interconnection with
GSN, the billing center, and the NMS respectively, and supports interconnection with
the GSN, billing center and NMS by LAN/WAN. The WAN can be DDN, E1, X.25, and
so on.

2-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 3 System Architecture

This chapter presents the system architecture in the following aspects:
z
Hardware Architecture
Functional Architecture
Software Architecture
3.2 Hardware Architecture

3.2.1 Appearance of CG9812 Cabinet
The CG9812 adopts N68-22 cabinet of Huawei, which is a standard 19-inch cabinet
and accords with IEC297 standards, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 CG9812 cabinet

3-1

HUAWEI CG9812
3.2.2 Cabinet Configuration

The CG9812 is installed in one cabinet. The main hardware components include active
and standby CG9812 servers, two LAN Switches and two disk arrays.
1)
If Netra 240 minicomputer is employed for the UNIX platform, the internal
configuration of the cabinet is shown in Figure 3-2.
CG9812 Cabinet
Power distribution frame (2U)
Quidway 3528G-1 (1U)
Cabling frame1U
Cabling frame (1U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
46U
Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Non-standard dummy panel (1U)
SUN StorEdge 3310-1 (2U)
Reserved for tape drive (1U)
SUN Netra 240-1 (2U)
Figure 3-2 Configuration of cabinet (with Netra 240 plus StorEdge 3310)
2)
If Netra 20 minicomputer is employed for the UNIX platform, the internal

configuration of the cabinet is shown in Figure 3-3.

3-2

HUAWEI CG9812
CG9812 Cabinet
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Quidway 3526-1 (1U)
Cabling frame (1U)
Quidway 3526-0 (1U)
Cabling frame (1U)
TC (Perle LOLAN) (1U)
SUN Netra 20-1 (4U)
SUN Netra 20-0 (4U)
Figure 3-3 Configuration of cabinet (with Netra 20 plus StorEdge 3310)
3.2.3 Typical Configuration

The CG9812 is configured in a separate cabinet. To adapt to different requirements of
capability and capacity, the CG9812 supports customized configuration. Under the
standard configuration, it supports 1,800,000 subscribers can be supported, and the
CDR data can be stored for at least seven days.
Table 3-1 and Table 3-2 present typical configurations of the main components of the
CG9812 under the UNIX platform.

3-3

HUAWEI CG9812
I. SUN Netra 240 plus StorEdge 3310

Table 3-1 Typical configuration of the CG9812 (with Netra 240)
Serial
No.
Components
Vendor/Model
Quantity
Description
Each Sun Netra 240
configuration:
z
Mini computer
Sun Netra 240
2 PCS
z
z
z
Sun StorEdge
3310
Disk array
Each Disk Array

configuration:
2 PCS
LAN switch
Huawei
Quidway
S3528G
CPU: 2*1.28 GHz

Memory: 2 GB
Hard disk: 2*73 GB
Ethernet adapter: 1*4
integrated adapter/1*2
interfaces adapter
2 PCS
SCSI card: 2*
bi-channel SCSI card
Hard disk: 5*73 GB
NA
II. SUN Netra 20 plus StorEdge 3310

Table 3-2 Typical configuration of the CG9812 (with Netra 20)
Serial
No.
Components
Vendor/Model
Quantity
Description
Each Sun Netra 20
configuration:
z
z
Mini computer
Sun Netra 20
2 PCS
z
z
z
Sun StorEdge
3310
Disk array
Each disk array

configuration:
2 PCS
Terminal
concentrator
Perle LOLAN or
others
1 PCS
NA
LAN switch
Huawei
Quidway S3526
2 PCS
NA

3-4
CPU: 1*1.2 GHz

Memory: 1 GB
Hard disk: 2*73 GB
Tape drive: DDS4
Ethernet adapter: 1
integrated adapter/1*1
interface adapter/1*4
interfaces adapter
SCSI card: 2*
bi-channel SCSI card
Hard disk: 5*73 GB

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
Because minicomputer might be updated, the minicomputer module might be different
from the actually delivered model.
3.3 Functional Architecture

This part presents the following aspects:
z
Logical Architecture
CG9812 Network Adapters
Communicating with the GSN
Communicating with the Billing Center
Communicating with the LMT and the NMS
Heartbeat Path
3.3.1 Logical Architecture

The CG9812 adopts a dual-system design. Two servers are operating in the active and
standby mode. Heartbeat link is set up between the servers. Handshake messages are
exchanged between them for each server to monitor the operating status of the other.
Whenever the active node becomes faulty, the standby node automatically becomes
active. The purpose is to ensure the services uninterrupted. In addition, each server
provides separate network adapters for communication with the GSN, the Billing Center,
and the NMS, respectively. The key interface/path, for example, the Ga interface and
CG-BC interface, supports 1+1 redundancy. That is, with every SGSN/GGSN and BC,
two logical links can be provided respectively on two physical links. So, the system has
a dual-plane structure, which further improves the reliability of the system.
1)
If Netra 240 minicomputer is employed, the logical architecture of the CG9812 is

shown in Figure 3-4.

3-5

HUAWEI CG9812
To NMS and LMT
float IP

To GSN
To BC
float IP
float IP
LAN
LAN
LAN
Maintenance terminal
NAFO
NET Mgt
NAFO
NET Mgt
bge0,bge1,bge2,bge3
Netra 240-0
bge0,bge1,bge2,bge3
ce0
Private network
ce0
Netra 240-1
Heartbeat
Mirror
ce1
ce1
SCSI card
Mirror
SCSI card
3310-0
Mirror
3310-1
Figure 3-4 Logical architecture of the CG9812 (with Netra 240)

2)
If Netra 20 minicomputer is employed, the logical architecture of the CG9812 is


3-6

HUAWEI CG9812
To NMS and LMT

float IP
To GSN
To BC
float IP
float IP
LAN
LAN
LAN
TC 1 2 3 4
NAFO
NAFO
ttya
ttya
qfe0,qfe1qfe2,qfe3
qfe0,qfe1,qfe2,qfe3
eri0
Netra 20-0
Private network
eri0
Netra 20-1
Heartbeat
Mirror
hme0
hme0
SCSI card
Mirror
SCSI card
3310-0
Mirror
3310-1
Figure 3-5 Logical architecture of the CG9812 (with Netra 20)
3.3.2 CG9812 Network Adapters

The CG9812 servers provide sereval network adapters for communication with other
equipment and each other, as listed in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Network adapters of the CG9812 Server
Network
adapters of
Netra 240
Network
adapters of
Netra 20
bge0
qfe0
Connected to the LMT and NMS.
bge1/bge2
qfe1/qfe2
Connected to the GSN(SGSN/GGSN).
bge3
qfe3
Connected to the billing center, providing a

billing interface.
ce0
eri0
Heartbeat link 1.
ce1
hme0
Heartbeat link 2.
No.
Function

3-7

HUAWEI CG9812
3.3.3 Communicating with the GSN

I. Communications Solution
The SGSN/GGSN connects with the CG9812 and sends the CDRs to 129.2.1.3 (the
default float IP configuration) through LAN Switch.
The CG9812 receives the CDRs from the SGSN/GGSN through Ga interface.
II. Implementation Mechanism

The CG9812 communicates with the host of the SGSN/GGSN through the network
adapter bge1 and adapter bge2 (with Netra 240).
z
The bge1 (qfe1 for Netra 20) of the active/standby CG9812 server connects with
the LAN Switch-0 and forms the active plane.
The bge2 (qfe2 for Netra 20) of the active/standby CG9812 server connects with
the LAN Switch-1 and forms the standby plane.
The two core LAN Switches are interconnected via the cascade cables.
III. Acquiring CDRs from the SGSN/GGSN

The CDR sending process is automatically triggered by the internal timer of the
SGSN/GGSN. The timer monitors the CDRs in the CDR pool. If there are CDRs in the
CDR pool, they will be sent to the CG9812 immediately. The software is set in ms level.
So the process can be considered as real-time sending.
IV. Distinguishing CDRs

The CG9812 eliminates the transmitting overhead of the CDRs sent by the
SGSN/GGSN, consolidates and saves the CDRs in the directory of /var/frontsave/R4.
The CDRs are called original CDRs. R4 is the access point name. The directory name
depends on the APName parameter value in igwb.ini configuration file. Here is only an
example.
Based on the distinguishing and conversion conditions, the CG9812 distinguishes and
converts the original CDRs into the CDRs that you need. This process is called CDR
distinguishing and conversion. The distinguished and converted CDRs are called final
CDRs.
CDR distinguishing is implemented in accordance with the format library. The format
library is in the directory of /opt/igwb/config/format.
Before generating the final CDRs, the CG9812 generates a temporary buffering file.
Then, the CG9812 generates the formal CDR files based on the trigger conditions (file
size or time interval) configured in igwb.ini.

3-8

HUAWEI CG9812
3.3.4 Communicating with the Billing Center

The CG9812 server communicates with the billing center by using bge3 (qfe3 for Netra
20) for the billing center to collect CDRs. The communication protocol can be FTP or
FTAM.
Normally, the billing center simultaneously logs in to the active and standby CG9812
servers. The active and standby CG9812 servers provide one float IP address to the
billing center.
3.3.5 Communicating with the LMT and the NMS

The bge0 (qfe0 for Netra 20) is used for connection between the NMS and the LMT,
providing a man-machine interface.
The bge0 (qfe0 for Netra 20) of the active/standby CG9812 server shall be set with the
same float IP address and shall be in the same network segment as the LMT/NMS.
3.3.6 Heartbeat Path

Heartbeat paths are configured between the active and standby CG9812 servers to
exchange handshake messages. With the heartbeat paths, each CG9812 server can
monitor the operating status of the other and back up the status for future switchover.
The status backed up includes CDR sequence number, front disk state, back disk state,
and so on. The system provides two heartbeat paths, which are called the private
network inside the system.
The first heartbeat path is two ce0 (eri0 for Netra 20) between active/standby servers
linked with the RJ45 cable. The second heartbeat path is two ce1 (hme0 for Netra 20)
between active/standby servers linked cross over RJ45 cable. When the first heartbeat
path is broken, the CG9812 servers use the second heartbeat path for communication.
3.4 Software Architecture

This section introduces the key terminologies, overall architecture and service process
of the CG9812.
3.4.1 Key Terminologies

This section introduces the key terminologies of the CG9812. Correct understanding of
the key terminologies will facilitate the use and maintenance of the CG9812.
I. Access Point
To access the GSNs of different release versions, access point is used in the design
of the CG9812. Based on the parameter configuration and operation maintenance, one
access point is associated with one ap_proc process. This process realizes the

3-9

HUAWEI CG9812
modules that communicate with the GSNs and the modules that store and convert the
CDRs.
II. Channel
Channel is a logical concept. A channel refers to the CDR processing modes and
storage directories that match a certain distinguishing condition. Simply speaking, one
channel is associated with one CDR storage path. Only the back save disk has the
channel.
III. Original CDR

The original CDRs refer to the unprocessed CDRs that the CG9812 receives from the
switches. The original CDRs are saved in files with a fixed size of 3MB for each in the
CG9812 disk. These files are called original CDR files.
IV. Final CDR

The CDRs that have been preprocessed (distinguishing and format conversion) by the
CG9812 are called final CDRs. The final CDRs can be saved as fixed-size or
fixed-interval files. These files are called final CDRs.
V. Format Library
The format library is the core that the CG9812 converts the CDRs. It is associated with
one format conversion module (dynamic link library) and a series of format
configuration files. The format library is designed to make the CDR format dynamically
configurable, but not hard-coded.
VI. Active/Standby
Active/standby is a pair of basic concepts for a cluster system. In a cluster system, if a
node provides external services, its state is called active. If a node currently does not
provide external services, its state is called standby.
VII. Primary/Secondary
Primary/secondary is a basic concept for a cluster system. In a cluster system, two
nodes may be peered or not peered. If they are not peered, then they can be defined as
primary or secondary. In this case, one node will be set with higher priority. If this node
runs normally, it has the priority to control the resources of the cluster system.
VIII. Resources
The physical equipment and logical equipment that are shared by the nodes of the
cluster system are called resources, such as shared storage media, and float IP
address.

3-10

HUAWEI CG9812
3.4.2 Overall Architecture

Overall, the CG9812 is a client/server system with multi-processes and multi-threads.
Based on independent services, the CG9812 software is set with the thread modules.
Then the thread modules with most related service functions are combined into one
process. So the entire software forms a multi-process and multi-thread architecture.
For the communication modes between processes, the CG9812 adopts the
client/server mode (currently, this is the most mature application mode). Specially, the
CG9812 has one process as the core process with other processes as sub-processes
so that one process can schedule and monitor the sub-processes of other services.
The overall software architecture of the CG9812 is shown in Figure 3-6.
Dual-process
process
GSN
Access
point
process
Kernel process
Operation &
maintenance
process
iGWB
Client
Parameter
configuration
process
CG9812 Server
Figure 3-6 CG9812 software architecture
3.4.3 Service Processes

As shown in Figure 3-6, the CG9812 server is composed of a kernel process, a
dual-system process, an access point process, and an operation and maintenance
process. Each process contains several service thread modules that are relatively
independent of each other.
I. Kernel Process
The kernel process is the core of the whole software. It acts as the Transmission
Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) server for the other processes. It is
responsible for starting, stopping, and monitoring the access point process and the
operation and maintenance process.
II. Access Point Process

The access point process incorporates the main service functions of the CG9812,
including CDR reception, CDR processing, and CDR storage. The service functions
are integrated to be a network module, a front disk module, a CDR processing module,
and a back disk module. The four modules constitute a CDR processing flow, in which
the service logic is uni-directional and can be cut down, as shown in Figure 3-7. (The
arrows stand for the flow directions of the CDR data.)
3-11

HUAWEI CG9812
GSN
Bill processing flow
Generates and
transmits bills
Receives bills and uses a particular

protocol to ensure bill transmission
against repetition or loss
Network module
Saves the bills received by network

module to form original bills
Front disk module
Combines and sorts bills as required,

and transmits bills to back disk module
Bill processing module
Saves bills by channel to form final

bills and provides bills to billing center
FTP/FTAM
Billing
center
Back disk module
Figure 3-7 CDR processing flow
III. Operation and Maintenance Process

The operation and maintenance process integrates the operability and maintainability
functions of the CG9812.
IV. Dual-system Process

It starts and manages kernel process to implement functionality details of the dual
system.
V. Parameter Confiugrtion Process

The parameter configuration process is the parameter configuration module of the
CG9812. The CG9812 supports remote parameter configuration through the GUI of the
parameter configuration console.

3-12

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 4 Services and Functions

This chapter describes the functions and services available on the CG9812.
The functions of CG9812 fall into three categories: network functions, service functions
and operation & maintenance functions.
z
Network functions include interface to GSN, and billing center.
Service includes CDRs processing functions, Cluster Functions, CDRs Browsing

and Querying, and so on.
Operation and maintenance functions include security management, configuration

management, performance management, and fault management.
Network functions and service functions are described in this chapter. Operation &
maintenance functions are described in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance.
4.2 Network Functions

4.2.1 Interface to GSN
CG9812 supports standard Ga interface to GSN, and collects CDRs from GSN in real
time through GTP protocol, and processes the CDRs and output final CDRs which will
be provided to the billing center.
4.2.2 Interface to Billing Center

The CG9812 provides industry standard FTP/FTAM protocol interface to the billing
center. The CDRs can be transferred to the operators designated billing center. Both
pull mode and push mode can be supported.
4.3 Service Functions

4.3.1 CDR Processing
CG9812 supports abundant CDR processing functionalities including but not limited to:
I. Collecting CDRs
The CG collects CDRs from SGSN/GGSN. Currently, the supported CDR formats
include S-CDR, G-CDR, M-CDR, S-SMO-CDR, S-SMT-CDR, LCS-MT-CDR,
LCS-MO-CDR, and LCS-NI-CDR. The last three types of CDRs are only available in
R4 or later versions.

4-1

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Pre-processing CDRs

1)
Consolidating CDRs
This function is optional.

The CG can consolidate multiple intermediate CDRs generated during one PDP
activation into a final CDR.
Currently, the CDR formats that can be consolidated include S-CDR and G-CDR.
2)
Sorting CDRs
The CG raises the concept of channel. The CG stores the collected CDRs to different
channels according to some sorting condition. The sorting conditions are configurable.
Currently, the supported modes include sorting by CDR type and by billing feature.
3)
Confirming CDR validity
The CG supports CDR validity confirmation. The CG decodes the collected CDRs. The
error CDRs, possibly caused by SGSN/GGSN or network errors, cannot be decoded by
CG and cannot be sent to the billing center.
III. Storing CDRs

1)
Original CDR storage
The CDR collected from SGSN/GGSN system and not processed by CG is called an
original CDR.
The CG supports original CDR storage. The original CDRs are stored in physical media
for some days (configurable) before they are deleted.
2)
Final CDR storage
The CDR processed by CG is called a final CDR, which will be transferred to the billing
center.
The CG supports final CDR storage. The final CDRs are stored in physical media for
some days (configurable) before they are deleted.
IV. Auto-deleting CDRs

The CG supports auto-deletion of original and final CDRs. The original and final CDRs
are stored as files. The expired CDR files will be deleted automatically. You can set the
number of days the original and final CDRs are stored. The default value is seven days.
V. Auto-backup CDRs
The CG supports auto-backup of original and final CDRs. After proper configuration,
the CDRs can be backed up to local or remote disks or other storage media.

4-2

HUAWEI CG9812
4.3.2 Cluster System Function

I. Auto switchover
The CG supports auto switchover between active and standby servers. When the fault
occurs to the active server, the standby one will activate itself and take the service over
automatically.
II. Auto synchronization

The CG supports auto synchronization between the active and standby servers. If the
dual system does not install the shared disk array, the active server can transmit the
status information of the local end to the peer end regularly.
III. Manual switchover

The CG supports manual switchover between active and standby servers. You can
perform the manual switchover on CG maintenance terminal.
4.3.3 CDR Browsing and Querying Function

The CG9812 supports CDR browse. The contents of the CDRs can be browsed in
human readable format on the LMT.
The CG9812 also supports CDRs query. The CDR query criteria can be a logical
expression based on a CDR field or a combination of CDR fields. The CDR query result
can be browsed on the LMT.

4-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance

This chapter presents the followings contents:
z
OMC Networking
Operation and Maintenance Functions
5.2 OMC Networking

The CG9812 supports customized man-machine interface and offers Security
Management, Configuration Management, Performance Management, and Fault
Management.
The CG9812 OMC can not only be controlled through the LMT, but also be managed by
iManager M2000 in a centralized way. The O&M networking of the CG9812 is
illustrated in Figure 5-1.
LMT
LAN/
WAN
LAN
iManager
M2000
GGSN/SGSN
WAN
Billing Center
CG9812
Figure 5-1 CG9812 O&M networking
5.3 Operation and Maintenance Functions

The operation and maintenance functions of the CG9812 include:
z
Security Management
Configuration Management
Performance Management
Fault Management

5-1

HUAWEI CG9812
5.3.1 Security Management

I. Overview of Security Management
The CG9812 O&M supports multiple users. For the purpose of security and
convenience, the system adopts authority management and log management.
II. Authority Management

The CG9812 supports authority management to prevent unauthorized access to the
system. In doing so, two user levels, including the administrator and the common user,
are defined and supported. The administrators have complete and unrestricted access
to all the system functions including user adding, user edition, user deletion, and user
rights assignment, and so on. The common users has a separate account. The users
operation rights are authorized by the system administrator.
III. Log management

It enables the querying of user operation records and system operation records. The
user operation records provide details on user name, user operation, and so on. The
system operation records provide details on the system running status, critical events,
and so on.
5.3.2 Configuration Management

The CG9812 parameter configuration function supports to add, delete, modify or query
the configuration data necessary for system operation.
The data configuration of the CG9812 provides the following functions:
z
Offline and online data configuration
Remote and local data configuration
Data backup and restoration
5.3.3 Performance Management

The CG9812 performance management function measures the following items:
z
Heartbeat
CPU usage
Physical memory available/total
Front storage available/total
Back storage available/total
The performance measurement provides original data of the equipment operation

status, equipment management situation and network optimization.
The heartbeat, CPU, memory, and storage measurements are done and reported in
real time.

5-2

HUAWEI CG9812
5.3.4 Fault Management

I. Overview of Fault Management
Fault management function helps to check, locate and fix system faults during its
operation. In addition, useful tools are available for routine maintenance of the system
and against the occurrence of faults. Fault management includes the following items:
z
System Self-Test
Alarm Management
Maintenance Management
Trace Management
II. System Self-Test

The CG9812 regularly tests itself on working conditions of hardware, software as well
as heartbeat, working environment, and so on. The CG9812 checks the occurrence
and severity of the event, processes the issue, and minimizes the impact on the
system.
III. Alarm Management

The CG9812 alarm management function supports to:
z
Detect and report in real time any fault or abnormity of the equipment
Generate audio and visual alarm signals through the alarm box
Present the alarm information as well as handling suggestion at the local

maintenance terminal to help troubleshoot the faults efficiently
IV. Maintenance Management

Maintenance management, as the basic function of the CG9812, can be conducted
conveniently through the LMT which is provided as a friendly GUI tool. Based on the
functions of the maintenance commands, maintenance management can be divided
into the following classes:
Table 5-1 Classification of maintenance management operations
Maintenance management class
Equipment Management
Including
Equipment state query
Tracking diameter message
Signaling Message Management
Tracking work flow message

Tracking debug information
Browsing CDRs
Querying CDRs
CDRs Management
CDRs Statistics
Printing CDRs

5-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Maintenance management class

Other maintenance functions
Including
Setting software parameters, and so on
V. Trace Management
The CG9812 trace management function supports to trace protocol messages and
workflow messages. The protocol message means messages exchanged between the
CG9812 and the GSN. The workflow message means internal workflow messages
exchanged between the thread service modules and/or processes. The tracing
messages can be output and displayed in real-time on LMT. This function helps to
locate and fix the network or communication problems.

5-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 6 Reliability
CG9812 is a bill handling and cache device. Its reliability design covers system,
hardware and software.
This chapter contains the following sections:
z
System Reliability
Hardware Reliability
Software Reliability
6.2 System Reliability

The system reliability design founds itself on the all-round reliability analysis to the
system. The CG9812 is designed with such reliability design methods as redundant
configuration and backup. Besides, it improves the system maintainability by optimizing
system fault detection/isolation technologies.
6.2.1 Redundancy Design

For the CG9812, the system redundancy design which shall be considered and have
been implemented includes:
Table 6-1 Redundancy Design
Module name
Feature
Power supply module
Working in load sharing mode.

Without affecting the system in case one fails.
Working in active/standby mode (1+1 backup).
Servers
In case that the active server fails, the standby server

will activate itself and take over the job automatically,
and all services will not be interrupted.
6.2.2 Component Selection, Control and Unification

Selection and usage of components are the keys to ensuring component reliability. For
the CG9812, component types, specifications and suppliers are selected according to
the requirements of product reliability, with the component replacement and unification
focused. The component unification and reliability model analysis reduce the number of
components used and improve the system usability.

6-1

HUAWEI CG9812
6.2.3 Maintainability Design

Maintainability design aims at meeting the specified quantity and quality requirements
for maintainability, especially the requirement for reducing maintenance time. The
maintenance design covers product design and maintenance simplification,
reachability, standardization and exchangeability, modularization, error prevention
design and identifier, testing and diagnosis technology, and human and environment
factors. The details are described as follows:
z
The LMT, developed as a friendly GUI tool with abundant O&M functions, is
convenient and practical for the O&M of the CG9812.
The servers support automatic or manual switchover, and the disk arrays can be
hot-pluggable.
The implemented mechanism of system monitoring and self-management

supports real time detection of fault automatically and respective dealing of the
fault. The corresponding alarm will be issued or reported to NMS and cleared
when the fault has been eliminated.
6.2.4 Power Reliability Design

Power reliability design is to improve the reliability of the power supply through such
measures as power over-current/over-voltage protection, internal temperature
adjustment and protection, redundancy design, and independent protection device.
6.3 Hardware Reliability

In the CG9812, the widely applied reliability design methods include redundant
configuration supporting automatic switchover. Besides, it improves the system
maintainability through system fault detection/isolation technologies.
6.3.1 Power Supply Design

z
Adopting distributed power supply scheme, and supplying power by the redundant
high-frequency DC. This scheme features high efficiency and excellent stability.
Adopting N+1 backup design to ensure the reliability of the power system.
6.3.2 Common Hardware Design

z
Adopting two minicomputers to compose a High Availability (HA) System which

supports auto-switchover between the primary and the secondary nodes. All
service-critical components, for example, control card, power supply module, LAN
port, hard disk, server, and so on, are duplicated.
The storage device is highly secured with 1+1 backup, each of which adopts
RAID5 plus hotspare.

6-2

HUAWEI CG9812
6.3.3 Redundancy Design

In case of software or hardware fault, the system will not be interrupted because of
redundancy design. It is ensured that services will be switched to backup devices
without affecting the normal running of the system.
6.3.4 Over-voltage and Over-current Protection

The +5 V/-48 V power input is protected by the over-voltage/over-current protection
measures. They comply with the ITU-T Recommendation G.703 and relative
specifications.
6.3.5 Hot Backup

To improve system reliability, hot backup is one of the most commonly used methods in
telecommunications equipment. These two aspects are considered in the design of the
CG9812.
z
Fault detection: Performing online monitoring of the modules and components to

detect any fault in real time.
Switchover mechanism: Implementing auto-switchover between the active node

and standby node through two more path signals between them.
6.4 Software Reliability

6.4.1 Protection Measures
Modularization idea is adopted to design the software. The software modules are
based on loose coupling mechanism, for which other modules will not be affected in
case that one module fails. Besides, error detection, error isolation and error recovery
are added to avoid potential problems.
6.4.2 Error Tolerance

The error tolerance of the software system can avoid the breakdown of the entire
system in case of the failure occurring to a software portion. That is, the system has the
self-healing ability when errors occur. The software error tolerance capabilities include
the following aspects:
z
Periodical check of key resources
Task monitoring
Storage protection
Data check
Operation log storage

6-3

HUAWEI CG9812
6.4.3 Fault Monitoring and Processing

The reliability and health of the software system, to a great extent, is ensured by the
fault monitoring system and proper troubleshooting, especially after the software is
commercialized. Fault processing includes the following parts:
z
Backup and switchover mechanism
Isolation
Restarting and automatic recovery
Overload control

6-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications

This chapter describes the technical specifications. It contains the following sections:
z
System Performance
Mechanical Data
Environmental Requirements
7.2 System Performance

7.2.1 Basic Performance
Table 7-1 Performance specifications for the CG9812
Parameter
Specification
Standard configuration: 219 GB
Hardware capacity
Full configuration: 730 GB
Performance of the integrated

equipment
3000 CDRs/second
7.2.2 Reliability Specifications

Table 7-2 Major reliability specifications for the CG9812
Parameter
Specification
System Availability (A)
99.999%
System MTBF
10 years
Mean Time To Repair (MTTR)
30 mins (excluding preparation time)
DOWN duration
<3 mins/year

7-1

HUAWEI CG9812
7.3 Mechanical Data

7.3.1 Dimensions
Table 7-3 Cabinet dimensions of the CG9812
Item
Performance specification
Hardware platform
Cabinet
dimensions
SUN Netra 240 or SUN Netra 20

Width
600 mm
Depth
800 mm
Height
2,200 mm
Available height of cabinet
46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)
7.3.2 Weight
Table 7-4 Cabinet weight of the CG9812
Item
Cabinet weight
310 kg
Designed bearing capacity of the

floor in the equipment room
450 kg/m
7.3.3 Power Consumption

Table 7-5 Power consumption specifications of the CG9812
Item
Power supply
Power consumption
Rated voltage
48V DC
Voltage fluctuations
57V40V
SUN platform
1.5 kW

7-2

HUAWEI CG9812
7.4 Environmental Requirements

7.4.1 Storage Environment
I. Climate Environment
Table 7-6 Climate environment requirements
Item
Range
Height above sea level
5,000 m
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature
40C to +70C
Temperature change rate
1C/min
Relative humidity
10% to 100%
Solar radiation
1,120 W/s
Heat radiation
600 W/s
Wind speed
30 m/s
II. Biological Environment

It is required to avoid propagation of epiphyte, mildew and other microorganism.
It is required to prevent rodent animals, such as mouse.
III. Air Cleanness

There is no explosive, conductive, magneto-conductive or corrosive dust.
The density of mechanically active materials shall comply with the requirements listed
in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 Density requirements for mechanically active materials
Mechanically active material
Unit
Content
Suspending dust
mg/m
5.00
Precipitable dust
mg/mh
20.0
Sand
mg/m
300
Note:
1) Suspending dust: diameter 75 m
2) Precipitable dust: 75 m diameter 150 m
3) Sand: 150 m diameter 1,000 m

7-3

HUAWEI CG9812
The density of chemically active materials shall comply with the requirements listed in
Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Density requirements for chemically active materials
Chemically active material
Unit
Content
SO2
mg/m
0.30 to 1.00
H2S
mg/m
0.10 to 0.50
NO2
mg/m
0.50 to 1.00
NH3
mg/m
1.00 to 3.00
Cl2
mg/m
0.10 to 0.30
HCl
mg/m
0.10 to 0.50
HF
mg/m
0.01 to 0.03
O3
mg/m
0.05 to 0.10
IV. Mechanical Stress

Table 7-9 Mechanical stress requirements
Item
Sinusoidal vibration
Non-stable impulse
Sub-item
Range
Offset
7.0 mm
Accelerated speed
20.0 m/s
Frequency range
2 Hz to 9 Hz
9 Hz to 200 Hz
Impulse
spectrum II
250 m/s
response
5 kPa
Payload
Note:
1) Impulse response spectrum: It refers to the maximum accelerated speed

response curve generated by the equipment under the specified impulse motivation.
Impulse response spectrum II means that the duration of half-sine impulse response
spectrum is 6 ms.
2) Payload: It refers to the bearable pressure from the upper piled equipment with
package in prescribed piling mode.

7-4

HUAWEI CG9812
7.4.2 Transportation Environment

Table 7-10 Climate environment requirements
Item
Range
5,000 m
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature
40C to +70C
3C/min
Relative humidity
10% to 100%
Solar radiation
1,120 W/s
Heat radiation
600 W/s
Wind speed
30 m/s
Rain
6 mm/min

III. Air Cleanness

The density of mechanically active materials shall comply with the requirements shown
in Table 7-11.
Unit
Content
Suspending dust
mg/m
No requirement
Precipitable dust
mg/mh
3.0
Sand
mg/m
100
Note:

7-5

HUAWEI CG9812
The density of chemically active materials shall comply with the requirements listed in
Table 7-12.
Unit
Content
SO2
mg/m
1.00
H2S
mg/m
0.50
NO2
mg/m
1.00
NH3
mg/m
3.00
Cl2
mg/m
0.30
HCl
mg/m
0.05
HF
mg/m
0.03
O3
mg/m
0.10

Item
Sinusoidal
vibration
Random vibration
Non-stable
impulse
Sub-item
Range
Offset
7.5 mm
Accelerated speed
20.0
m/s
40.0 m/s
Frequency range
2 Hz to 9
Hz
9 Hz to
200 Hz
200 Hz to 500
Hz
Spectrum density of
accelerated speed
10 m/s
3 m/s
1 m/s
Frequency range
2 Hz to 9
Hz
9 Hz to
200 Hz
200 Hz to 500
Hz
Impulse response
spectrum II
300 m/s
Payload
10 kPa
Note:
spectrum is 6 ms.

7-6

HUAWEI CG9812
7.4.3 Running Environment

Table 7-14 Temperature and humidity requirements
Climate item
Working for a long term
Working for a short term
Temperature
+5 C to +45 C
5 C to +55 C
Relative humidity
5% to 85%
5% to 95%
Note:
1) The measurement points of temperature and humidity of the CG9812 refer to the
values measured 1.5 meters above the floor and 0.4 meter away from the front of the
CG9812 shelf when there are no protection panels in the front and back of the
CG9812 shelf.
2) Short term means that the consecutive working duration is not more than 48 hours
and that the accumulated working duration of a year is not more than 15 days.
Table 7-15 Other climate environment requirements

Item
Range
4,000 m
70 kPa to 106 kPa
5 C/h
Solar radiation
700 W/s
Heat radiation
600 W/s
Wind speed
1 m/s
IP level
IP50

III. Air cleanness

The density of mechanically active materials should comply with the requirements
shown in Table 7-16.

7-7

HUAWEI CG9812

Unit
Content
Dust particle
particle/m
3 10
Suspending dust
mg/m
0.2
Precipitable dust
mg/mh
1.5
Sand
mg/m
30
Note:
1) Dust particle: diameter 5 m
The density of chemically active materials should comply with the requirements
shown in Table 7-17.

Unit
Content
SO2
mg/m
0.30 to 1.00
H2S
mg/m
0.10 to 0.50
NO2
mg/m
0.50 to 1.00
NH3
mg/m
1.00 to 3.00
Cl2
mg/m
0.10 to 0.30
HCl
mg/m
0.10 to 0.50
HF
mg/m
0.01 to 0.03
O3
mg/m
0.05 to 0.10
CO
mg/m
5.0

Item
Sinusoidal vibration
Sub-item
Range
Offset
5.0 mm
Accelerated speed
2.0 m/s
Frequency range
5 Hz to 62 Hz
62 Hz to 200 Hz

7-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Item
Non-stable impulse
Sub-item
Range
Impulse response
spectrum II
50 m/s
Payload
Note:
spectrum is 6 ms.

7-9
HUAWEI
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Part II System Installation (Netra

240)
User Manual Part II System Installation (Netra 240)

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Installation Overview................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Installation Flow ................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 Installation Time Planning ....................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Installation Preparations .................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 Hardware Preparations ........................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 Software Preparations............................................................................................. 1-4
1.4 Resource Planning ............................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4.1 HA System Planning ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2 IP Address Planning................................................................................................ 1-7
1.4.3 Disk Space Planning ............................................................................................... 1-8
Chapter 2 Installing and Configuring Hardware......................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Hardware Description ........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 240 ................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.2 Introduction to SUN StorEdge 3310 Disk Array ...................................................... 2-5
2.3.3 Introduction to Quidway S3528G LAN Switch ........................................................ 2-6
2.4 Hardware Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning ......................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning ................................................................................ 2-8
2.4.3 Hardware Connections............................................................................................ 2-8
2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections........................................................................ 2-10
2.4.5 Hardware Power-on .............................................................................................. 2-15
Chapter 3 Configuring SC and Disk Array.................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Configuring SC................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Introduction to SC ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2 Configuring SC ........................................................................................................ 3-1
3.3 Configuring Disk Array....................................................................................................... 3-4
Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris ............................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Installing Solaris 8.............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Netra 240 ......................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8 ................................................................................................... 4-2

i

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
4.3 Installing Solaris Patches................................................................................................... 4-7

4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch....................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches.......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver ................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch ......................................................................... 4-12
4.4 Configuring Solaris .......................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files............................................................................. 4-13
4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files...................................................... 4-14
4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root........................................................................... 4-15
4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root.............................................................................. 4-15
4.4.5 Executing the .profile File...................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File ................................................................... 4-16
4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File............................................................................... 4-16
4.4.8 Modifying the /etc/inet/netmasks File .................................................................... 4-16
4.4.9 Restarting the Hosts.............................................................................................. 4-17
4.5 Installing Utilities .............................................................................................................. 4-17
4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software .................................................................................. 4-17
4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software................................................................................... 4-17
Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File .................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters ................................ 5-3
5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File ......................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Cleaning out Data ................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1........................................................................ 5-3
5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2...................................................................... 5-10
5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device............................................................................ 5-13
5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes ............................................................ 5-14
5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5.............................................................. 5-15
5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager.................................................................................... 5-15
5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches...................................................................... 5-16
5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters ............................................................. 5-17
5.4.4 Checking the Installation ....................................................................................... 5-17
5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses................................................................................ 5-18
5.5.1 Checking Hostid .................................................................................................... 5-18
5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent .................................................................. 5-18
5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License........................................................................... 5-19
5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered........................................................ 5-19
5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters................................................................................ 5-19
ii

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk ............................................................................................... 5-20

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group................................................................... 5-21
5.6.3 Configuring NAFO ................................................................................................. 5-24
5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group............................................................... 5-25
5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script ................................................................................ 5-26
5.6.6 Checking the Configuration................................................................................... 5-26
Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface ........................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Installing FTP ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Installing FTAM .................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 ........................................................................... 6-1
6.3.2 Installation Preparations.......................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.3 Installation Steps ..................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.4 Configuring Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-11
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands ..................................................... 6-14
Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections............................................................................ 7-1
7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation................................................................... 7-1
7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites ......................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know ................................................................... 7-6
7.3 Installing Server Software.................................................................................................. 7-7
7.4 Upgrading Server............................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.1 General Upgrade..................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.2 Special Upgrade.................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version............................................................................................ 7-13
Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client.............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Installing Client Software ................................................................................................... 8-1
8.3 Upgrading Client ................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4 Checking Client Software .................................................................................................. 8-8

iii

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Installation Overview

The CG9812 system uses Solaris as the operating system (OS), Veritas Volume
Manager as the disk management software, and the high-availability (HA) SUN Cluster
as the system management software.
This chapter introduces the contents below:
z
Installation Flow
Installation Preparations
Resource Planning
1.2 Installation Flow

This section introduces the installation steps and time planning.
1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart

Figure 1-1 shows the overall installation flow of the CG9812 server.

1-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Begin Installation
Plan hardware, software, and

system resources
Install Hardware
Configure SCs and disk arrays
Install Solaris, Cluster, VM, and

related patches
Partition disk space
Map system disk
Install billing interface (optional)
Install and configure CG9812

server software
client software
Check installation
Finish installation
Figure 1-1 Installation flow chart
1.2.2 Installation Time Planning

It is estimated to take eight hours to install the CG9812 HA system. For details, see
Table 1-1.
1-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 1-1 Time planning

Task No.
Task description
Estimated time(hour)
Installing hardware
0.5
Configuring hardware parameters
0.5
Installing Solaris (with two sets of CDs)
Installing Solaris patches (with two sets of

CDs)
1.5
Installing SUN Cluster
0.5
Configuring SUN Cluster
0.5
Installing VxVM
Configuring VxVM
Installing CG9812 software
0.4
10
Checking installation
0.2
1.3 Installation Preparations

This section introduces hardware and software preparations before the CG9812 is
installed.
1.3.1 Hardware Preparations

The CG9812 uses the SUN Netra 240 minicomputers and the SUN StorEdge 3310 disk
arrays as its main hardware. The required hardware is given below:
z
Two Netra 240 minicomputers with the same configurations
Two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays with the same configurations
Two S3528G LAN Switches with the same configurations
One or more PC consoles or SUN workstation as the operation terminal for

software installation and routine maintenance
For detailed hardware configuration, see Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Hardware configuration
Item
Netra 240
minicomputer
Configuration
CPU
2*1.28 GHz
Memory
2 GB
Hard disk
2*73 GB

1-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Item
Configuration
Network
Adapter
StorEdge 3310
disk array
S3528G LAN
switch
1)
One 4-port built-in network adapter. The four

ports are bge0, bge1, bge2, and bge3. This
adapter is used to connect the public network
for application purposes. bge1 and bge2 serve
as NAFO links.
2)
One 2-port external network adapter. The two

ports are ce0 and ce1, which serve as
heartbeat links.
3)
The serial Mgt port connects with the

maintenance terminal, while the net Mgt port is
used to manage the 3310 disk arrays.
DVD-ROM
Tape drive
None
Power
supply
Dual DC power input
Capacity
5*73 GB or higher
SCSI port
Two SUN FastEtherNet SCSI Adapter and each

Adapter with one port
Power
supply
Dual DC power input
Network
port
24
Power
supply
Single DC power input
1.3.2 Software Preparations

I. Description of the host system
The CG9812 uses the Netra 240 minicomputers with the SUN Cluster software. The
Sun Cluster is cluster software with high availability (HA). In SUN Cluster, two or more
hosts are organized over various networks into a cluster, and each host is called a
node.

1-4

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Software configuration

Table 1-3 shows the software configuration of the CG9812.
Table 1-3 Software configuration
Type
item
configuration
Solaris 8 (02/04 SPARC Platform)
OS
System
software
Solaris Patch
Cluster software
SUN Cluster 3.0
Volume manager
Veritas Volume Manager 3.5 with License
Billing interface
software (optional)
Vertel UTS-FTAM software (Solaris version)
Applications
CG9812 applications
Server: CG9812 V200R002 Server (in

Solaris with SC agent script)
Client: CG9812 V200R002 Client ( in
Windows)
III. Schematic of software installation

The OS, the cluster software, the disk management software, billing interface software
(optional), and the CG9812 server software are installed on the local disk. The original
bills, final bills, logs, and alarms are stored on the shared disk. See Figure 1-2.

1-5

HUAWEI CG9812
igwb1
igwb2
SUN OS
SUN OS
SUN Cluster
SUN Cluster
Volume Manager
Volume Manager
FTP/FTAM(optional)
FTP/FTAM(optional)
CG9812 Server
CG 9812 Server
3310-0
igwbdg (original blls, final bills, logs, and alarms)

Mirroring
Mirroring
igwbdg (original bills, final bills, logs, and alarms)
3310-1
Figure 1-2 Software installation schematic
1.4 Resource Planning

Resource planning must be done before the software installation, including:
z
HA System Planning
IP Address Planning
Disk Space Planning
1.4.1 HA System Planning

Table 1-4 shows the planning for the HA system components.
Table 1-4 HA system planning
Item
Primary node
Secondary node
Cluster name
sc-igwb
sc-igwb
Cluster node
igwb1
igwb2
Transport path 1
ce0
ce0
Transport path 2
ce1
ce1
NAFO Group 0
bge0
bge0
NAFO Group 1
bge1/bge2
bge1/bge2
NAFO Group 2
bge3
bge3

1-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Item
Primary node
Secondary node
Quorum devices
d4
d4
Root Password
root
root
1.4.2 IP Address Planning

The CG9812 uses SUN Cluster 3.0 as the cluster management software. It is
configured with two types of IP addresses, including the fixed IP and the floating IP.
Currently, the CG9812 is configured with eleven fixed IPs and three floating IPs. Each
node of the CG9812 uses three fixed IPs. Each disk array is configured with one IP.
One fixed IP is for the ALOM network port of the primary node, and one for the ALOM
port of the secondary node. One fixed IP address is for the maintenance terminal. And
three floating IPs are used for the CG9812 to connect with the external communication
devices. For details, see below:
z
In SUN Cluster, the heartbeat IP is automatically set by the system.
In configuration, the Netra 240 is provided with a 4-port built-in network adapter,
which is used to connect the public network for application purposes. The four
ports are bge0, bge1, bge2, and bge3. bge1 and bge2 serve as the NAFO links.
Also, the Netra 240 has an external 2-port network adapter. The two ports are ce0
and ce1, which serve as the heartbeat links.
The floating IPs and the fixed IPs are set in the same network segment.
Below is an example of the IP configuration. See Table 1-5 and Table 1-6.
Table 1-5 IP address planning
Device
Fixed IPs of the

primary node
(logical host name)
Fixed IPs of the

secondary node
(logical host name)
Floating IP (logical
host name)
Description
bge0
129.1.1.1(igwb1)
129.1.1.2(igwb2)
129.1.1.3(ha-igwb)
Connect with the

NMS and the
maintenance
console.
bge1
129.2.1.1(igwb11)
129.2.1.2(igwb21)
129.2.1.3(ha-igwb1)
Connect with the

SGSN or the
GGSN.
bge3
129.3.1.1(igwb13)
129.3.1.2(igwb23)
129.3.1.3(ha-igwb3)
Connect with the

billing center.
ce0
Not required
Not required
Heartbeat link 1.
ce1
Not required
Not required
Heartbeat link 2.

1-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 1-6 Planning for other IP addresses

Device
IP address (logical host name)
Description
PC
Maintenance
terminal
129.1.1. 4(admin)
Connect with the SC serial

port through the serial port of
the PC hyper terminal.
igwb1 SC IP
129.1.1.11(igwb1-sc)
SC IP of igwb1.
Igwb2 SC IP
129.1.1.12( igwb2-sc)
SC IP of igwb2.
3310-0
129.1.1.13
Manageable IP of 3310-0.
3310-1
129.1.1.14
1.4.3 Disk Space Planning

The local disk space and shared disk space should be planned before installation.
I. Local disk space planning

The section describes the general planning principles for hard disk space. Hard disk
partition varies with the hardware configurations.
Each Netra 240 is provided with two 73 GB hard disks. These disks are configured as
mirrored partitions (RAID1). In this case, the available built-in hard disk space of each
Netra 240 is the space of a single disk, namely 73 GB. Next follows the description of
several common file systems of the SUN Solaris system:
1)
Root Directory
Allocate sufficient space to the root directory since its size cannot be changed with the
UNIX commands. The type of the root file system is User File System (UFS).
2)
SWAP
The required disk space for SWAP depends on the size of the host memory and the
expected maximum memory size. In short, the space of SWAP and the host memory
decides the maximum available memory. The size of SWAP shall be at least 1.5 times
larger than the physical memory. According to the disk capacity and its expansion
requirements, the SWAP is set to 10GB.
3)
/globaldevices
This is the global devices partition with 500 MB. It is used by the VxVM.
The recommended system planning is shown in Table 1-7.

1-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 1-7 Local disk planning

Slice Number*
mount point
size
Description
c1t0d0s0
57 GB
Root.
c1t0d0s1
swap
10 GB
SWAP.
68.35 GB
The size of the whole hard disk,

which may be different from the
actual number displayed.
c1t0d0s2
Overlap
Note: Do not change this partition.
c1t0d0s3
This is reserved to encapsulate the

Volume Manager.
Note: This partition must be
reserved.
Volume Manager.
c1t0d0s4
c1t0d0s5
c1t0d0s6
/globaldevices
512 MB
This is used to install SUN

Cluster3.0.
c1t0d0s7

reserved.
II. Disk array planning

Each StorEdge 3310 is configured with five 73GB hard disks set in RAID5+HotSpare
mode. Two Sun StorEdge 3310 are set to RAID1, which is partitioned into LUN0 and
LUN1. 200 MB is allocated to LUN0 for the Quorum device, while 209,253 MB is
allocated to LUN1 to store data of the CG9812, including original bills, final bills, logs,
and alarms. Table 1-8 shows the planning for a disk group. For logical volume
partitioning on LUN1, see Table 1-9.
1)
Disk group partitioning
Table 1-8 Disk group partitioning

Group
name
Allocated hard
disk
hotspare hard
disk
Host
Description
Rootdg
Hard disk of SC1
None
igwb1
Rootdg of SC1
Rootdg
Hard disk of SC2
None
Igwb2
Rootdg of SC2
igwbdg
LUN1 on 3310
None
igwb1/igwb2
Shared disk
group

1-9

HUAWEI CG9812
2)
Logical volume partitioning
Table 1-9 Logical volume partitioning

Disk
group
disk (disk
used for
mirror)
Logical
volume
name
Logical
volume
size
igwbdg-stat
log-alarm
igwbdg
Mount point
512MB
4096MB
Fixed size.
/var/other
Fixed size.
This volume
stores logs
and alarms.
/var/frontsave
The actual
size. This
volume
stores
original bills.
/var/backsave
The actual
size. This
volume
stores final
bills.
c2t0d1
c3t0d1
front
101376MB
back
101376MB
Remarks
Figure 1-3 shows the hard disks in the 3310 disk arrays.
3310-1
7
8
9
10
11
12
c2t8d0
c2t9d0
c2t10d0
c2t11d0
c2t12d0
3310-2
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 1-3 Hard disks in 3310 disk arrays

1-10
c3t8d0
c3t9d0
c3t10d0
c3t11d0
c3t12d0

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 2 Installing and Configuring Hardware

This chapter introduces how to install the main hardware of the CG9812 and how the
cables are connected. Before you perform these operations, make sure the cabinet and
its internal devices are installed. This chapter includes the following contents:
z
Cabinet Configuration
Hardware Description
Hardware Connections
2.2 Cabinet Configuration

The CG9812 server uses the N68-22 cabinet. To configure the cabinet, see Figure 2-1

2-1

HUAWEI CG9812
CG9812 Cabinet
Cabling frame1U
Cabling frame (1U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
46U
Dummy panel (3U)

Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Figure 2-1 Cabinet configuration

The internal devices include two Netra 240 minicomputers, two StorEdge 3310 disk
arrays, and two Quidway 3528G LAN Switches.

2-2

HUAWEI CG9812
2.3 Hardware Description

For hardware configuration, refer to 1.3.1 Hardware Preparations. The
high-availability CG9812 sever covers two nodes of the Cluster. This section introduces
the Netra 240 and the StorEdge 3310 disk array.
2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 240

I. Configuration and ambient indices
Table 2-1 shows the configuration, ambient indices, and physical spec for the Netra 240
minicomputer.
Table 2-1 SUN Netra 240
Configuration index
Value
CPU
2*1.28 GHz (8M Cache)
Memory
2 GB
Hard disk
2*73 GB
Ambient index
parameter
Power
supply
temperature
AC
90264 VAC, 47 Hz 63 Hz. The maximum input

power is 550 W (AC).
DC
48 60 VDC. The maximum input power is 570 W

(DC).
Running
Storage
Humidity
value
Running
Storage
0C 40C (32F104F) (AC)

5C +45C(23F 113F) (DC)
40C +70C (40F 158F)
10%90%, non-condensation (AC)
5%93%, non-condensation (DC)
5%93%, non-condensation
Physical spec index
Value
Height
87.4 mm (3.44in, 2U)
Width
425.0 mm (16.73in)
Depth
508.0 mm (21in)
Weight
18.6 kg (41 pounds)

2-3

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Front view of Netra 240

The front view of Netra 240 is shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Front view of Netra 240
III. Back view of Netra 240

The back view of Netra 240 is shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Back view of Netra 240

Netra 240 is provided with the following interfaces:
z
One 4-port 10/100/1000M integrated network adapter with their ports set to bge0,
bge1, bge2, and bge3 from left to right, where bge1 and bge2 serves as NAFO
links.
Two PCI Ultra SCSI HostAdapter cards, which are used to connect with the 3310
disk arrays.
ce0 and ce1 of host1 and ce0 and ce1 of host2 are used to connect with the
private networks with the crossover cables. Netra 240 includes one DB9 serial port
2-4

HUAWEI CG9812
(Serial Mgt Port). The ALOM card is the standard alarm card for the Netra 240.
The Netra 240 minicomputer can monitor CPU, fan, and temperature. Besides
these functions, it also supports serial port connections and network connections.
Specifically, it connects with the PC hyper terminal by a DB9<->RJ45 cable, with
the disk arrays by the SCSI cables, and with the LAN Switches by the straight-thru
cables.
2.3.2 Introduction to SUN StorEdge 3310 Disk Array

The universal StorEdge 3310 disk array is a thin, high-density, modular storage system,
which is specially designed for high availability purpose. The 12-drive disk array can
efficiently use the disk space, store the information with hundreds of gigabits, and
support one or two RAID controllers, 128 LUNs, and multiple host connections.
The StorEdge 3310 disk array has the following features:
z
Each support is provided with the capacity up to 3.6 TB.
RAID based hardware or software.
Redundant components.
2U 12-drive outline dimension.
I. Front view of StorEdge 3310

The front view of StorEdge 3310 is shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Front view of StorEdge 3310 disk array
Note:
Typically, five hard disks are inserted into the slots 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 for each disk array.
To add more disks, insert one into slot 12 first, and then slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
sequentially.

2-5

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Back view of StorEdge 3310

The back view of StorEdge 3310 is shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 Back view of StorEdge 3310 disk array
2.3.3 Introduction to Quidway S3528G LAN Switch

The S3528G LAN Switch provides twenty-four 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet ports.
Figure 2-6 shows the front panel of the S3528G.
(1)
(3) (4)
(2)
(5)
(1) power supply indicator

(4) mode switch status
indicator
(7) Console interface
(6)
(2) GBIC port status indicator

(5) 100M Ethernet ports with
indicator
(7)
(3) mode switch button

(6) GBIC ports with indicator
Figure 2-6 Front panel of S3528G

The twenty-four ports of the S3528G are arranged as shown in Table 2-2 (front view).In
the arrangement, there are the power supply indicator and twenty four fixed
10/100Base-TX Ethernet ports with the Console interface. Each 10/100Base-TX port
can be used for subtending. The Ethernet ports are standard RJ-45 connectors.

2-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 2-2 24 Ethernet ports for S3528G

2
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
Note:
For more information about LAN Switch, refer to Quidway S3528 Series LAN Switch
Installation Manual.
2.4 Hardware Connections

This section introduces how to connect the internal hardware in the cabinet of the
CG9812.
2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning

Table 2-3 shows the model and components of the host.
Table 2-3 Model and components of the host (Netra 240)
Server model
Netra 240(DC)
igwb1 and igwb2
CPU, memory and hard

disks
Purchase No.
Description
CPU slots (01)
2*1.28 GHz CPU
Memory slot (bank0)
XRA-SC1N2-73G15K
Hard disk slots (01)

I/O slot
2 GB memory
2* 73 GB local hard disks
Purchase No.
Description
X4422A
Dual GigabitEthernet / Dual

SCSI
X6758A
PCI Dual Ultra3 SCSI
X6758A
PCI Dual Ultra3 SCSI

2-7

HUAWEI CG9812
2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning

Table 2-4 shows the description of disk arrays.
Table 2-4 Description of disk array models (StorEdge 3310)
Disk array
model
3310(J-DC)
Jumper switch
description
Connect with the CH0

and the Single Bus
Hard disk
slots:
Purchase No.
711
XTA-3310-73GB-15K
Disk array
name
3310-0 3310-1
PN No.
Description
540-5522
73.4GB - 15000 RPM
2.4.3 Hardware Connections

Make sure all the connections are accurate for the HA system, especially for the SCSI
cables. Wrong connections can cause fatal damage. Before the devices are connected,
make labels and attach them to both end of each cable. For details on labels, see
Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 Description for labeled cables
Connection
type
Source
device
Source device
port
Destination
device port
Remark
01
1G Ethernet
host 1
bge0 in slot0 of
PCI1
NMS and
LMT
Public
network
02
1G Ethernet
Host 1
bge1 in slot1 of
PCI1
GSN
LAN
Switch-0
Public
network
03
1G Ethernet
host 1
bge2 in slot2 of
PCI1
GSN
LAN
Switch-1
Public
network
04
1G Ethernet
host 1
bge3 in slot3 of
PCI1
Billing center
(BC)
Public
network
05
1G Ethernet
host 2
bge0 in slot0 of
PCI1
NMS and
LMT
Public
network
06
1G Ethernet
host 2
bge1 in slot1 of
PCI1
GSN
LAN
Switch-0
Public
network
07
1G Ethernet
host 2
bge2 in slot1 of
PCI1
GSN
LAN
Switch-1
Public
network
08
1G Ethernet
host 2
bge3 in slot3 of
PCI1
BC
Public
network
No.
Destination
device

2-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Connection
type
Source
device
Source device
port
Destination
device port
Remark
09
1G Ethernet
(crossover)
host 1
ce0
Host2
ce0
Private
network
10
1G Ethernet
(crossover)
host 1
ce1
Host2
ce1
Private
network
11
SCSI
host 1
SCSI 1 inPCI2
slot
3310-0
CH1 port
12
SCSI
host 1
SCSI 1 inPCI1
slot
3310-1
CH1 port
13
SCSI
host 2
SCSI 1 inPCI2
slot
3310-0
CH3 port
14
SCSI
host 2
SCSI 1 inPCI1
slot
3310-1
CH3 port
15
SCSI
3310-0
CH0 port
3310-0
Single
port
Bus
16
SCSI
3310-1
CH0 port
3310-1
Single
port
Bus
17
100M
Ethernet
host 1
ALOM port
Maintenance
terminal
Manage
ment
18
100M
Ethernet
host 2
ALOM port
Maintenance
terminal
Manage
ment
19/20
100M
Ethernet
3310-0
Two controller
ports
Manage
ment
21/22
100M
Ethernet
3310-1
Two controller
ports
Manage
ment
No.
Destination
device
Figure 2-4 shows the hardware connections on the CG9812 server.

2-9

HUAWEI CG9812
3310 -0
3310 -1
Netra 240-0
LMT
BC
GSN
GSN
public net
public net
GSN
LMT
public net
GSN
BC
private net
HeartBeat
Netra 240-1
ALOM
bge1 bge3
Net Mgt Serial
Port Mgt Port bge0 bge2
ce0
ce1
Figure 2-7 Connections between Sun Netra 240 and Sun StorEdge 3310
Netra 240 does not include an external terminal concentrator (TC). The built-in system
controller (SC) is provided, which can be connected through the Net Mgt Port shown in
Figure 2-7:
z
The SC of igwb1 (Netra 240-0 in Figure 2-7) is set to 129.1.1.11 by default.
The SC of igwb2 (Netra 240-1 in Figure 2-7) is set to 129.1.1.12 by default.
2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections

I. Connections between Netra 240 and LAN Switch
Two LAN Switches are configured in the cabinet of the CG9812. One is LAN Switch-0
(primary), and the other is LAN Switch-1 (secondary). The two bge1 ports are
connected with LAN Switch-0, and the two bge2 ports are connected with LAN
Switch-1 to communicate with the GSN. The LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC are
not configured in the cabinet. All cables are straight-thru cables.
2-10

HUAWEI CG9812
In early stage of the deployment, because the LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC
are not installed, the bge0 and bge3 ports of the HA system are connected to the LAN
Switches in the cabinet of the CG9812. Figure 2-8 shows the cable connections with
the LAN Switches.
igw b1
bge1,bge2
igw b1
bge0
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1)
igw b2
bge0
(2)
(4)
igw b1
SC
igw b1
bge3
(2)
igw b2
bge1,bge2
(3)
(4)
igw b2
bge3
igw b2
SC
(2)
Figure 2-8 LAN Switch cable connection

In Figure 2-8, each cable represents a virtual LAN (VLAN):
z
Cable (1). Two LAN Switch ports are coupled for subtending.
Cable (2). These ports are used by OM and SC.
Cable (3). These ports are used by Ga.
Cable (4). These ports are used by BC.
Caution:
Dangling cables must be prohibited.
II. Connections between the primary server and the secondary server
Connect the external ce0 port of the primary server with ce0 of the secondary server.
Connect ce1 of the primary server with ce1 of the secondary server. These two
connections serve as heartbeat links between the primary server and the secondary
server. All cables in use are straight-thru cables (crossover cables).

2-11

HUAWEI CG9812
III. Connections between Netra 240 SCs and LAN Switches

Connect the SC of the primary server (the Net Mgt port) with the LAN Switch-0 of the
primary server. The SC functions like a TC to give access to the SC by logging in to the
LAN Switch remotely and to give access to the Console outputs of the minicomputer.
Connect the SC of the secondary server (the Net Mgt port) with the LAN Switch-1.
See Figure.
IV. Connections between Netra 240 and StorEdge 3310

Figure 2-9 shows the internal connections in the disk arrays.
Figure 2-9 Connections for StorEdge 3310 disk arrays

Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the primary server with the CH1 port of the 3310-0
disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the primary server with the CH1 port of
the 3310-1 disk array.
Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the secondary server with the CH3 port of the
3310-0 disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the secondary server with the
CH3 port of the 3310-1 disk array.
Connect the CH0 port of 3310-0 with the Single Bus port of 3310-0. Connect the CH1
port of 3310-1 with the Single Bus port of 3310-1.
V. Connections between LAN switches

The LAN Switches on the primary server and the secondary server are subtended
through the ports. See Figure 2-8. All cables in use are crossover cables.
VI. Connections related to power cables and ground cables

For connections related to power cables and ground cables, follow the precautions
below:
z
Connect the PGND bar of the DC distribution cabinet securely with the nearest
PGND bar provided by the equipment buyer through the PGND bus. The PGND
2-12

HUAWEI CG9812
cables are yellow-green plastic insulated copper wires with the same core
diameter as that of the power cables.
z
Label each power cable and ground cable before connection.
For Netra 240, connect the power cables and ground cables for the internal devices in
the CG9812 cabinet as indicated in Figure 2-10.

2-13

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 2-10 Connections of power/ground cables for devices in the CG9812 cabinet
(Netra 240)

2-14

HUAWEI CG9812
2.4.5 Hardware Power-on

To power on the two Netra 240 minicomputers and the disk arrays, follow the sequence
below:
Disk arrays > the upper minicomputer > the lower minicomputer
The power-off sequence is opposite to the power-on sequence.
Caution:
z
For the minicomputers and disk arrays, sudden power-off is prohibited on the
CG9812 server. Because after UNIX is suddenly powered off, it must be manually
maintained before it can run.
On the CG9812 server, do not restart the two minicomputers frequently.
It is recommended to power on the minicomputers after the disk arrays are powered
on for three minutes.

2-15

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 3 Configuring SC and Disk Array

This chapter describes how to set the SCs and the disk arrays, including:
z
Configuring SC
Configuring Disk Array
3.2 Configuring SC
This section introduces how to configure the SC.
3.2.1 Introduction to SC
Netra 240 does not include a video adapter or a display. Those minicomputers in earlier
versions are configured with a TC to transfer the control signals from the two hosts and
display them on the monitor console.
In Netra 240, a SC is integrated on the main board. The SC functions as the TC.
Different from the TC, the SC of each minicomputer is configured with a separate IP
address. To access the IP address of an SC, run the command below:
#telnet <sc_ip>
The SC provides a Net Mgt Port and a Serial Mgt Port. See Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 SC ports
3.2.2 Configuring SC
Configure the SCs on igwb1 and igwb2. The SCs are only required to be configured
once. To configure the SC, follow the steps below:

3-1

HUAWEI CG9812
I. Connect Netra 240 with the power supply

II. Configure the serial port of the PC maintenance terminal
Use Windows hyper terminal software or any other serial port software to configure the
network management port. See Figure 3-2. To set the serial port of the maintenance
terminal, make sure you follow the parameter settings given below:
z
Bits per second: 9,600 bauds
Data bit: 8 bits
Parity check: none (non-parity)
Stop bit: 1
Data stream control: none (no handshake)
Figure 3-2 Parameter settings for serial port of the maintenance terminal
III. Log in to SC
The SC starts to work when the power supply is connected. You can log in to the SC
through the maintenance terminal.
1)
Use a DB9<->RJ45 cable to connect the serial port of the SC with a serial port of
the maintenance terminal.
2)
Start the hyper terminal program to connect and log in to the SC.
3)
Enter the user name and password.

3-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc. All rights reserved.

Use is subject to license terms.
Sun(tm) Advanced Lights Out Manager 1.3 (igwb1)
Please login: admin
Please Enter password: ***** (admin by default)
sc>
Note:
If Solaris is not installed, SC> is displayed. Otherwise, press Ctrl+Pause to display the
OK system prompt. Then type #. to display SC>.
IV. Set SC properties

1)
Set the IP address and net mask:
SC>setsc netsc_ipaddr 129.1.1.11 (129.1.1.12 for igwb2)

SC>setsc netsc_ipnetmask 255.255.0.0
2)
Restart the SC with the command below:
SC>resetsc
The settings are enabled.
V. Disconnect the serial port

Disconnect the PC hyper terminal.
VI. Finish the settings

Make sure that the Net Mgt ports of the SCs are connected with the LAN Switches by
cables, and then log in to the two minicomputers as indicated below:
#telnet 129.1.1.11
(access igwb1)
#telnet 129.1.1.12
(access igwb2)
Enter the user name and password again. To access the Console, enter the command
below:
SC>console
To return to SC>, enter #..

3-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
z
If the ports are in use, enter console f to obtain the ports.
The IP address of the Net Mgt Port is 129.1.1.11. To access this port by Telnet, set
the IP address of the PC to 129.1.1.4.
To change the user password, run SC>password. Remember the password for
later use.
3.3 Configuring Disk Array
Note:
z
Name the two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays 3310-0 and 3310-1. Both of them need to
be configured.
The numbers given in the following figure is for example purpose, for example, the
disk space of a disk array is 35 GB. The actual capacity is 73 GB by default.
I. Connect the administrative console and StorEdge 3310

Use a DB9DB9 cable to connect serial port of the maintenance terminal with the COM
port of the StorEdge 3310 disk array. See Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Connection between maintenance terminal and StorEdge 3310

3-4

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Set IP address for StorEdge 3310

1)
Log in to 3310-0 (3310-1 for the secondary node) through the PC hyper terminal.
Press Enter, and then press ESC three times. Select Terminal (VT100 Mode)
from the menu, and then press Enter to open the main menu.
2)
Select View and edit Configuration parameters/Communication

Parameters/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)/LAN0/Set IP Address from the main
menu. The following interface appears. See Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 StorEdge 3310 IP configuration interface

3)
Enter the IP address: 129.1.1.13 (IP of 3310-0), 129.1.1.14 (IP of 3310-1); Subnet
mask: 255.255.0.0; And gateway IP address: not set, See Figure 3-5. Note that
the given values are for example purposes only.
Figure 3-5 Set IP address and subnet mask

3-5

HUAWEI CG9812
4)
Press ESC. Click Yes to set the IP address. Then, click Yes to reset the controller.
5)
Log in to StorEdge 3310 after it is restarted,
#telnet xxx (xxx for IP address of the Disk Array, such as 129.1.1.13 or 129.1.1.14)
Trying xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)
Connected to xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)
Escape character is ^].
Press Ctrl + L to display the initialization interface.
III. Set SCSI channels for StorEdge 3310

1)
Press ESC. Select Terminal (VT100 Mode) from the menu, and then press Enter
to open the main menu.
2)
On the main menu, select view and edit SCSI channels. Configure the SCSI
channels as indicated in Figure 3-6. Set CHL1 and CHL3 to Host, that is, the
Primary Controllers.
3)
Press Esc to return to the main menu. Click Yes to reset the controller.
Figure 3-6 Set SCSI channels

4)
Log in to StorEdge 3310 after it is restarted.
#telnet xxx (xxx for IP address of the disk array, for example, 129.1.1.13 or 129.1.1.14)
Trying xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)
Connected to xxx (xxx for IP address of disk array)
Escape character is ^].
Press Ctrl + L to display the initialization interface.
IV. Set Logical drives for StorEdge 3310

1)
Select Terminal (VT100 Mode) from the menu, and then press Enter to open the
main menu.
3-6

HUAWEI CG9812
2)
On the main menu, select view and edit Logical drives, and then press Enter to
configure the logical drives. See Figure 3-7.
Caution:
For a new disk, no logical disk is created. See Figure 3-7. Delete the existing logical
disks, if any. If LUN is mapped, you may fail to delete the logical disks. Unmap the host
LUN before you delete the logical disks.
Figure 3-7 Select Logical Drive

3)
Select the first row, and then press Enter. The system prompts Create Logical
Drive. Click Yes, and then press Enter to continue. The following interface is
displayed. See Figure 3-8.

3-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-8 Select logical drive type

4)
Select RAID5, and then press Enter. Select the first four disks as RAID5 mirror
disks. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is marked if a disk is selected. See
Figure 3-9.

5)
Press Esc to confirm your selection. The following interface is displayed. See
Figure 3-10
3-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-10 Select HotSpare drives

6)
Select Assign Spare Drives, and then press Enter to select the HotSpare disks.
The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-11.

7)
Select all the rest disks as HotSpare drives. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is
marked if a disk is selected. Press Esc to confirm your selection. The following
interface is displayed. See Figure 3-12.
3-9

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-12 Create logical drive
Caution:
If N (4) hard disks are configured on StorEdge 3310, select one for HotSpare, and
others for RAID5.
8)
Click Yes, and then press Enter to create the logical drive. See Figure 3-13.The
process will take about 80 minutes. You can check the process (%) from the upper
left corner. Do not perform any other operation during the process. After the RAID5
disk is created, go on with the next step.

3-10

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-13 Initialize logical drive

9)
After RAID5 is finished initialization, press Esc twice. The following interface is
Figure 3-14 Select logical drive

10) Select the RAID5 logical drive, and then press Enter. The following interface is

3-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-15 Select partition
V. Partition logical drive

1)
Select Partition logical drive, and then press Enter to partition the logical disk.
The system then prompts Continue Partition Logical Drive? See Figure 3-16.
Click Yes, and then press Enter.
Figure 3-16 Confirm partition

3-12

HUAWEI CG9812
2)
Enter 200 for partition0 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter. See
Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17 Partition0

3)
The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-18. Click Yes, and then press
Enter.

3-13

HUAWEI CG9812
4)
Move to the second row, and then press Enter to allocate space for partition1.
Enter 209053 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter. See Figure 3-19. The
value is given for example purpose only.

5)
Enter to complete the partition.

3-14

HUAWEI CG9812
VI. Map logical drives to Host LUNs

1)
Press Esc twice to return to the main menu. On the main menu, select view and
edit Host LUNs, and then press Enter. See Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21 StorEdge Main menu

2)
Select CHL 1 ID 0 (Primary Controller), and then press Enter. See Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22 Select channel1

3-15

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
Make sure CHL 1 is set to Primary Controller. If CHL1 ID 0 (Secondary Controller) is
displayed, delete this channel, and then add CHL 1 ID 0 (Primary Controller).
3)
Select Logical Drive, and then press Enter. See Figure 3-23.

4)
Select row 0, and then press Enter to map the first LUN. See Figure 3-24.

3-16

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-24 Select the first LUN

5)
Enter the logical drive selection interface. See Figure 3-25.

6)
Select the RAID5 logical drive, and then press Enter. See Figure 3-26.

3-17

HUAWEI CG9812

7)
In Figure 3-27, select LUN 0, and then press Enter.
Figure 3-27 Map host LUN

8)
In Figure 3-28, select Map Host LUN, and then press Enter.

3-18

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-28 Confirm to map host LUN

9)
Enter.
Figure 3-29 Select the second LUN

10) Move to LUN 1, and then press Enter to map the second LUN. See Figure 3-30.

3-19

HUAWEI CG9812

displayed. See Figure 3-31,
Figure 3-31 Select logical partition

12) Select LUN 1, and then press Enter. The following interface is displayed. See
Figure 3-32,

3-20

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-32 Map LUN

13) Select Map Host LUN, and then press Enter. The following interface is displayed.
See Figure 3-33.

14) Click Yes, and then press Enter. Press Esc twice to return to the channel
selection interface. See Figure 3-34.

3-21

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-34 Select channel 3

15) Map host LUN for CH3 in the same way.
16) Then, press ESC till the following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35 StorEdge 3310 initialization interface

17) Press Ctrl +]. The system prompts.
telnet>quit
18) Enter quit to close the StorEdge 3310 configuration interface.

3-22

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris

To install and configure Solaris, follow the steps below:
z
Installing Solaris 8
Installing Solaris Patch
Configuring Solaris
Installing Utilities
4.2 Installing Solaris 8
Note:
z
Solaris (04/02 or above) must be installed on both hosts.
During the setup process, press ESC+2 to go to the next step, press Up or Down to
locate an option, and press Space or Enter to select the selection.
4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Netra 240

I. Operation description
Netra 240 is not provided with a display device. The Console of the SUN workstation
can be connected through the maintenance terminal.
II. Operation steps

Step
Description
On the maintenance terminal console, log in to igwb1 and igwb2 with the
commands below:
#telnet 129.1.1.11
#telnet 129.1.1.12
Enter the SC user name and password again (admin/admin).

4-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Connect the consoles with the commands below:
sc>break
sc>console -f
4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8

Generally, Solaris is installed by a designated SUN engineer. The following installation
steps are for your reference only. You can install the HA system software on the two
hosts (igwb1 and igwb2) concurrently. Make sure that the same parameters are
configured for the two hosts.
II. Operation steps

Step
Description
Insert the Solaris 8 System Software 1 of 2 CD into the CD-ROM of the

console.
Enter the OK state.
Method 1: If the workstation is not installed with UNIX, press Ctrl+] on the
console, type Send brk, and press Enter to show the ok prompt.
Method 2: If Solaris is installed, type halt as the user root to show the ok
prompt.
Boot the host from the CD-ROM. Type boot cdrom after the OK prompt:
ok boot cdrom
Select English as installation language. See below:
Select a Language
0. English
1. French
9. Traditional Chinese
Please make a choice (0 - 9), or press h or ? for help: 0
Select the locale. Select English. See below:

5
Select a Locale
0. English (C - 7-bit ASCII)
1. Albania (ISO8859-2)
18. Finland (ISO8859-15 - Euro)

Type the number of your choice and press Return: 0

4-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Select the terminal type. Select DEC VT100. Because no monitor is
configured in the HA system, the installer cannot identify the terminal type. To
select the terminal type, follow the steps below:
Press Return to show more choices.

What type of terminal are you using?
1) ANSI Standard CRT
2) DEC VT52
3) DEC VT100
...
13) Other
Confirm the selection.

Esc-2_Continue
Esc-6_Help
Esc-2_Continue means to press ESC + 2 to continue, and Esc-6_help

means to press ESC + 6 to display the help information. Other operations are
similar. In the subsequent operations, unless otherwise specified,
Esc-2_Continue means to press ESC + 2 to continue.
Configure Network connectivity. Click Yes. See below:
Networked
[X] Yes
[ ] No
Configure DCHP. Select No. See below:

9
Use DHCP
[ ] Yes
[X] No
Enter the Main Network interface. Select bge0.

10
11
Primary network interface

[X] bge0
[ ] bge1
[ ] bge2
[ ] bge3
Enter the host name. Enter igwb1 for the primary node, and igwb2 for the
secondary node. See below:
Host name:igwb1
12
Enter the IP addresses. The IP address of igwb1 is 129.1.1.1, and that of

igwb2 is 129.1.1.2. See below:
IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for the Secondary node)
Select the subnet mask. Type Yes. The operation is as follows:

13
14
System part of a subnet

[X] Yes
[ ] No
Set Net Mask. Enter 255.255.0.0. see below:

Netmask: 255.255.0.0

4-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Determine whether to enable IPv6. Select No. see below:
15
Enable IPv6
[ ] Yes
[X] No
Press <ESC + 2> to continue. The settings are displayed below:
16
Networked: Yes
Use DHCP: No
Primary network interface: bge0
Host name: igwb1 (igwb2 for igwb2)
IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for igwb2)
System part of a subnet: Yes
Netmask: 255.255.0.0
Enable IPv6: No
Determine whether to configure Kerberos Security. Select No. See below:

17
Configure
[ ] Yes
[X] No
Kerberos Security
Determine whether to provide Name Service. Select None. See below:

18
Name
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[X]
service
NIS+
NIS
DNS
LDAP
None
Select the Geographic Region, for example, Asia, Eastern. See below:
19
Regions
[X] Asia, Eestern
[ ] United States
Select Time Zone. Select the local time zone, such as Hong Kong. See
below:
20
Time zones
[ ] HongKong
[X] Republic of China
Set Data and Time. For example,

21
22
23
Date and time: 2004-02-03 09:00

Year
(4 digits) : 2004
Month (1-12)
: 02
Day
(1-31)
: 03
Hour
(0-23)
: 09
Minute (0-59)
: 00
Press ESC + 2 to continue.

Time zone: Republic of China
Date and time: 2004-02-03 09:00:00
Initialize the setup process. Press ESC + 4 to select Initial. See below:
F2_Upgrade
F4_Initial
F5_Exit

4-4
F6_Help

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
24
Description
Press ESC + 2 to select the standard installation.
Esc-2_Standard
F3_Go Back
Esc-4_Flash
F5_Exit
F6_Help
Select the following character sets from the Geographic Region menu.
25
26
Select the geographic regions for which support should be installed.

[ ] Eastern Europe
[/] Asia
[ ] PC Kanji (ja_JP.PCK)
[X]
Simplified Chinese EUC
[X]
Simplified Chinese GBK
[X]
Simplified Chinese UTF-8
[/] North America
[ ]
Canada-English (ISO8859-1)
[X]
U.S.A. (en_US.ISO8859-1)
Determine whether to include the 64-bit support. Select Yes.

[X]
Select
To Include Solaris 64-bit Support
Select the components. Select Entire Distribution Plus OEM support for
full install. See below:
27
28
[X] Entire Distribution plus OEM

support 64-bit 1587.00 MB
[ ] Entire Distribution 64-bit ................. 1549.00 MB
[ ] Developer System Support 64-bit ............ 1498.00 MB
[ ] End User System Support 64-bit ............. 1073.00 MB
Select the installation directory. Select c0t0d0. See below:

[X] c1t0d0
[ ] c1t1d0
(72538 MB) boot disk

(72538 MB)72538 MB
72538 MB
(F4 to edit)
Determine whether to preserve the existing data on the hard disk. Press ESC
+ 2 to select continue to overwrite the data. See below:
29
30
Do you want to preserve existing data? At least one of the disks you've
selected for installing Solaris software has file systems or unnamed
slices that you may want to save.
F2_Continue
F3_Go Back
F4_Preserve
F5_Exit
F6_Help
Determine whether to lay out the file system automatically. Press ESC + 4 to
select Manual Layout.
F2_Auto Layout
F3_Go Back
F4_Manual Layout
F5_Exit
F6_Help
31
The system displays the current hard disk (overlap). Select Continue to
confirm.
32
Partition the hard disk as indicated in Table 1-7, and then select Continue.
Press ESC + 2 to confirm the partition.
33
File system/Mount point

Disk/Slice
Size
=============================================================
/
c1t0d0s0
57GB
swap
c1t0d0s1
10GB
overlap
c1t0d0s2
68.35GB
/globaldevices
c1t0d0s6
512MB

4-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
34
Description
Determine whether to mount software from a remote file server. Pres ESC+2
to select Continue.
Do you want to mount software from a remote file server? This may be
necessary if you had to remove software because of disk space problems.
F2_Continue
F3_Go Back
F4_Remote Mounts
F5_Exit F6_Help
Confirm your configurations. Press ESC + 2> to select Continue.
35
36
37
The information shown below is your profile for installing Solaris

software. It reflects the choices you've made on previous screens.
=================================================================
=
Installation Option: Initial
Boot Device: c1t0d0
Client Services: None
Locales: Simplified Chinese EUC
Software: Solaris 8, Entire Distribution plus OEM sup
File System and Disk Layout:
/
c1t0d0s0
57 GB
swap
c1t0d0s1
10 GB
/globaldevices
c1t0d0s6
512 MB
=================================================================
F2_Continue
F4_Change F5_Exit
F6_Help
Press ESC + 2 to ignore the following warning.

WARNING: Unused disk space (c1t0d0)
Esc-2_OK F5_Cancel Esc-2_OK F5_CancelqReboot After Installation?
Determine whether to reboot the computer automatically after installation.

Select Auto Reboot.
[X] Auto Reboot
[ ] Manual
38
39
Start the setup process, and the setup progress is displayed. The setup
process takes about 40 minutes. After installation, the system will reboot
automatically.
After Solaris is restarted, the system prompts to enter and confirm the
password of root. Remember the password. See below
Root password:******
Press Return to continue.
Re-enter your root password: ******
When the following message appears, select 1, and then press Enter. See
below:
40
Media:
1. CD/DVD
2. Network File System
3. Skip
Media [1]:<Enter>
Insert the Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 CD, and then press Enter. See below,
41
Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 (2/02 SPARC

Platform Edition).
After you insert the disc, please press Enter:<Enter>

4-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Determine whether to display the installation details. Select 2 to continue.
See below:
42
Installation details:
Product
Result
More Info
1. Solaris 8 packages (part 2) Installed Available
2. Done
Enter the number corresponding to the desired selection for more
information, or enter 2 to continue [2]:<Enter>
below:
43
Media:
1. CD/DVD
3. Skip
Media [1]:<Enter>
Insert the CD for Solaris 8 Languages and press Enter. See below:
44
Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Languages (2/02 SPARC Platform
Edition).
After you insert the disc, please press Enter: <Enter>.
45
Solaris restarts automatically. The installation is complete.
4.3 Installing Solaris Patches

This section introduces how to install the Solaris patches, including:
z
Installing Patch Tools
Installing Solaris 8 Patch
Installing SAN Patches
Installing SCSI Card Driver
Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch
4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools

I. Operation Description
Install the patch tools on igwb1 and igwb2. Before installation, make sure you have the
latest patch tools. If not, contact SUN Microsystems, Inc. for technical support. The
/.profile file is created during the setup process. The patch tools installation path is set
in this file.
II. Operation steps

Step
Description
Insert the patch tools CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host or
workstation console.

4-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Install the patch tools as root.
2*
# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/install/
# sh ./setup-standard.sh
Disable the power saving daemon. Enter y.

Is the power saving daemon to be disabled? [y/n]: y
Disable the keyboard power button. Enter y.

Sun keyboard Power button to be disabled? [y/n]: y
Disable the buttons & dials. Enter y.

Are the buttons & dials to be disabled? [y/n]: y
Determine whether the remote login of root is allowed. Enter y.

Are remote root logins to be allowed? [y/n]: y
Determine whether to install the Automated Crash Analysis Tool (ACT)

software package. Enter y.
Do you want to install the ACT package? [y/n]: y
Enter the base directory of the package. To select the default /opt/CTEact
directory, press Enter.
enter base directory for install (Default /opt/CTEact) [?,q]<Enter>
Determine whether to enable the Email of Panic Facility. To select the

default value y, press Enter.
10
Enter the Email address. Enter n.

Do you wish to enable the email of panic facility [y] [y,n,?] n
11
Determine whether to create the /opt/CTEact directory. Press Enter to

select the default value y.
12
Decide whether to install the CTEact package. Press Enter to select the
default value y.
Install the explorer package.
13
14
Agree to these terms? [y,n] y

...
Do you want to continue with the installation of <CTEact> [y,n,?]n
Set the installation directory. Press Enter to select the /opt/SUNWexplo

directory by default.
Where should this package be installed? [/opt/SUNWexplo]:
15
Enter Company Name. For example,

Company name []:Huawei
16
Enter Contract ID. Press Enter.

Contract ID []:
17
Enter System Serial Number. Press Enter.

System serial number []:

4-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
18
Description
Enter Contact Name. Press Enter.
Contact name []:
19
Enter your email address. Press Enter.

Contact email address []:
20
Enter your phone number. Press Enter.

Phone number []:
21
Enter your address (line 1). Press Enter.

Address (line 1) []:
22

23
Enter your city. Press Enter.

City []:
24
Enter your state. Press Enter.

State []:
25
Enter your zip code. Press Enter.

Zip []:
26
Enter your country. Press Enter.

Country []:
Select the geographic region where the local SUN branch is located. For
example. Select APAC: Asia, Pacific. Press Enter.
27
Geographic Region
1 - AMERICAS - North and South America
2 - EMEA
- Europe, Middle-east and Africa
3 - APAC
- Asia, Pacific
[]: 3
The following information is displayed. Select no. Press Enter.

28
Would you like all explorer output to be sent to:

explorer-database-apac@sun.com
at the completion of explorer when -mail or -e is specified?
[y,n] n
29
Send the output to other email address: Enter- for none
30
Enter the return address for analysis result. Enter - for none.
The settings are displayed. Select y to confirm or select n to reset the
information.
31
You have answered:

Company name: Huawei
Contract ID:
...
Geography: APAC
Mail output to:
Mail output from:
Are these values okay? [y,n] y

28
32
Would you like all explorer output to be sent to:

explorer-database-apac@sun.com
[y,n] n
The following information is displayed. Select n, and then press Enter.

Do you wish to run explorer once a week? [y,n] n

4-9

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
33
The following information is displayed. Select n, and then press

Enter.
The command to do this would be:/opt/SUNWexplo/bin/explorer -q -e
Would you like to do this now? [y,n] n
34
Select y to create the /opt/SUNWexplo directory.
35
The following information is displayed. Select yes, and then press Enter.
Do you with the installation of <SUNWexplo> [y,n,?] y
36
Run /.profile to enable the environment variables.

#. /.profile
4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch

Install the Solaris patch on igwb1 and igwb2.
II. Operation steps

Step
Description
Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host or

Log in as root, and then run the commands below:
# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/8
# unpatck-patches
Run the command below to begin the setup process. This process may take
a long time. Please wait.
# cd /tmp/8; /install_all_patches
Restart the computer after the installation is complete.
# sync;sync;sync
# reboot
4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches

Install this patch on igwb1 and igwb2.

4-10

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Operation steps

Step
Description

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN
# unpack-patches
Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/SAN? [y/n]: y
Run the commands below to install the patches:

3
#cd /tmp/SAN
#./install_patches
Are you ready to continue with install? [y/n]: y
Go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8, and then run the commands

below:
4
#cd cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8
#unpack-patches
Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/8? [y/n]: y
Target for unpacking patches /tmp/8 exists!
May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n] y
Install the patch package with the commands below.

5
#cd /tmp/8
#./install_patches
4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver

For StorEdge 3310, make sure the SCSI card driver is installed on igwb1 and igwb2.
II. Operation steps

Step
Description


4-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Run the commands below to install the SCSI card driver:
#mkdir -p /export/home/software/scsi
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/progs/SUNWqus/8
#cp SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz /export/home/software/scsi/
#cd /export/home/software/scsi
#gunzip SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz
#tar xvf SUNWqus_8_all.tar
#pkgadd d.
Select yes if prompted during the setup process.
4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch

II. Operation steps

Step
Description
Log in as root, and then go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8.
Run the commands below:
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8
#unpack-patches

May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n]: y
#cd /tmp/8
#./install_patches
Are you ready to continue with install? [y/n] y
Restart the computer after installation.

2
# sync;sync;sync
# reboot -- -r
Use the format command to view all the hard disks on the disk array.

4-12

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
Make sure the above software packages are installed in the above sequence. Restart
the computer after a package is installed. The computer can automatically detect the
disk array status during the restart process.
4.4 Configuring Solaris

After Solaris and related patches are installed, modify the configuration file on igwb1
and igwb2 respectively.
4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files

In the /etc/hosts file, add the host name and IP address of the secondary node of the
HA system to make the two nodes access each other.
I. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb1.

#
# Internet host table
#
127.0.0.1
localhost
129.1.1.1
igwb1
129.2.1.1
igwb11
129.3.1.1
igwb13
129.1.1.2
igwb2
129.2.1.2
igwb21
129.3.1.2
igwb23
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb3
129.1.1.11
igwb1-sc
129.1.1.12
igwb2-sc
129.1.1.13
3310-0
129.1.1.14
3310-1
igwb1.huawei.com loghost
Make an adjustment based on the actual planning.

4-13

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb2.

#
#
127.0.0.1
localhost
129.1.1.2
igwb2
129.2.1.2
igwb21
129.3.1.2
igwb23
129.1.1.1
igwb1
129.2.1.1
igwb11
129.3.1.1
igwb13
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb3
129.1.1.11
igwb1-sc
129.1.1.12
igwb2-sc
129.1.1.13
3310-0
129.1.1.14
3310-1
Note:
z
The /etc/hosts file records the IP addresses of the local nodes and all the nodes in
the HA system. 129.1.1.1 is the IP address of the primary node, and 129.1.1.2 is the
IP address of the secondary node. For a specific IP address, enter as indicated in
the IP planning table.
In the file, a tab not a space is set between 129.1.1.1 and igwb1.
4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files

Create the network adapter configuration files for igwb1 and igwb2.
I. Create hostname.bge1 and hostname.bge3 in the /etc directory of igwb1

Create hostname.bge1
# vi /etc/hostname.bge1

4-14

HUAWEI CG9812
Add the line below:

igwb11
Add the line below:
igwb13
II. Create hostname.bge1 and hostname.bge3 in the /etc directory of igwb2

Add the line below:
igwb21
Add the line below:
igwb23
4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root

Modify the /etc/default/login file. Comment off the line where CONSOLE is set. For
example, modify
CONSOLE=/dev/console
into:
#CONSOLE=/dev/console
Add a comment on this line. Then the user root can log in to the host by Telnet.
4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root

Modify the file /etc/ftpusers. Add # before root to comment off the line. Then, the user
root can log in by FTP.
4.4.5 Executing the .profile File

Open the /.profile files on the two nodes, and then modify the contents related to
TERM. Add the content below to the end of the .profile files.
4-15

HUAWEI CG9812
TERM=vt100; export TERM

Execute the .profile files.
#. /.profile
(# is to enable the .profile file.)
4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File

Add the contents below to the end of the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file:
name="sd" class="scsi"
target=0 lun=1;
target=1 lun=1;
target=2 lun=1;
target=3 lun=1;
target=4 lun=1;
target=5 lun=1;
4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File

Add the line below to the end of the /etc/system file:
exclude: lofs
Note:
This line is added because Sun Cluster 3.0 does not support the Loopback file system.
For details, refer to Sun Cluster 3.0 Release Notes.
4.4.8 Modifying the /etc/inet/netmasks File

Add the contents below to the end of the /etc/inet/netmasks file:
129.1.1.0
255.255.0.0
129.2.1.0
255.255.0.0
129.3.1.0
255.255.0.0

4-16

HUAWEI CG9812
4.4.9 Restarting the Hosts

#sync;sync;sync
#shutdown y g0 i6
4.5 Installing Utilities

This section introduces how to install the utilities, including the TOP utility and the TVS
utility.
4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software

The TOP utility is used to test the hardware states, such as CPU and memory. Install
this software on igwb1 and igwb2.
Step
1
Description
Insert the TOP software CD into the CD-ROM.
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the setup directory.
# cd /cdrom/cdrom0
# cd sun/tools/top
Copy the installation package to the temp directory.

# cp top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz /tmp
Unpack the software package
# cd /tmp
# gzcat -d top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz|tar xvfInstall the package.
# pkgadd -d .top
Do you want to install these as setuid/setgid files [y,n,?,q] y
If the installation is successful, the information below is prompted:

Installation of <top> was successful.
4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software

Install the VTS utility on igwb1 and igwb2.
Step
1
Description
Insert the VTS software CD into the CD-ROM.

4-17

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the following directory.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunVTS-5.1
In this directory, you can find the files below:

SUNWvts
SUNWvtsmn
SUNWvtsx
#cd 8
SUNWlxml
SUNWlxmlx install-s8xmlpkgs.sh
Install the software.

#./install-s8xmlpkgs.sh
3
The installation is successful if the information below is prompted on the

screen:
## Installing part 1 of 1.
/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so <symbolic link>
/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so.2
[ verifying class <none> ]
Installation of <SUNWlxmlx> was successful.

4
#cd ..
#pkgadd -d .
This is an interactive installation process. You need to select the following
parameters:
Select package(s) you wish to process (or 'all' to process

all packages). (default: all) [?,??,q]:
Do you want to enable the Kerberos V5 based security? n
Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWvts> [y,n,?]
y
Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and then go to the setup directory.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunVTS/5.1
Unpack the package.
# unpack-patches
Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/5.1? [y/n]: y
# cd /tmp/5.1
Add the patch.
# patchadd 112336-02
8
If the installation is successful, the following information is displayed on the

screen:
Patch packages installed:
SUNWvts
SUNWvtsx

4-18

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software

The HA system software includes Sun Cluster (SC) 3.0 and the Volume Manager. To
install the software, follow the steps below:
z
Installing Sun Cluster 3.0
Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5
Entering Volume Manager Licenses
Configuring HA System Parameters

Make the preparations below before installation:
z
Checking the /etc/hosts File
Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapter
Checking the /etc/default/login File
Cleaning out Data
5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File

The file /etc/hosts contains the host names and the related IP addresses of:
z
Public and private networks
Logical hosts
The HA system uses the names of the network adapters for communication purposes,
so the /etc/hosts file must provide all the related information.
Check whether the /etc/hosts file contains the same contents below. If not, modify it.
I. On igwb1
#
#
127.0.0.1
localhost
129.1.1.1
igwb1
129.2.1.1
igwb11
129.3.1.1
igwb13

5-1

HUAWEI CG9812
129.1.1.2
igwb2
129.2.1.2
igwb21
129.3.1.2
igwb23
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb3
129.1.1.11
igwb1-sc
129.1.1.12
igwb2-sc
129.1.1.13
3310-0
129.1.1.14
3310-1
II. On igwb2
#
#
127.0.0.1
localhost
129.1.1.2
igwb2
129.2.1.2
igwb21
129.3.1.2
igwb23
129.1.1.1
igwb1
129.2.1.1
igwb11
129.3.1.1
igwb13
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb3
129.1.1.11
igwb1-sc
129.1.1.12
igwb2-sc
129.1.1.13
3310-0
129.1.1.14
3310-1
Note:
Only the value of loghost is different between the two hosts.

5-2

HUAWEI CG9812
5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters

I. On igwb1
For /etc/hostname.bge1, it is set to igwb11.
II. On igwb2
5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File

Check if "#" is added before CONSOLE=/dev/console to comment off this line.
5.2.4 Cleaning out Data

Execute the commands below on the two hosts:
root@igwb1#devfsadm -C
5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0

The SC software is HA software. In Sun cluster, two hosts form a cluster over the
network. Each host is a node. One or more user processes that run on the two nodes
constitute a data service.
SUN Cluster is used to monitor the running status of the data services and the two
nodes. If one node fails, the data services will be transferred to the other node to avoid
longtime service interruption.
To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:
z
Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1
Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2
Configuring the Quorum Device
Checking the Status of the Cluster
5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1

To install the SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1, follow the steps below:

5-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Installing SUN Cluster 3.0
Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 patches
Configuring SUN Cluster 3.0
Edit ftp.conf.cluster
Install the diagnosis tool package
Restart the computer
Checking the Installation
I. Installing SUN Cluster 3.0

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1, follow the steps below:
1)
Insert the SUN Cluster 3.0 installation CD into the CD-ROM. Run the command
below:
root@igwb1#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunCluster_3.0/Tools
The current directory contains the following files:
Upgrade
2)
defaults
lib
scinstall
Run scinstall to install SUN Cluster 3.0.
root@igwb1#./scinstall
The following information is displayed:
*** Main Menu ***
* 1) Establish a new cluster using this machine as the first node
* 2) Add this machine as a node in an established cluster
3) Configure a cluster to be JumpStarted from this install server
4) Add support for new data services to this cluster node
5) Print release information for this cluster node
* ?) Help with menu options
* q) Quit
Note:
z
On igwb1, select 1) Establish a new cluster using this machine as the first
node.
On igwb2, select 2) Add this machine as a node in an established cluster.
Press Ctrl+D to return to the main menu during the setup process.
Do you want to continue (yes/no) [yes]?

Is it okay to continue (yes/no) [yes]?
3)
y
y
Install SUN Cluster 3.0.
** Installing SunCluster 3.0 **

SUNWscr.....done

5-4

HUAWEI CG9812
SUNWscu.....done
SUNWscdev...done
SUNWscgds...done
SUNWscman...done
SUNWscsal...done
SUNWscsam...done
SUNWscvm....done
SUNWmdm.....done
SUNWscva....done
SUNWscvr....done
SUNWscvw....done
Hit ENTER to continue:
Press Ctrl+C to stop the setup process.
Note:
z
Because SUN Cluster 3.0 is not upgraded, it cannot identify those four 1000M
network adapters bge0, bge1, bge2, and bge3.
The installation must be stopped, otherwise, you will fail to configure the private
network.
II. Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 patches

To install the patches, follow the step below:
1)
Insert the SUN Patch 4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM.
2)
Run the command below to copy the installation package as root.
root@igwb1#cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunCluster/3.0
/install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster
3)
Run the commands below to unpack the installation package.
root@igwb1#cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster/common
root@igwb1#unpack-patches
Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/common? [y/n]: y
4)
Run the patch installation script as prompted.
root@igwb1#cd /tmp/common;./install_patches

5-5

HUAWEI CG9812
III. Configuring SUN Cluster 3.0

Now, SUN Cluster 3.0 can identify the above four network adapters. Continue the
scinstall process.
1)
Insert SUN Cluster 3.0 into the CD-ROM, and unpack the installation package.
root@igwb1#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunCluster_3.0/Tools
Upgrade
defaults
lib
scinstall
root@igwb1# ./scinstall
Note:
To continue the setup process, refer to 5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2.
2)
The following information is displayed.
*** Main Menu ***

* q) Quit
Note:
z
node.
You may press Ctrl+D to return to the main menu during the setup process.

y
y
Ignore the following messages:

** Installing SunCluster 3.0 **
Skipping "SUNWscr" - already installed
scinstall: WARNING: but, the installed version is not the expected version!
Skipping "SUNWscu" - already installed

5-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Skipping "SUNWscdev" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscgds" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscman" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscsal" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscsam" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscvm" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWmdm" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscva" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscvr" - already installed
Skipping "SUNWscvw" - already installed
What is the name of the cluster you want to establish?
hwhlr
Please list the names of the other nodes planned for the initial
cluster configuration. List one node name per line. When finished,type
Control-D:
Node name:igwb2
Node name (Ctrl-D to finish):^D
Note:
On igwb2, the following information is displayed: What is the name of the sponsoring
node? igwb1
3)
All the nodes defined in the cluster are displayed. If the information is correct,
enter y. Otherwise, enter n to modify it.
Do you need to use DES authentication (yes/no) [no]?
<Enter>
Is it okay to accept the default network address (yes/no) [yes]?

Is it okay to accept the default netmask (yes/no) [yes]?

5-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
The default network address is 172.16.0.0 and the default netmask is 255.255.0.0.
Change the values if necessary.
Does this two-node cluster use transport junctions (yes/no) [yes]? no
4)
Select ce0 as the primary private network adapter, and ce1 as the secondary one.
Select the first cluster transport adapter to use:
1) bge1
2) ce0
3) ce1
4) bge2
5) bge3
6) Other
Option:2
Adapter "ce0" is an ethernet adapter.
Searching for unexpected network traffic on "ce0" ... done

Verification completed. No traffic was detected over a 10 second
sample period.
All transport adapters support the "dlpi" transport type. Ethernet

adapters are supported only with the "dlpi" transport; however, other
adapter types may support other types of transport. For more
information on which transports are supported with which adapters,
please refer to the scconf_transp_adap family of man pages
(scconf_transp_adap_hme(1M), ...).
The "dlpi" transport type will be set for this cluster.
Select the second cluster transport adapter to use:
1) bge1
2) ce1
3) bge2
4) bge3
5) Other

5-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Option:
Adapter "ce1" is an ethernet adapter.
Searching for unexpected network traffic on "ce1" ... done

Verification completed. No traffic was detected over a 10 second
sample period.
The default is to use /globaldevices.
Is it okay to use this default (yes/no) [yes]?
Do you want scinstall to reboot for you (yes/no) [yes]?
no
Are these the options you want to use (yes/no) [yes]?
Note:
The parameters you configure are displayed. If they are correct, select yes to continue,
or select no to reset the parameters.
Do you want to continue with the install (yes/no) [yes]?
5)
Solaris starts to configure SUN Cluster 3.0. Then, enter q to close the main menu.
IV. Edit ftp.conf.cluster

To edit the ntp.conf.cluster file, follow the steps below:
1)
Run the vi command to edit the ntp.conf.cluster file.
root@igwb1#vi /etc/inet/ntp.cluster
peer clusternode3-priv
2)
Save and exit.
V. Install the diagnosis tool package

To install the diagnosis tool package, follow the steps below:
1)
Insert the SUN Patch4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM.
2)
Log in as root and run the commands below to copy the installation package to the
/install directory:
root@igwb1#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/progs/SunCluster/3.0

5-9

HUAWEI CG9812
root@igwb1#cp SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz /install

3)
Run the commands below to unpack the package.
root@igwb1#cd /install
root@igwb1#gzcat SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz| tar xvf 4)
Run the command below to add the SUNWscdtk diagnosis tool package.
root@igwb1#pkgadd -d . SUNWscdtk
Installation of <SUNWscdtk> was successful.
VI. Restart the computer

Run the commands below to restart the computer:
root@igwb1#sync
root@igwb1#sync
root@igwb1#init 6
VII. Checking the Installation

Run the command below to check the status of the node.
root@igwb1#scstat |more
If the configuration is correct, the following information is displayed:
Node name
Cluster node:
igwb1
Status
Online
5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2

This section includes the contents below:
z
Installing SUN Cluster 3.0
Edit ftp.conf.cluster
Install the diagnosis tool package
I. Installing SUN Cluster 3.0

1)
Copy SUN Cluster 3.0 and unpack it.
root@igwb2# telnet igwb2

root@igwb2# cd /install
5-10

HUAWEI CG9812
root@igwb2#gzcat suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8.tar.gz|tar xvf

root@igwb2#cd suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8/SunCluster_3.0
root@igwb2#cd /tools
Upgrade
2)
defaults
lib
scinstall
root@igwb2# ./scinstall
*** Main Menu ***
* q) Quit
Option:2

What is the name of the sponsoring node?
igwb1
What is the name of the cluster you want to join?
sc-igwb
Hit ENTER to continue: (press Enter)

>>> Check <<<
This step runs sccheck(1M) to verify that certain basic hardware and
software pre-configuration requirements have been met. If sccheck(1M) detects
potential problems with configuring this machine as a cluster node, a list of
warnings is printed.
(press Enter)
Running sccheck ... done

All sccheck tests passed.
(press Enter)
Do you want to use autodiscovery (yes/no) [yes]?

The following connections were discovered:
igwb1:ce0
switch1
igwb2:ce0
igwb1:ce1
switch2
igwb2:ce1
Is it okay to add these connections to the configuration (yes/no) [yes]?

Do you want scinstall to reboot for you (yes/no) [yes]? no

5-11

HUAWEI CG9812

3)
Solaris starts to configure SUN Cluster 3.0. Then, enter q to close the main menu
II. Edit ntp.conf.cluster

To edit the ntp.conf.cluster file, run the command below:
root@igwb2#vi /etc/inet/ntp.cluster
Delete the lines below:
Save and exit.
III. Install the diagnosis tool package

1)
Insert the SUN Patch4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM. Log in as root and run the
commands below
root@igwb2#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/progs/SunCluster/3.0
root@igwb2#cp SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz /install
root@igwb2#gzcat SUNWscdtk_u3_s8.tar.gz| tar xvf root@igwb2#pkgadd -d . SUNWscdtk
2)
Run the command below to add the SUNWscdtk diagnosis tool package.
root@igwb1#pkgadd -d . SUNWscdtk
Installation of <SUNWscdtk> was successful.
IV. Restart the computer

Run the commands below to restart the computer:
root@igwb1#sync
root@igwb1#sync
root@igwb1#init 6

5-12

HUAWEI CG9812
5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device
Note:
Configure the quorum device on igwb1 only.
1)
Check the disk ID (DID).
root@igwb1#scdidadm -L
Specify a hard disk on the disk array for the Quorum device. Here, select d4.
For example:
igwb1>scdidadm -L
1
igwb1:/dev/rdsk/c0t0d0
/dev/did/rdsk/d1
/dev/did/rdsk/d2
/dev/did/rdsk/d3
/dev/did/rdsk/d4
/dev/did/rdsk/d4
/dev/did/rdsk/d5
/dev/did/rdsk/d5
/dev/did/rdsk/d6
/dev/did/rdsk/d6
/dev/did/rdsk/d7
/dev/did/rdsk/d7
/dev/did/rdsk/d8
/dev/did/rdsk/d9
10
/dev/did/rdsk/d10
Note:
z
Only the shared disk can serve as the Quorum device.
From above, you can see the disks d4, d5, d6 and d7 are shared by the primary and
secondary nodes.d4 and d6 are on LUN0, and d5 and d7 are on LUN1. Here, d4 is
used as the Quorum device.
2)
Create a lock disk
root@igwb1#scconf -a -q globaldev=d4
root@igwb1#scconf -c -q reset
5-13

HUAWEI CG9812
root@igwb1#scconf -a -T node=.
5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes

Run the command below to check node status:
If the node configurations are correct, the following information is displayed:
-- Cluster Nodes -Node name
Status
---------
------
Cluster node:
igwb1
Online
Cluster node:
igwb2
Online
------------------------------------------------------------------- Cluster Transport Paths -Endpoint
Endpoint
Status
--------
--------
------
Transport path: igwb1:ce1
igwb2:ce1
Path online
Transport path: igwb1:ce0
igwb2:ce0
Path online
----------------------------------------------------------- Quorum Summary -Quorum votes possible:
Quorum votes needed:
Quorum votes present:
-- Quorum Votes by Node -Node Name
Present Possible Status
---------
------- -------- ------
Node votes:
igwb1
Online
Node votes:
igwb2
Online
-- Quorum Votes by Device --
Device votes:
Device Name
-----------
------- -------- ------
/dev/did/rdsk/d3s2
Online
------------------------------------------------------------------- Device Group Servers -Device Group
Primary
------------
Secondary
-------
---------
Device Group
Status
------------
------
-- Device Group Status --
------------------------------------------------------------------

5-14

HUAWEI CG9812
5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5

Volume Manager 3.5 must be installed on igwb1 and igwb2. To install and configure
Volume Manager 3.5, follow the steps below:
z
Installing Volume Manager
Installing Volume Manager Patches
Modifying Disk Management Parameters
5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager

To install Volume Manager, follow the steps below:
1)
Insert the Volume Manager installation CD into the CD-ROM.
2)
Log in as root.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun-internal/progs/veritas-vm
#cd 3.5
The current directory contains the foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz installation
package.
3)
Copy the installation package to the specified directory.
#cp foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz /install

#cd /install
4)
Unpack the software package.
#gzcat foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz|tar xvf 5)
#scvxinstall
Do you want Volume Manager to encapsulate root [no]?
Where is the Volume Manager cdrom?
6)
/install/foundationproduct3.4sunw
Enter the License key.
Please
enter
Volume
Manager
license
rrpu-ypr6-wp69-204k-6ppp-6ppr-pp)

5-15
key
[none]:xxx
(for
example,

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
z
Enter the temporary License key before you get the permanent one. Make sure you
apply for a permanent License and install it. If not, after the temporary License
expires, the volume manager cannot be reset if a system failure occurs.
To apply for a permanent License, fill in your hostid in the application form provided
with the product by fax or email to Sun Microsystems Inc. Before it is granted, ask
for a temporary License with Sun Microsystems Inc.
The system will restart twice during the setup process.
5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches

To install the Volume Manager patches, follow the steps below:
1)
Put the Sun Patches 4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM.
2)
Log in as root.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/patch/veritas-vm
#cd 3.5
#ls
You can find the files below in the current directory:
112392-07.zip 113203-03.zip
3)
113595-05.zip
113596-04.zip
#unpack-patches
Cleaning out /tmp/3.5...
Unpacking.....
Patch 112392-06
Patch 113203-03
Patch 113595-05
Patch 113596-03
You should run:cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches
4)
Install the patches with the command below:
#cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches

Determining if sufficient save space exists...
Sufficient save space exists, continuing...

5-16

HUAWEI CG9812
Installing patches located in /tmp/3.5

Installing 112392-06...
Ignore the error messages if prompted.
Caution:
Make sure you have the latest patches on hand. If not, contact Sun Microsystems for
technical support.
5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters

It the DMP function is enabled by Solaris, disable it in the Volume Manager.
1)
Log in as root, and then execute the command below to disable the DMP function:
#vxdiskadm
Select an operation to perform:17
devices from VxVM's view
(Select 17 Prevent multipathing/Suppress
Do you want to continue ? [y,n,q,?] (default: y)

on a controller by VxVM
(Select 5 Prevent multipathing of all disks
Enter a controller name [<ctlr-name>,all,list,list-exclude,q,?] all

Continue operation? [y,n,q,?] (default: n) y
Enter q till the main menu is displayed.

2)
Restart the computer to enable the parameters.
#sync
#sync
#init 6
5.4.4 Checking the Installation

1)
Run df k and more /etc/vfstab to check if the mounted device cxtxdxsx is

replaced by volume.
2)
Check if vxconfigd is started normally.
#ps -ef| grep vx

5-17

HUAWEI CG9812
It is properly started if the information below is displayed.

root
3)
20
0 19:42:32 ?
0:01 vxconfigd -m boot
Execute the vxdctl mode command to check if the initialization is successful.
If "enable" is displayed, the initialization is successful.
5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses
Note:
Enter the respective licenses on igwb1 and igwb2.
5.5.1 Checking Hostid

Check the hostid with the command below:
root@igwb1#hostid
You may get:
8301aad5
Check if it is the same as that in the License.
Caution:
The hostids are different for the two minicomputers.
5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent

Check if it is a permanent License with the command below:
root@igwb1# vxlicrep
If it is not a permanent License, the following information is displayed:
VERITAS License Manager vxlicrep utility version 3.00.007d
Copyright (C) VERITAS Software Corp 2002. All Rights reserved.
Creating a report on all VERITAS products installed on this system
-----------------***********************-----------------

5-18

HUAWEI CG9812
License Key
= R8CE-FR26-NSNN-R4O4-OZNP-PPP6-PPPP-OL
Product Name
= VERITAS Volume Manager
License Type
= DEMO
OEM ID
= 4095
Demo End Date
= Fri Jul 23 00:00:00 2004

(60.3 days from now).
Features :=
VxVM
= Enabled
CPU Count
= Not Restricted
The information indicates that no permanent License is entered for the product. Note
that the letters in bold indicate the expiry date of the temporary license. After the date,
enter a permanent license.
5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License

Run the command below:
root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicinst

VERITAS License Manager vxlicinst utility version 3.00.007d
Enter your license key : rrp9-un3k-rtv8-y6pp-p6pp-ncpc-pp

License key successfully installed for VERITAS Volume Manager
5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered

To check if the License is correctly entered, run the command below:
root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicrep
5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters

To Set the HA system parameters on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:
z
Mirroring Root Disk
Creating the igwbdg Resource Group
Configuring NAFO
Registering the igwbrg Resource Group
Installing igwb Monitor Script
Checking the Configuration

5-19

HUAWEI CG9812
5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, all the operations in this section shall be performed on
igwb1 and igwb2.
I. Check the disk information

#vxdisk list
c1t0d0s2
sliced
rootdisk_1
rootdg
online
c1t0d0s2
c1t1d0s2
sliced
error
c1t1d0s2
c3t1d0s2
sliced
error
c3t1d0s2
c3t1d1s2
sliced
error
c3t1d1s2
c4t1d0s2
sliced
error
c4t1d0s2
c4t1d1s2
sliced
error
c4t1d1s2
Select the second local disk as the mirrored disk of the root disk. The disk c1t1d0s2 is
selected in this example. Select the root disk based on the actual configurations.
II. Initialize the selected mirrored disk

Clean out all the information in the disk.
#vxdiskunsetup C c1t1d0
Initialize the selected mirrored disk
#vxdisksetup i c1t1d0
III. Add the mirrored disk to rootdg

On the primary node, run the command below:
#vxdg -g rootdg adddisk mirrordisk_1=c1t1d0
On the secondary node, run the command below:
IV. Mirror the root disk

#vxmirror rootdisk_1 mirrordisk_1
5-20

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
Rootdisk 1 is the local disk obtained with #vxdisk command.

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, perform the operations in this section only on igwb1.
I. View the disk information

#vxdisk list
DEVICE
TYPE
DISK
GROUP
STATUS
c1t0d0s2
sliced
rootdisk_1
online
c1t0d0s2
c1t1d0s2
sliced
mirrordisk_1
rootdg
error
c1t1d0s2
c3t1d0s2
sliced
error
c3t1d0s2
c3t1d1s2
sliced
c4t1d0s2
sliced
c4t1d1s2
sliced
rootdg
error
error
error
c3t1d1s2
c4t1d0s2
c4t1d1s2
Select c3t1d1 and c4t1d1 as the disks of the igwbdg disk group. c3t1d0 and c4t1d0
are selected as LUN0 in 200 MB. This LUN is set for system maintenance purpose.
Note:
The drive letter varies with the devices. Select based on the actual configurations.

5-21

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Create the igwbdg disk group
Caution:
z
Create the igwbdg disk group on one host only.
The commands below can be saved as creat_volume.sh. Run chmod 755

create_volume.sh to make it executable, and then run sh ./create_volume.sh.
This process may take a few hours, which depends on the disk capacity.
c3t0d1 in the script below should be the actual disk array number. View the numbers
with the format command. For example, the letters in blue (four disks) is the
required disk array numbers. Note that the number in red is the local disk of igwb 1
only.
root@igwb1#format
AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS:
0. c1t0d0 <SUN72G cyl 14087 alt 2 hd 24 sec 424>
/pci@1c,600000/scsi@2/sd@0,0
/pci@1c,600000/scsi@2/sd@1,0
2. c3t1d0 <SUN-StorEdge3310-0325 cyl 198 alt 2 hd 64 sec 32>
/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@1,0
/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@1,1
/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@1,0
/pci@1e,600000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@1,1

5-22

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
z
igwbdg01 and igwbdg02 in the script below is set for LUN1 on the StorEdge 3310.
The space of the front disk and the back disk shall be changed based on the actual
capacity of LUN1.
Partition the disk into four partitions, front, back, log-alarm, and igwbdg-stat.
igwbdg-stat is used by the system. Calculate each partition as indicated below: The
total space is the space of LUN1, 101,376 MB. Allocate 512 MB to igwbdg-stat,
4,096 MB to log-alarm, and the rest 103,228 MB are fifty-fifty for the front disk and
the back disk. It is recommended that the allocated space for the front disk and the
back disk be set to integral times of 512 to avoid insufficient available space.
1)
Compile the creat_volume.sh script.
/usr/lib/vxvm/bin/vxdisksetup -i c3t1d1
vxdg init igwbdg igwbdg01=c3t1d1
vxdg -g igwbdg adddisk igwbdg02=c4t1d1
vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make igwbdg-stat 512m layout=nolog igwbdg01
vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make log-alarm 4096m layout=nolog igwbdg01
vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make front 101376m layout=nolog igwbdg01
vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make back 101376m layout=nolog igwbdg01
vxassist -g igwbdg mirror igwbdg-stat layout=nolog igwbdg02
vxassist -g igwbdg mirror log-alarm layout=nolog igwbdg02
vxassist -g igwbdg mirror front layout=nolog igwbdg02
vxassist -g igwbdg mirror back layout=nolog igwbdg02
2)
Run the script
Execute sh ./create_volumes.sh in the script directory.
III. Register the igwbdg resource

Unless otherwise specified, perform the command below on the primary node only.
root@igwb1#scconf -a -D type=vxvm, name=igwbdg, nodelist=igwb1:igwb2,
preferenced=true
IV. Create the new file system on the igwbdg volume

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/igwbdg-stat
#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm
#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front
5-23

HUAWEI CG9812
#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back
The similar information below is displayed when the above commands are executed.
newfs: construct a new file system /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/ igwbdg-stat : (y/n)?
y
Enter y.
V. Modify /etc/vfstab and create the mount points

1)
Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to create the mount points.
#cd /var
#mkdir frontsave
#mkdir backsave
#mkdir other
Then, three mount points /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, and /var/other are created on
igwb1 and igwb2.
2)
Modify the /etc/vfstab file on igwb1 and igwb2, and then add the contents below:
/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front
no
/dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/front
/var/frontsave ufs
logging
/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back
/dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/back
/var/backsave ufs 2 no
logging
/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm
ufs
no
/dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/log-alarm
/var/other
logging
5.6.3 Configuring NAFO
Note:
Perform this operation on igwb1 and igwb2. Below is an example on igwb1.
root@igwb1#pnmset
The following information is displayed. The letters in bold should be entered.
In the following, you will be prompted to do configuration for network adapter
failover
Do you want to continue ... [y/n]: y
How many NAFO groups to configure [1]: 1

5-24

HUAWEI CG9812
Enter NAFO group number [0]: 0

Enter space-separated list of adapters in nafo0: bge1 bge2
Checking configuration of nafo0:
Testing active adapter bge1...
Testing adapter bge2...
NAFO configuration completed
5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, perform this operation on igwb1 only.
root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -g igwbrg -h igwb1,igwb2

root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -L -g igwbrg -l ha-igwb
root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -L -g igwbrg -l ha-igwb1
root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -L -g igwbrg -l ha-igwb3
root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -t SUNW.HAStoragePlus
root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -j storg-front -g igwbrg -t SUNW.HAStoragePlus -x
GlobalDevicePaths=/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front -x
FilesystemMountPoints=/var/frontsave
root@igwb1 # scswitch -e -j storg-front
root@igwb1 # scswitch -e -M -j storg-front
root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -j storg-back -g igwbrg -t SUNW.HAStoragePlus -x
GlobalDevicePaths=/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back -x
FilesystemMountPoints=/var/backsave
root@igwb1 # scswitch -e -j storg-back
root@igwb1 # scswitch -e -M -j storg-back
root@igwb1 # scrgadm -a -j storg-other -g igwbrg -t SUNW.HAStoragePlus -x
GlobalDevicePaths=/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm -x
FilesystemMountPoints=/var/other
root@igwb1 # scswitch -e -j storg- other

5-25

HUAWEI CG9812
root@igwb1 # scswitch -e -M -j storg- other

Restart the HA system with the command below:
root@igwb1 # scshutdown -y -g0
5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script

Transfer the sc30_script.ta file to the /opt directory on igwb1 and igwb2 in binary
mode.
#cd /opt
#tar xvf
sc30_script.tar
Run the command below to restart the HA system.

5.6.6 Checking the Configuration

After configuration, run the commands below to check whether the nodes can be added
and switched over.
I. On igwb1, run the commands below:

root@igwb1 # scstat |more
(Check if the node status is normal.)
root@igwb1 # df -k (check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included.)

root@igwb1 # scswitch -S -h igwb1
(Check if the HA system can be switched over
from igwb1 to igwb2.)
II. On igwb2, run the commands below:

root@igwb1 # df -k (Check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included)

5-26

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface

The CG9812 supports the FTP and FTAM billing interfaces. Select one of them as
required.
z
To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software.
The FTP software is installed during the UNIX setup process. To use the FTP
interface, you need to configure the FTP server.
It is recommended to transfer the bill files between the CG9812 and the billing center by
FTP.
6.2 Installing FTP

The installation of the FTP interface is simple. The FTP server software is installed
during the UNIX setup process. It is not required to install it separately.
6.3 Installing FTAM

To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software. This
section introduces how to install the FTAM billing interface.
6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0

The Solstice FTAM 9.0 is a FTAM software package developed by SUN Microsystems
Inc. It is the update version to Solstice FTAM 8.1.1. Compared with Solstice FTAM 8.1.1,
this version supports the 64-bit system and corrects some errors. Typically, the SUN
FTAM package contains two components: the application layer package and protocol
stack package, which can be purchased separately.
1)
Solstice OSI 9.0, the OSI protocol stack of FTAM, contains the following packages:
SUNWcorpc
Solstice OSI RPC installation package
SUNWcosiA
Solstice OSI core stack kernel files 1
SUNWcosia
Solstice OSI core stack kernel files
SUNWcosib
Solstice OSI core stack configuration files
SUNWcosic
Solstice OSI core stack management utilities

6-1

HUAWEI CG9812
SUNWcosid
Solstice OSI core stack development kit
SUNWosiax
Solstice OSI core stack kernel files (64-bit)
SUNWosicx
Solstice OSI core stack management utilities (64-bit)
SUNWosidx
Solstice OSI core stack development kit (64-bit)
SUNWlicsw
License daemon that maintains the product license database
SUNWlit
License installation tools, lit and lit_tty
SUNWcosip
Solstice OSI core stack documentation in PDF
2)
Solstice FTAM 9.0, the application layer software of FTAM (containing RFC 1006
protocol stack package), contains the following packages.
SUNWftama
Solstice FTAM configuration files
SUNWftamb
Solstice FTAM executable files and development libraries (32-bit)
SUNWftabx
SUNWrk6
Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module (32-bit)
SUNWrk6x
SUNWftamp
Solstice FTAM documentation in PDF format.
SUNWlicsw
SUNWlit
Caution:
z
SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x are the packages of the RFC1006 protocol

stack,SUNWrk6 supports the 32-bit OS while SUNWrk6x supports the 64-bit OS.
The RFC1006 protocol stack cannot exist in the same system with the OSI protocol
stack. In other words, if the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the OSI protocol
stack cannot be installed on the same computer.
SUNWlicsw is the License monitor process package, and SUNWlit is the License
management toolkit. They are only required to be installed during the FTAM or OSI
setup process. In other words, if the two packages are installed during the OSI setup
process, you do not need to install them during the FTAM setup process.
Currently, Solstice FTAM 9.0 only supports Solaris 8.
If an earlier version of Solstice FTAM is previously installed, uninstall it before

Solstice FTAM 9.0 is installed.

6-2

HUAWEI CG9812
6.3.2 Installation Preparations

I. Prepare the installation software and Licenses
Solstice FTAM 9.0 and Solstice OSI 9.0 are two CDs with a separate License each. The
License is bound to the hostid. The hostid is an 8-byte hexadecimal digit. In Solaris,
check the hostid with the command below:
#hostid
Then, you may get:.
80e63680
II. Decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer
Before installation, decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer
end, such as the billing center, you may select the RFC1006 protocol or the OSI
protocol. If the protocol cannot be decided, you probably cannot continue with the
FTAM setup process in a later section.

6-3

HUAWEI CG9812
6.3.3 Installation Steps
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, in the later sections, the letters in bold represent the
information you need to enter, and the letters in italic represent the installer prompts.
I. Install the OSI protocol stack

If you decide to use the OSI protocol stack to communicate with the FTAM peer, the
OSI protocol stack must be installed. If not, directly go to II. Install the FTAM.
1)
Mount the CD-ROM
Insert the OSI protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager is installed,
the CD-ROM is automatically mounted to the /cdrom/osi_9_0 file system. To check
whether Volume Manager is installed, run the ps -ef | grep vold command. Usually,
Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not, mount it manually with the
commands below:
#mkdir /cdrom/osi_9_0
#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/osi_9_0
2)
Open the /cdrom/osi_9_0 directory and install the OSI package.
#cd /cdrom/osi_9_0
#pkgadd -d
The installer prompts the message below:
The following software packages are available:
1
SUNWcorpc
OSI RPC installation package

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosiA
OSI Core Stack Kernel Files 1

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosia
OSI Core Stack Kernel Files

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosib
SUNWcosic
OSI Core Stack Configuration Files

(sparc) 9.0
OSI Core Stack Management Utilities
(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosid
OSI Core Stack Development Kit

6-4

HUAWEI CG9812
(sparc) 9.0
7
SUNWcosip
OSI Core Stack Documentation in PDF

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWlicsw
FLEX License Manager Software and Utilites

(sparc) 6.1
SUNWlit
STE License Installation Tool

(sparc) 4.1
10
SUNWosiax
OSI Core Stack Kernel Files (64-bit)

(sparc) 9.0
... 2 more menu choices to follow;

<RETURN> for more choices, <CTRL-D> to stop display: <Enter>

11
SUNWosicx
OSI Core Stack Management Utilities (64-bit)

(sparc) 9.0
12
SUNWosidx
OSI Core Stack Development Kit (64-bit)

(sparc) 9.0
Select the package you want to install (or select all to install all
packages).
(default: all) [?,??,q]: <Enter>
Select the packages, or install all the packages by default. Press Enter. Enter y if
prompted during the setup process. For example,
Do you want to continue to install SUNWcorpc?y (Press Enter)
Caution:
Install the OSI Core Stack Configuration Files package of SUNWcosib before other
packages are installed.
After all the packages are installed, the installer prompts the message below:
1
SUNWcorpc

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosiA

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosia

(sparc) 9.0

6-5

HUAWEI CG9812
4
SUNWcosib

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosic

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosid

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWcosip

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWlicsw

(sparc) 6.1
SUNWlit

(sparc) 4.1
10
SUNWosiax

(sparc) 9.0

The installer prompts the message below.

11
SUNWosicx

(sparc) 9.0
12
SUNWosidx

(sparc) 9.0
Select the package you want to execute (or select all to execute all
packages).
(default: all) [?,??,q]:q <Enter>
Enter q to exit.
3)
Install the License manager
#cd /etc/opt/licenses
#./lit_tty
The license installation interface prompts the message below:
Select Product
[x] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC
[ ] Solstice CMIP 9.0 for SPARC
[ ] Solstice FTAM
9.0 for SPARC
[ ] Exit - Save Licenses
[ ] Exit - Don't Save Licenses
** x=select product and go to license screen **

** Return=next product **
** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page

6-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Select Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC, and then the information below is
displayed:
Solstice OSI (Stack)

9.0 for SPARC
Servers: [x] 1 [ ] 3 [ ] 5
**x=select. Tab=next count. Return=server name**
SERVER NAME
HOSTID
1: igwb2
80c7dff7
Phone Number List [ ] USA:
(+1) 800-872-4786
Expiration Date:18-dec-2001
Rights to Use:1
Data Checksum: d5
Password: 07BCAA07173858526A52B
Password Checksum: 77
Done Setting Up This License [x]
** x=select/deselect
Cancel This License [ ]
Return=next field **
Enter the Expiration Date, Rights to Use and Password of the License. The installer
prompts the settings are successful, and then displays the information below:
Select Product
[*] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC
[ ] Solstice FTAM
9.0 for SPARC
[x] Exit - Save Licenses

** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page
Save the Licenses and exit.

4)
Install the OSI patches
#pachadd 111344-01
Check installed patches...
111344-01 is the patch of Solstice OSI 9.0.

5)
#sync;sync;sync;reboot

6-7

HUAWEI CG9812
6)
Check whether the OSI protocol stack is successfully installed.
#ps -ef | grep osi

If the /usr/sbin/osinetd process is displayed, the OSI protocol stack is successfully
installed.
II. Install the FTAM

1)
Mount the CD-ROM
Insert the FTAM protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager is installed,
Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not,mount it manually with the
commands below:
#mkdir /cdrom/ftam_9_0
#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/ftam_9_0
2)
Open the /cdrom/ftam_9_0 directory and install the FTAM package.
#cd /cdrom/ftam_9_0
#pkgadd -d
The installer shows the prompts below.
1 SUNWftabx
Solstice FTAM Executable, Libraries and Man Pages (64-bit)

(sparcv9) 9.0
SUNWftama
Solstice FTAM Configuration Files

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWftamb
Solstice FTAM Executable, Libraries and Man Pages

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWftamp
Solstice FTAM Documentation in PDF

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWlicsw

(sparc) 6.1
SUNWlit

(sparc) 4.1
SUNWrk6
Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module

(sparc) 1.1
SUNWrk6x
64 bits Solstice RFC1006/TLI Module

(sparc) 1.1
packages).

6-8

HUAWEI CG9812
In this step, if the OSI protocol stack is installed, select packages 16 only and do not
install the RFC1006 packages, including SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x. Otherwise, press
Enter to install all the packages. Then, enter y if prompted. For example,
Do you want to continue to install SUNWftabx? y<Enter>
After the packages are installed, the prompt is displayed again:

:
1 SUNWftabx

(sparcv9) 9.0
SUNWftama

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWftamb

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWftamp

(sparc) 9.0
SUNWlicsw

(sparc) 6.1
SUNWlit

(sparc) 4.1
SUNWrk6

(sparc) 1.1
SUNWrk6x

(sparc) 1.1
packages).
(default: all) [?,??,q]:q<Enter>
Enter q to exit.
3)
Install the License manager.
#./lit_tty
The installer shows the following information.
Select Product
[ ] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC

[x] Solstice FTAM
9.0 for SPARC

6-9

HUAWEI CG9812

** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page
Select Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC and the message is displayed as below:
Solstice FTAM
9.0 for SPARC
Servers: [x] 1 [ ] 3 [ ] 5
SERVER NAME
HOSTID
1: igwb2
80c7dff7
Phone Number List [ ] USA: (+1) 800-872-4786

Rights to Use:1
Data Checksum: d5
Select Product

[*] Solstice FTAM
9.0 for SPARC

** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page

4)
Restart the computer.
5)
Check whether the FTAM is successfully installed.
Use the command below to check whether FTAM is successfully installed.

#ps -ef | grep osi

6-10

HUAWEI CG9812
If the OSI protocol stack is installed, the four processes osinetd, osiftamd, osiftrd -164,
and osiftrd -264 are displayed.
If the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the three processes osiftamd, osiftrd -164,
and osiftrd -264 are displayed. Also, check whether the rk6d process is running by
using the ps -ef | grep rk6d command.
6.3.4 Configuring Parameters

I. Related parameters
1)
NSAP
The NSAP represents the network service access point. The FTAM client (Initiator)
finds the FTAM server (Responder) through the NSAP and set up connection with the
server.
The NSAP consists of five parts. See Figure 6-1.
AFI
IDI
SI
NSEL
PA
Figure 6-1 NSAP formats

AFI: Authority and Format Identifier (2 bytes)
IDI: Initial Domain Identifier (to be defined)
SI: Subnetwork Identifier
PA: Point of Attachment
NSEL: Network Selector (1 byte)
The NSAP has multiple configuration formats, and the nbs format is frequently used. In
the format, AFI is set to 49, IDI is null, SI+PA is a hexadecimal digit with 15 bytes (like
hostid), and NSEL is 01.
For example, the NSAP is 491234567801.
2)
T-SELECTOR, P-SELECTOR, and S-SELECTOR represent the selectors of the

transmission layer, presentation layer and session layer respectively.
T-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 32 bytes.
P-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex, with up to 4 bytes.
S-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 16 bytes.
3)
Partner

6-11

HUAWEI CG9812
The FTAM runs in Initiator/Responder mode. To initiate the connection with the
Responder, the Initiators must know the parameters like NSAP of Responder. Typically,
a Partner is used to represent the FTAM Responder.
II. Set the OSI parameters

For most network systems, you can use the default values for the parameters of
Solstice OSI protocol stack. To check or modify the parameters, start the GUI tool
/opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool.
Start ositool with the command below:
# /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool
Figure 6-2 shows the graphical interface after the tool is started.
Figure 6-2 Configure OSI parameters

With this tool, you can set the parameters for Stack Manager, Network Layer Address,
Router Manager, and ES-IS Configuration (End System). Do not modify these
parameters.
The OSI uses the ES-IS protocol so that the subnets that interconnect can invoke and
update network addresses through the broadcast messages.
III. Configure Solstice FTAM parameters

1)
Set up a Partner for the FTAM peer.
#cd /opt/SUNWconn/ftam/bin
6-12

HUAWEI CG9812
#./osiftam
osiftam>rdb add entry1 -n H4980ed0f2d01 -p Cftr -s CPtr
z
-t CFTAM -z 1
-n is followed by the NSAP of the FTAM peer entry1, H indicates the NSAP format
is hexadecimal, and 80ed0f2d is the hostid of FTAM peer.
-p is followed by P-SELECTOR, and C indicates the P-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely ftr in this example.
-s is followed by S-SELECTOR, and C indicates the S-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely Ptr in this example.
-p is followed by T-SELECTOR, and C indicates the T-SELECTOR is in text format,

namely FTAM in this example.
-z is followed by the underlying protocol type. 0 indicates the Connection Oriented

Network Service (CONS), for example, x.25; 1 indicates the Connectionless
Network Protocol (CLNP) network, for example, Ethernet and FDDI; 2 indicate the
RFC 1006, namely TCP/IP. If the OSI protocol stack is installed, select 1 or 2; if the
RFC 1006 protocol stack is installed, select 2.Figure 6-3 shows the process of
network addressing.
SNPASubnetworkPoint of Attachment
Figure 6-3 Selector and network addressing

2)
Check whether the peer end is accessible.

6-13

HUAWEI CG9812
#cd /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin
#./osi_ping -n 4980ed0f2d01
If the peer end is accessible, 4980ed0f2d01 is alive is displayed. 4980ed0f2d01 is the
NSAP of the FTAM peer. Make sure the computer where 4980ed0f2d01 is located is
started and FTAM is running normally when you run the command.
3)
Test whether a Partner is available.
#./osiftam
osiftam>open entry1 -n username -p password
If login is successful, osiftam prompts the information below.

connection established
recovery available
Entry1 is the FTAM Partner name.
-n is followed by the user name.
-p is followed by the login password.
After login is successful, you can use the commands like dir, get, and put to test
whether you can interact with the FTAM Partner. For usage of the commands, refer to
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0.
Note:
Solstice FTAM 9.0 provides you with a graphical tool, ftamtool, to configure the FTAM
parameters. The functions provided by this tool are the same as those of the rdb
command in osiftam. The user usually logs in to a UNIX workstation by Telnet to set the
parameters, and the ftamtool is not always usable, so the ftamtool usage is not
introduced in this section.
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands

1)
Set up a FTAM connection.
#/opt/SUNWconn/ftam/bin/osiftam
osiftam>open entry -n username -p password
In this command, entry is the FTAM Partner name created with the rdb add command.
2)
List the remote directories
osiftam>dir remotedir
6-14

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
Use the open command to connect with the peer end before this command is
executed.
3)
Get a file from the remote end
osiftam>get remotefile localfile
Note:
executed.
4)
Display the existing FTAM Partners
osiftam>rdb list
Note:
Do not connect with any Partner if this command is executed.
5)
Modify the parameters of a Partner
osiftam>rdb change entry -p CFTR

then, the entry of P-SELECTOR is changed into FTR.
6)
Display the all the parameters of a Partner
osiftam>rdb show entry

6-15

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server

This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 server, including:
z
Installing Server Software
Upgrading Server
Rolling Back to Last Version
Note:
For parameter configuration, refer to Part III Parameter Configuration and System
Commissioning.

Typically, the CG9812 delivered to the site has finished the installation steps before and
including Installing HA System Software.
Check the following contents before installation.
7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections

To check if all the hardware cables are properly connected, refer to 2.4 Hardware
Connections.
7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation
Note:
This section applies to the first installation of the server software. For upgrade
operations, skip this step.

7-1

HUAWEI CG9812
I. Check if Solaris 8 can be properly started

If you can log in by SC or Telnet, it indicates that Solaris 8 is properly started.
1)
After Solaris is started, you can log in to the two hosts from the COM ports of other
terminals or SCs. For Netra 240, you can log in to its COM port by the PC hyper
terminal.
2)
After Solaris is started, you can log in as root by FTP or Telnet.You can log in to
the hosts by the telnet igwb1 or igwb2. The default IP addresses are set in the
/etc/hosts file. For details, see Figure 7-1.
129.1.1.1 igwb1
129.1.1.2 igwb11
129.1.1.3 igwb13
igwb1 default IP address
129.1.1.2 igwb2
129.2.1.2 igwb21
129.2.1.3 igwb23
igwb2 default IP
129.1.1.3 ha-igwb
129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3 ha-igwb3
CG9812 default floating IP
Figure 7-1 The /etc/hosts file in igwb1

For details about the /etc/hosts file, refer to Table 7-1. In Figure 7-1, the three different
lines indicate the interrelations between the local IPs and the floating IPs. For example,
the local IPs 129.1.1.1 and 129.1.1.2 correspond to the floating IP 129.1.1.3.
Table 7-1 Description for the /etc/hosts file
IP
address
Logical
host
127.0.0.1
localhost
129.1.1.1
igwb1
Description
Remarks
Local IP of bge0 for maintenance

purpose.
IP factory default for

igwb1.

7-2

HUAWEI CG9812
IP
address
Logical
host
Description
Remarks
129.2.1.1
igwb11
Local IP of bge1. bge1and bge2 are

mutually backed up, sharing the
same floating IP.
129.3.1.1
igwb13
Local IP of bge3.
129.1.1.2
igwb2
Local IP of bge0 for maintenance

purpose.
129.2.1.2
igwb21

same floating IP.
129.3.1.2
igwb23
Local IP of bge3.
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
The floating IP of bge0. It is used to

connect the NMS and the
maintenance console.
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1

same floating IP to connect with
SGSN or GGSN.
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb3
The floating IP of bge3. It is used to

connect with the billing center.
Note: The three

floating IPs are the
same for igwb1 and
igwb2. They are
enabled when the
SCs are started.
129.1.1.1
1
igwb1-sc
The IP address of the SC on igwb1.

You log in to igwb1 through this IP.

igwb1.
129.1.1.1
2
igwb2-sc
The IP address of the SC on igwb2.

You log in to igwb2 through this IP.

igwb2.
129.1.1.1
3
3310-0
The IP used to manage 3310-0

3310-0
129.1.1.1
4
3310-1
The IP used to manage 3310-1

3310-1

igwb2.
The
three
IP
addresses
are
external floating IP
factory defaults.
II. Check if the two nodes can be switched over each other
For SUN Cluster3.0, to check whether the primary node and the secondary node can
be switched over each other, follow the steps below.
1)
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2, run scstat | more to view the SC information, and you
may get the information below:
Status
--------Cluster node:
------
igwb1
Online (online indictes that igwb1
is a cluster member)
Cluster node:
igwb2
Online (online indictes that igwb2

7-3

HUAWEI CG9812
is a cluster member)
2)
Make sure that both igwb1and igwb2 are cluster members.
3)
You can only access the disk arrays on igwb1 or igwb2. Make sure the attached
directories for the disk arrays are correct.
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 through the SC or by Telnet, and run df -k command to view
the output information. Only on one of the two hosts, you can check the volume of the
disk array, including /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, /var/other, and /ha-igwb.
4)
Run the command below on the host where you can view the volume of the disk
array:
#scswitch -S -h xxx (xxx for local node, such as igwb1)

Then, check the volume again. Now, you can only view the information on the other
node.
7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites

I. Make sure you have the right software version on hand.
II. Modify the IP addresses of igwb1 and igwb2
You can reset the IP addresses in the /etc/hosts files. Restart the computer after you
finish.
Caution:
z
After you modify the hosts files, make sure you also modify the IP addresses set in
the igwb.ini files. Otherwise, the CG9812 server cannot be started. The default
installation path for igwb.ini is /opt/igwb/config/ini.
For details on parameter configurations, refer to Part III Parameter Configuration

and System Commissioning.
1)
For the floating IP addresses, modify them based on your actual configurations. If
the floating IP addresses are not in the same network segment, change the subnet
masks for igwb1 and igwb2 in the /etc/netmasks files. Restart the hosts to enable
the settings.
2)
The maintenance IP addresses of igwb1 (129.1.1.1 by default) and igwb2

(129.1.1.2 by default) shall be set in the same network segment with the first
external floating IP (129.1.1.3 by default).

7-4

HUAWEI CG9812
3)
For other IP factory defaults of igwb1 and igwb2, if they are not in conflict with the
IP addresses configured in the current LAN, keep the factory defaults. Record if an
IP address needs to be modified.
4)
bge1 and bge2 are mutually backed up, sharing the same floating IP. If bge1 is
disabled, bge2 is enabled; if bge2 is disabled, bge1 is enabled.
III. IP address configuration instance

The configuration instance is given below. Table 7-2 shows the onsite service floating
IP addresses.
Table 7-2 Onsite service floating IP planning
Network
adapter
Default
floating
IP
Onsite
floating IP
Function
bge0
129.1.1.3
10.11.5.30
Connect with the

NMS and the
maintenance
console
bge1
129.2.1.3
202.11.6.20
Connect with
SGSN or GGSN
bge3
129.3.1.3
5.16.17.18
Connect with the

billing center
1)
Remarks
Use the related

network ports for
multiple access points.
IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb1:
129.1.1.1 igwb1
(This IP is for maintenance purpose. It can be changed into 10.11.5.1, which is in the sanme network
segment with 10.11.5.30.)

129.1.1.2 igwb11 (If it is not in conflict with the IPs set in the LAN, do not change it.)
129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.2.1.2 igwb21
(If it is not in conflict with the IPs set in the LAN, do not change it.)
129.2.1.3 igwb23
129.1.1.3 ha-igwb (Change it into 10.11.5.30.)

129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1 (Change it into 202.11.6.20.)

7-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
The last three IP addresses are the external service floating IP addresses set by default.
They are configured with same values on igwb1 and igwb2. The floating IP addresses
will not be enabled untill the SC is started.
Restart the computer after you finish.

2)
IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb2
129.1.1.2 igwb2

129.1.1.2 igwb1

129.1.1.2 igwb11
129.1.1.3 igwb13
129.1.1.3 ha-igwb (Change it into 10.11.5.30.)

7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know

Before installation, you need to know the following key terminologies:
I. Consolidation
Two or more partial bills are created when the GSN process a PDP call. Consolidation
is to consolidate these partial bills into one or more bills.
II. Sort
Sort the bills on the back disk. Two or more bill formats may be included in a bill
package. Currently, bills can be sorted based on the conditions below:
z
For R98 770, this bill format is compatible with R98 760 and can be only sorted by
RecordType.

7-6

HUAWEI CG9812
For R99 3a0, this format is compatible with R99 390 and R99 360, and can be
sorted by RecordType and ChargingCharacteristics.

For R4 440, this format can be sorted by RecordType and
ChargingCharacteristics.
For RecordType, bills can be sorted by S-CDR, G-CDR, M-CDR, SMO-CDR, or
SMT-CDR.
For ChargingCharacteristics, bills can be sorted by Hot billing, Flat rate, Prepaid
service, or Normal billing.
III. Bill protocol versions

The bill protocol versions include R98, R99, and R4.
7.3 Installing Server Software

1)
Copy the server software installation files igwb_install.tar.gz, igwb_install.sh,

S99CGCfgMonitor, and sc30_script.tar to a specific directory on the workstation
or the client, and then transfer these files to the specific directory on igwb1 and
igwb2 by FTP. For FTP transfer modes and transfer destination paths, see
Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Transfer installation files

Installation file
FTP transfer mode
igwb_install.tar.gz
Binary
sc30_script.tar
Binary
igwb_install.sh
ASCII
igwb_rollback.sh
ASCII
S99CGCfgMonito
ASCII
FTP destination path
The /opt directory on igwb1 and

igwb2
The /etc/rc3.d directory on igwb1

and gwb2
2)
Log on to igwb1 as root. The root password is set to be root by default.
3)
Go to the /etc/rc3.d directory and execute the commands below:
# cd /etc/rc3.d
# chmod 755 *
4)
Go to the /opt directory and run the command below to begin the setup process.
# cd /opt
# sh ./igwb_install.sh
z
Select the language to be installed
The following information is displayed. Enter c for Chinese, and e for English.

7-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Select the language to be installed ( Chinese or English ), [c/e]:
Continue the setup process.

z
Select the bill protocol version:
1) --- R98 V7.7.0

2) --- R99 V3.a.0
3) --- R4
V4.4.0
Please select the installed product :
Select the proper version.

z
Decide if bill consolidation is supported
The installation wizard prompt if bill consolidation is supported by this version. If

consolidation is supported, enter y; if not, enter n.
Select the installed version. Consolidation or not , [y/n]:
z
Select sort type.
1) --- Without sort

2) --- Sort by record-type
3) --- Sort by ChargingCharacteristics

z
When the installation is complete, the following information is displayed:
Install Complete,Please make certain that igwb.ini is correct.
5)
Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory. Open and configure the igwb.ini file with
the vi tool.
#cd /opt/igwb/config/ini
#vi igwb.ini
Note:
For parameter configurations in igwb.ini, refer to Part III Parameter Configuration and
System Commissioning. Save the igwb.ini file after you finish. Close the vi program.
6)
Repeat the step 1)5) on igwb2.
7)
Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to start the igwbapp service and
run the related program.
#scswitch -e -j igwbapp
8)
Then, run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to backup the version of the
server application:
# cd
/opt
7-8

HUAWEI CG9812
# sh ./igwb_rollback.sh
Then the following information will appear:
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback
Please enter the number of the operation from the menu :
Select 1 to backup software release. When release backup is finished the following
information will appear:
Backup now ! Please wait ..
Backup complete !
7.4 Upgrading Server

The upgrade can be a general upgrade or a special upgrade.
z
General upgrade. Bill formats and product version are not essentially changed.
Special upgrade. Bill formats and product version are essentially changed
7.4.1 General Upgrade

To perform a general upgrade, follow the steps below. During the process, services will
not be interrupted, except the switchover interval.
1)
Log in to igwb1 and igwb2 by Telnet.
2)
Run the commands below to back up product version on igwb1 and igwb2.
# cd
/opt
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback
Select 1 to back up the version. Backup is complete if the following information is

displayed.
Backup now ! Please wait ...
Backup complete !
3)
Run the commands below to back up igwb.ini on igwb1 and igwb2.
# cp /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak
4)
Copy the new version igwb_install.tar.gz and igwb_install.sh to a specific

directory on the maintenance terminal, and then transfer igwb_install.tar.gz (in

7-9

HUAWEI CG9812
binary mode) and igwb_install.sh (in ASCII mode) to the destination /opt
directory on igwb1 and igwb2.
5)
Run the command below to check the resources are controlled by igwb1 or igwb2.
# ps -ef |grep proc

6)
Check if the processes are started, including cls_proc, om_proc, knl_proc, and
ap_proc.
7)
If the above processes are started, then the related node controls the resources
and is activated to provide the application services.
8)
Suppose igwb1 controls the resources. On igwb2, perform the operations below:
Go to the /opt directory and install the server software.
# cd /opt
z
Select the language
The following information is displayed. Enter c for Chinese, and enter e for English.
Select the language to be installed ( Chinese or English ), [c/e]:

z
Select the bill protocol version.
1) --- R98 V7.7.0

2) --- R99 V3.a.0
3) --- R4
V4.4.0

z
Decide if bill consolidation is supported
The installation wizard prompt if bill consolidation is supported by this

version. If consolidation is supported, enter y; if not, enter n.
Select the installed version , Consolidation or not , [y/n]:
z
Select sort type.
1) --- Without sort

2) --- Sort by record-type
3) --- Sort by ChargingCharacteristics

z
9)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 or the client to switch the server from
the primary node to the secondary node.
# scswitch
-S
-h xxx (xxx for source node, such as igwb1)

7-10

HUAWEI CG9812
10) After a few minutes, check if the processes runs properly on the upgraded node
(igwb2).
11) Run the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb2. You may see the similar
information displayed below:
root
2188
2182
0 09:27:33 ?
0:01 ./cls_proc
root
2195
2188
0 09:27:34 ?
0:02 knl_proc
root
2196
2195
0 09:27:35 ?
0:01 ./om_proc
root
2197
2195
1 09:27:35 ?
11:30 ./ap_proc 1
If you see the above processes, the upgrade is successful.
Note:
z
If the installation is successful, go on with the steps below. If not, stop the upgrade
process, and then ask for technical support. If the problem cannot be solved, make
sure to roll back to the last version. For details, refer to 7.5 Rolling Back to Last
Version.
Repeat steps 8) to upgrade igwb1
12) Run the commands below to back up the product version on igwb1 and igwb2.
# cd
/opt
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback
Please enter the number of the operation from the menu:

displayed.
Backup complete !
7.4.2 Special Upgrade

Follow the steps below to perform a special upgrade. Note that the services can be
interrupted during the upgrade process.
1)
Run the auxiliary upgrade command on the client.

7-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
For auxiliary upgrade on the client, refer to Part IV. You can continue the upgrade
process only if the auxiliary upgrade is executed successfully.
2)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to stop the igwbapp service and
related application.
# scswitch -n -j igwbapp
Caution:
The following steps 3)6) must be performed on igwb1 and igwb2, and only if these
steps are finished, you can continue the upgrade process.
3)
Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to back up the igwb.ini file.
# cd /opt/igwb/config/ini
# cp igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak
Caution:
You may need to reset igwb.ini.
4)

5)
Run the commands below to install the software on igwb1 and igwb2.
# cd /opt
6)
Select the options as required if prompted. If different options are selected in

pre-installation, make sure you reset the igwb.ini file and ignore step 6.
7)
Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to restore the igwb.ini file you back up.

7-12

HUAWEI CG9812
# cp /opt/igwb.bak igwb.ini
8)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to start the igwbapp service.
# scswitch
9)
-e -j igwbapp
After a few minutes, check if the processes run properly on the upgraded node.
Run the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb1 and igwb2. You may see the
similar information below is only displayed on one node.
root
2188
2182
0 09:27:33 ?
0:01 ./cls_proc
root
2195
2188
0 09:27:34 ?
0:02 knl_proc
root
2196
2195
0 09:27:35 ?
0:01 ./om_proc
root
2197
2195
1 09:27:35 ?
11:30 ./ap_proc 1
7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version

Rollback is needed if update fails. Follows the steps below to perform the rollback
operation. Note that you can roll back only to the version before this upgrade.
1)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to stop the igwbapp and the related
application.
#scswitch -n -j igwbapp
2)
# cd
Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to roll back the last version:
/opt
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback
Select 2 to roll back the version. The information below is displayed:

Are you sure to roll back the version (yes or no ), [y/n]:
Enter y. Rollback is complete if the following information is displayed.

Roll back now.
Please wait ...
Roll back complete. Please make certain that igwb.ini is correct.
3)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to start the igwbapp service and the

7-13

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client

This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 client, including:
z
Installing Client Software
Upgrading Client
Checking Client Software
8.2 Installing Client Software

1)
Copy the Client setup directory in the installation CD to a directory on the client.
Double-click \Client\SETUP.EXE. The Choose Setup Language dialog box is
Figure 8-1 Choose Setup Language interface

2)
Select your desired language, and then click OK. Then, the Welcome dialog box
is displayed. See Figure 8-2.

8-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-2 Welcome interface

3)
Click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed. See
Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 Software License Agreement interface

8-2

HUAWEI CG9812
4)
Click Yes to accept all the terms in the agreement. The User Information dialog
box is displayed. See Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 User Information interface

5)
Enter the user name and company, and then click Next. The Select Program
Folder dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-5.

8-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-5 Select Program Folder interface

6)
Click Next. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed. See
Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6 Choose Destination Location interface

8-4

HUAWEI CG9812
7)
To change the destination installation directory, click Browse to select your

desired directory. It is recommended to use the default directory. Click Next to
continue. The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed. In the box, your
settings are displayed. See Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Start Copying Files interface

8)
Click Next to copy files. Then, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed. See
Figure 8-8.

8-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-8 Setup Complete interface

9)
Click Finish. The CG9812 client is installed.
8.3 Upgrading Client

1)
Before upgrade, check the OS in use.
For Windows XP, back up the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file.
For Windows 2000, back up the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.
2)
Select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client/Uninstall System. The

Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed.
3)
Click Yes. The Remove Programs From Your Computer dialog box is displayed.
See Figure 8-9.

8-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-9 Remove Programs From Your Computer

4)
The following dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-10.

8-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-10 Uninstall complete

5)
Click OK.
6)
Reinstall the client as described in 8.2 Installing Client Software.
7)
Overwrite the uiconfig.ini file in the system directory with the backup one.
For Windows XP, overwrite the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file.
For Windows 2000, overwrite the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.
The client is successfully upgraded.
8.4 Checking Client Software

To check if all the components are installed, follow the steps below:
In Windows 2000 or Windows XP, select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client
to show the client components.
The client software includes the following components:
z
Help
iGWB Client
Uninstall System

8-8
HUAWEI
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Part II System Installation (Netra

20)

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Installation Overview................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Installation Flow ................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 Installation Time Planning ....................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1 Hardware Preparations ........................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 Software Preparations............................................................................................. 1-5
1.4 Resource Planning ............................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4.1 HA System Planning ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2 IP Address Planning................................................................................................ 1-7
1.4.3 Disk Space Planning ............................................................................................... 1-8
Chapter 2 Installing Hardware...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Hardware Description ........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 20 ................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Introduction to Sun StorEdge 3310 Disk Array ....................................................... 2-5
2.3.3 Introduction to TC.................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.4 Introduction to Quidway S3526 LAN Switch ........................................................... 2-7
2.4 Hardware Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning ......................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning ................................................................................ 2-8
2.4.3 Hardware Connections............................................................................................ 2-8
2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections........................................................................ 2-11
2.4.5 Hardware Power-on .............................................................................................. 2-14
Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra 20................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Configuring TC................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Introduction to TC.................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2 Configuring TC ........................................................................................................ 3-1
3.3 Configuring Disk Array....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.4 Configuring Netra 20........................................................................................................ 3-26
Chapter 4 Installing and Configuring Solaris ............................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Installing Solaris 8.............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Host.................................................................................. 4-1
i

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8 ................................................................................................... 4-1

4.3 Installing Solaris Patches................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools .............................................................................................. 4-9
4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch....................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches.......................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver ................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch ......................................................................... 4-14
4.4 Configuring Solaris .......................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files............................................................................. 4-15
4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files...................................................... 4-16
4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root........................................................................... 4-17
4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root.............................................................................. 4-17
4.4.5 Executing the .profile File...................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File ................................................................... 4-17
4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File............................................................................... 4-18
4.4.8 Restarting the Hosts.............................................................................................. 4-18
4.5 Installing Utilities .............................................................................................................. 4-18
4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software .................................................................................. 4-18
4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software................................................................................... 4-19
Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File .................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters ................................ 5-2
5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File ......................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Cleaning Out Device Data....................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1 ........................................................ 5-3
5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2 ........................................................ 5-7
5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device.............................................................................. 5-9
5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes ............................................................ 5-10
5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5.............................................................. 5-11
5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager.................................................................................... 5-12
5.4.2 Installing Volume Manager Patches...................................................................... 5-12
5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters ............................................................. 5-13
5.4.4 Checking the Installation ....................................................................................... 5-14
5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses................................................................................ 5-14
5.5.1 Checking Hostid .................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent .................................................................. 5-15
5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License........................................................................... 5-15
5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered........................................................ 5-16
5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters................................................................................ 5-16
ii

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk ............................................................................................... 5-16

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group................................................................... 5-17
5.6.3 Configuring NAFO ................................................................................................. 5-22
5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group............................................................... 5-22
5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script ................................................................................ 5-23
5.6.6 Checking the Configuration................................................................................... 5-23
Chapter 6 Installing Billing Interface ........................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Installing FTP ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Installing FTAM .................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 ........................................................................... 6-1
6.3.2 Installation Preparations.......................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.3 Installation Steps ..................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.4 Configuring Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands ..................................................... 6-13
Chapter 7 Installing CG9812 Server ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections............................................................................ 7-1
7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation................................................................... 7-1
7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites ......................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know ................................................................... 7-6
7.3 Installing Server Software.................................................................................................. 7-7
7.4 Upgrading Server............................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.1 General Upgrade..................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.2 Special Upgrade.................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version............................................................................................ 7-13
Chapter 8 Installing CG9812 Client.............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Installing Client Software ................................................................................................... 8-1
8.3 Upgrading Client ................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4 Checking Client Software .................................................................................................. 8-8

iii

HUAWEI CG9812

The CG9812 system uses Solaris as the operating system (OS), Veritas Volume
Manager as the disk management software, and high-availability (HA) SUN Cluster of
as the system management software.
This chapter introduces the contents below:
z
Installation Flow
Resource Planning
1.2 Installation Flow

This section introduces the installation steps and time planning.
1.2.1 Installation Flow Chart

Figure 1-1 shows the overall installation flow of the CG9812 server.

1-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Begin Installation
Plan hardware, software, and

system resources
Install Hardware
Configure SCs and disk arrays
Install Solaris, Cluster, VM, and

related patches
Partition disk space
Map system disk
Install billing interface (optional)

server software
client software
Check installation
Finish installation
Figure 1-1 Installation flow chart
1.2.2 Installation Time Planning

It is estimated to take eight hours to install the CG9812 system. For details, see
Table 1-1.

1-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 1-1 Time planning

Task No.
Task description
Estimated time(hour)
Installing hardware
0.5
Configuring hardware parameters
0.5
Installing Solaris (with two sets of CDs)
Installing Solaris patches (with two sets of

CDs)
1.5
Installing SUN Cluster
0.5
Configuring SUN Cluster
0.5
Installing VxVM
Configuring VxVM
Installing CG9812 software
0.4
10
Checking installation
0.2

This section introduces hardware and software preparations before the CG9812 is
installed.
1.3.1 Hardware Preparations

The CG9812 uses the SUN Netra 20 minicomputers and the SUN StorEdge 3310 disk
arrays as its main hardware. The required hardware is given below:
z
Two Netra 20 minicomputers with the same configurations
Two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays with the same configurations
A terminal concentrator (TC)
Two S3526 LAN Switches with the same configurations
At least one PC console or SUN workstation as the operation terminal for

software installation and routine maintenance
For detailed hardware configuration, see Table 1-2.

1-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 1-2 Hardware configuration

Item
Configuration
CPU
2*1.20 GHz
Memory
2 GB
Hard disk
2*73 GB
1)
One 4-port external network adapter.

The four ports are qfe0, qfe 1, qfe 2 and
qfe 3. This adapter is used to connect
the
Netra 20
minicomputer
public
network
for
application
purposes. qfe1 and qfe2 serve as NAFO
Network Adapter
links.
2)
One 1-port built-in network adapter eri0

as heartbeat link.
3)
One 1-port external network adapter

hme0 as heartbeat link.
DVD-ROM
Tape drive
None
Power supply
Dual DC power input
Capacity
5*36 GB
SCSI port
2.
Power supply
Dual DC power input
Ethernet port
Serial port
4*Serial port(RJ-45)
Console port
Power supply
Quidway S3526
Ethernet port
24
LAN Switch
Power supply
3310 disk array
TC

1-4

HUAWEI CG9812
1.3.2 Software Preparations

I. Description of the host system
The CG9812 uses the Netra 20 minicomputers with the SUN Cluster software. The
Sun Cluster is cluster software with high availability (HA). In SUN Cluster, two or more
hosts are organized over various networks into a cluster, and each host is called a
node.
II. Software configuration

Table 1-3 shows the software configuration of the CG9812.
Table 1-3 Software configuration
Type
Item
Configuration
Solaris 8 (02/04 SPARC Platform)
Operating system
Solaris Patch
System
software
Cluster software
SUN Cluster 3.0
Disk management
Veritas Volume Manager 3.5 with License.
software
Billing interface
Vertel
UTS-FTAM
software (optional)
(Solaris version)
installation
software
Server: CG9812 V200R002 Server (in
Applications
CG9812 applications
Solaris with SC agent script)

Client: CG9812 V200R002 Client (in
Windows
III. Schematic of software installation

The OS, the cluster software, the disk management software, the billing interface
software (optional), and the CG9812 server software are installed on the local disk.
The original bills, final bills, logs, and alarms are stored on the shared disk. See
Figure 1-2.

1-5

HUAWEI CG9812
igwb1
igwb2
SUN OS
SUN OS
SUN Cluster
SUN Cluster
Volume Manager
Volume Manager
FTP/FTAM(optional)
FTP/FTAM(optional)
CG9812 Server
CG 9812 Server
3310-0
igwbdg (original blls, final bills, logs, and alarms)

Mirroring
Mirroring
igwbdg (original bills, final bills, logs, and alarms)
3310-1
Figure 1-2 Software installation schematic
1.4 Resource Planning

Resource planning must be done before the software installation, including:
z
HA System Planning
IP Address Planning
Disk Space Planning
1.4.1 HA System Planning

Table 1-4 shows the planning for the HA system components.
Table 1-4 HA system planning
Item
Primary node
Secondary node
Cluster Name
sc-igwb
sc-igwb
Cluster Node
igwb1
igwb2
Transport path 1
hme0
hme0
Transport path 2
eri0
eri0
NAFO Group 0
qfe0
qfe0
NAFO Group 1
qfe1/qfe2
qfe1/qfe2

1-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Item
Primary node
Secondary node
NAFO Group 2
qfe3
qfe3
Quorum Device
d4
d4
1.4.2 IP Address Planning

The CG9812 uses SUN Cluster 3.0 as the cluster management software. It is
configured with two types of IP addresses, including the fixed IP and the floating IP.
Currently, the CG9812 is configured with ten fixed IPs and three floating IPs. Each
node of the CG9812 uses three fixed IPs. Each disk array is configured with one IP.
One fixed IP is for the TC. One fixed IP address is for the maintenance terminal. And
three floating IPs are used for the CG9812 to connect with the external communication
devices. For details, see below:
z
In SUN Cluster, the heartbeat IP is automatically set by the system.
In configuration, the Netra 20 is provided with a 4-port built-in network adapter,

which is used to connect the public network for application purposes. The four
ports are qre0, qre1, qfe2, and qre3. qre1 and qre2 serve as the NAFO links. Also,
a 1-port built-in network adapter eri0 and a 1-port external network adapter hme0
serve as the heartbeat links.
The float IPs and the fixed IPs are set in the same network segment.
Below is an example of the IP configuration. See Table 1-5 and Table 1-6.
Table 1-5 IP address planning
Device
Fixed IPs of the
Fixed IPs of the
primary node
secondary node
(logical host name)
(logical host name)
Float IP (logical
host name)
Description
Connect with the

qfe0
129.1.1.1(igwb1)
129.1.1.2
129.1.1.3
NMS
(igwb2)
(ha-igwb)
maintenance
and
the
console.
qfe1/qfe2
129.2.1.1(igwb11)
qfe3
129.3.1.1(igwb12)
eri0
Not required
Connect with the
129.2.1.2
129.2.1.3
(igwb21)
(ha-igwb1)
129.3.1.2
129.3.1.3
Connect with the
(igwb22)
(ha-igwb2)
billing center.
Not required
Heartbeat link 1.

1-7
SGSN
or
the
GGSN.

HUAWEI CG9812
Fixed IPs of the
Fixed IPs of the
primary node
secondary node
(logical host name)
(logical host name)
Device
hme0
Not required
Not required
Float IP (logical
host name)
-
Description
Heartbeat link 2.
Table 1-6 Table 1-6 Planning for other IP addresses

Device
IP address (logical host name)
PC
function
Connect with the TC COM
Maintenance
129.1.1.4(admin)
port through the serial port
terminal
of the PC hyper terminal.
TC
129.1.1.5
IP of TC.
3310-0
129.1.1.6
3310-1
129.1.1.7
1.4.3 Disk Space Planning

I. Local disk space planning
The section describes the general principles for hard disk space planning. Hard disk
planning varies with hardware configurations.
Each Netra 20 is provided with two built-in hard disks, and each disk is 73 GB in size.
These two hard disks are configured in RAID1 mirror mode. Therefore, the available
space of each hard disk is equal to the space of a single disk. The main partitions of
the built-in hard disk of Netra 20 are described below:
1)
Root Directory
Allocate sufficient disk space to the root directory since its size cannot be changed
with the UNIX commands. The type of the root file system is User File System (UFS).
2)
SWAP
The required disk space for SWAP depends on the size of the host memory and the
expected maximum memory size. In short, the space of SWAP and the host memory
decides the maximum available memory. The size of SWAP shall be at least 1.5 times
larger than the physical memory. According to the disk capacity and its expansion
requirements, the SWAP is set to 10 GB.
3)
/globaldevices
This is the global device partition with 500 MB. It is used by the VxVM.

1-8

HUAWEI CG9812
The recommended system planning is shown in Table 1-7.

Table 1-7 Local disk planning
Slice Number*
Mount point
Size
Description
c1t0d0s0
57 GB
Root.
c1t0d0s1
swap
10 GB
SWAP.
The size of the whole hard disk,
c1t0d0s2
Overlap
68.35GB
which may be different from the

actual number displayed.
Note: Do not change this partition.
c1t0d0s3
Volume Manager.
reserved.
c1t0d0s4
Volume Manager.
reserved.
c1t0d0s5
c1t0d0s6
c1t0d0s7
/globaldevice
s
-
512MB
This is used to install SUN Cluster.
II. Disk array planning

Each StorEdge 3310 is configured with five 73 GB hard disks set in RAID5+HotSpare
mode. Two Sun StorEdge 3310 are set to RAID1, which is partitioned into LUN0 and
LUN1. 100 MB is allocated to LUN0 for the Quorum device, while 103,328 MB is
allocated to LUN1 to store data of the CG9812, including original bills, final bills, logs,
and alarms. Table 1-8 shows the planning for a disk group. For logical volume
partitioning on LUN1, see Table 1-9.

1-9

HUAWEI CG9812
1)
Disk group partitioning
Table 1-8 Disk group partitioning

Group
Allocated hard
Hotspare hard
name
disk
disk
Host
Description
rootdg
Hard disk of igwb1
None
igwb1
Rootdg of igwb1
rootdg
Hard disk of igwb2
None
igwb2
Rootdg of igwb2
igwbdg
LUN1 in 3310
None
igwb1/igwb2
2)
Shared disk
group
Logical volume partitioning
Table 1-9 Logical volume partitioning

Disk
Disk
(disk
group
used for
Logical
Logical
volume
volume
name
size
igwbdg-stat
100MB
mirror)
Mount point
Function
Fixed size.
Fixed size. This
c2t0d1
igwbdg
log-alarm
4GB
/var/other
volume is used to
store the log and
alarm data.
c3t0d1
The actual size.

front
48GB
/var/frontsave
This volume stores

final bills.
Hard disks in 3310 disk arrays are shown in Figure 1-3.

3310-0
7
8
9
10
11
12
c2t8d0
c2t9d0
c2t10d0
c2t11d0
c2t12d0
3310-1
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 1-3 Hard disks in 3310 disk arrays

1-10
c3t8d0
c3t9d0
c3t10d0
c3t11d0
c3t12d0

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 2 Installing Hardware

This chapter introduces how to install the main hardware of the CG9812 HA system
and how the cables are connected. Before you perform these operations, make sure
the cabinet and its internal devices are installed.
This chapter includes the contents below:
z
Cabinet Configuration
Hardware Description
Hardware Connections
2.2 Cabinet Configuration

The CG9812 server uses the N68-22 cabinet. To configure the cabinet, see
Figure 2-1.

2-1

HUAWEI CG9812
CG9812 Cabinet
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Dummy panel (3U)
Quidway S3526-1 (1U)
Cabling frame (1U)
Quidway S3526-0 (1U)
Cabling frame (1U)
TC (1U)
42U
SUN Netra 20-1 (4U)

SUN Netra 20-0 (4U)
Figure 2-1 Cabinet configuration

The internal devices include two Netra 20 minicomputers, two StorEdge 3310 disk
arrays, and two Quidway 3528G LAN Switches.
2.3 Hardware Description

For hardware configuration, refer to 1.3.1 Hardware Preparations. The CG9812
uses two HA severs as the two nodes of the Cluster. This section introduces the Netra
20, the StorEdge 3310 disk array, and the TC.
2.3.1 Introduction to Sun Netra 20

I. Configuration and ambient indices
Table 2-1 shows the configuration, ambient indices, and physical spec for the Netra 20
minicomputer.

2-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 2-1 Sun Netra 20

Configuration index
Value
CPU
2*1.20 GHz (8M Cache)
Memory
2 GB
Hard disk
2*73 GB
Ambient index
value
parameter
90264 VAC, 47 Hz 63 Hz. The maximum input
AC
power is 550 W (AC).
Power
supply
48 60 VDC. The maximum input power is 570 W
DC
(DC).
Running
temperature
Storage
Running
Humidity
Storage
0C 40C (32F104F) (AC)

5C +45C(23F 113F) (DC)
40C +70C (40F 158F)
10%90%, non-condensation (AC)
5%93%, non-condensation (DC)
5%93%, non-condensation
Physical spec index
Value
Height
87.4 mm (3.44in, 2U)
Width
425.0 mm (16.73in)
Depth
508.0 mm (21in)
Weight
18.6 kg (41 pounds)
II. Front view of Netra 20

The front view of Sun Netra 20 is shown in Figure 2-2.

2-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 2-2 Front view of Sun Netra 20
III. Back view of Netra 20

The back view of Sun Netra 20 is shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Back view of Sun Netra 20

Netra 20 is provided with the following interfaces:
z
One 4-port external network adapter. The four ports are qfe0, qfe 1, qfe 2 and qfe
3. This adapter is used to connect with the public network for application
purposes. qfe1 and qfe2 serve as Network Adapter Failover (NAFO) links.
One 1-port built-in network adapter eri0 as heartbeat link.
One 1-port external network adapter hme0 as heartbeat link.

2-4

HUAWEI CG9812
z
Two PCI Ultra SCSI HostAdapter cards, which are used to connect with the 3310
disk arrays.
2.3.2 Introduction to Sun StorEdge 3310 Disk Array

The universal StorEdge 3310 disk array is a thin, high-density, modular storage
system, which is specially designed for high availability purpose. The 12-drive disk
array can efficiently use the disk space, store the information with hundreds of gigabits,
and support one or two RAID controllers, 128 LUNs, and multiple host connections.
The StorEdge 3310 disk array has the following features:
z
Each support is provided with the capacity up to 3.6 TB.
RAID based hardware or software.
Redundant components.
2U 12-drive outline dimension.
I. Front view of 3310

The front view of 3310 is shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Front view of StorEdge 3310 disk array
Note:
Typically, five hard disks are inserted into the slots 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 for each disk
array. To add more disks, insert one into slot 12 first, and then slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
sequentially.
II. Back view of StorEdge 3310

The back view of StorEdge 3310 is shown in Figure 2-5.

2-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 2-5 Back view of StorEdge 3310 disk array
2.3.3 Introduction to TC
I. The front view of TC
The front view of TC is shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 The front view of TC
II. The back view of TC

The front view of TC is shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 The back view of TC
Note:
This is the front view and back view of AlterPath ACS4. For the actual TC, refer to the
packing list came with the product.

2-6

HUAWEI CG9812
2.3.4 Introduction to Quidway S3526 LAN Switch

The Quidway S3526 LAN Switch provides twenty-four 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Ethernet ports.
Figure 2-8 shows the front panel of the Quidway S3526.
Qu d
i way S3 526
Console Interface
Power supply indicator
Figure 2-8 Front view of Quidway S3526

The twenty-four ports of the S3526 are arranged as shown in Table 2-2 (front view).In
the arrangement, there are the power supply indicator and twenty-four fixed
10/100Base-TX Ethernet ports with the Console interface. Each 10/100Base-TX port
can be used for subtending. The Ethernet ports are standard RJ-45 connectors.
Table 2-2 24 Ethernet ports for S3526
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
Note:
For more information about LAN Switch, refer to Quidway S3528 Series LAN Switch
Installation Manual.
2.4 Hardware Connections

This section introduces how to connect the internal hardware in the cabinet of the
CG9812.
2.4.1 Host Hardware Planning

Table 2-3 shows the model and components of the host.

2-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 2-3 Model and components of the host (Netra 20)

Server model
Netra 20(DC)
igwb1 and igwb2
I/O slot
Purchase No.
PN No.
X1034A
501-5406
X6758A
375-3057
X6758A
375-3057
X1033A
501-5019
2.4.2 Disk Array Hardware Planning

Table 2-4 shows the description of disk arrays.
Table 2-4 Description of disk array models (StorEdge 3310)
Disk array
model
Jumper
switch
description
Connect with the CH0

and the Single Bus
Hard disk slots:

7-11
Disk array
3310(J-DC)
Purchase No.
XTA-3310-36GB-10K
3310-0 3310-1
name
-
PN No.
540-5522
Description
36G 3310 hard disk
2.4.3 Hardware Connections

Make sure all the connections are accurate for the HA system, especially for the SCSI
cables. Wrong connections can cause fatal damage. Before the devices are
connected, make labels and attach them to both end of each cable. For details on
labels, see Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 Description for labeled cables
No.
01
Connectio
Source
n type
device
100M
Ethernet
Source
device
port
qfe0 in
host 1
slot0 of
PCI1
Destination
device
NMS and
LMT

2-8
Destinati
on device
Remark
port
Public
network

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Connectio
Source
n type
device
100M
Ethernet
100M
Ethernet
100M
Ethernet
100M
Ethernet
100M
Ethernet
100M
Ethernet
100M
Ethernet
Source
device
port
Destination
device
qfe1 in
Host 1
slot1 of
GSN
PCI1
qfe2 in
host 1
slot2 of
GSN
PCI1
qfe3 in
host 1
slot3 of
PCI1
qfe0 in
host 2
slot0 of
PCI1
Billing
center (BC)
NMS
LMT
qfe1 in
host 2
slot1 of
GSN
PCI1
qfe2 in
host 2
slot1 of
GSN
PCI1
10
Ethernet
on device
host 2
slot3 of
BC
LAN
Public
Switch-0
network
LAN
Public
Switch-1
network
Host2
LAN
Public
Switch-1
network
built-in
100M
Port in
hme0
Host2
(crossover)
slot0 of
PCI4
11
SCSI
host 1
12
SCSI
host 1
SCSI1 in
PCI3
SCSI1 in
PCI2
Public
network
Private
network
Private
network
3310-0
CH1 port
3310-1
CH1 port

2-9
network
network
port
host 1
Public
Switch-0
(crossover)
Ethernet
network
Public
100M
eri0
Public
LAN
PCI1
host 1
Remark
port
qfe3 in
100M
09
and
Destinati

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Source
n type
device
Source
device
Destination
device
port
SCSI1 in
13
SCSI
host 2
14
SCSI
host 2
15
SCSI
3310-0
CH0 port
3310-0
16
SCSI
3310-1
CH0 port
3310-1
17
18
19/20
21/22
Connectio
COM port
cable
COM port
cable
100M
Ethernet
100M
Ethernet
host 1
host 2
PCI3
SCSI1 in
PCI2
COM port
A
COM port
A
Destinati
on device
3310-0
CH3 port
3310-1
CH3 port
Single
Bus port
Single
Bus port
TC
2# port
TC
3# port
Two
3310-0
controller
ports
Two
3310-1
controller
ports
Note:
The connection of SCSI is shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-9 shows the hardware connections on the CG9812 server.

2-10
Remark
port
Manage
ment
Manage
ment
Manage
ment
Manage
ment

HUAWEI CG9812
3310-0
qfe0
3310-1
qfe1
To LMT
and NMS
qfe2
qfe3
To GSN
To GSN
To BC
To TC
igwb1
Private
network
Private
network
To LMT
and NMS
qfe1
To GSN
qfe0
qfe2
qfe3
To GSN
To BC
To TC
igwb2
eri0
hme0 Alarms port
Figure 2-9 Connections between Sun Netra 20 and Sun StorEdge 3310
2.4.4 Description for Cable Connections

I. Connections between Netra 20 and LAN Switch
Two LAN Switches are configured in the cabinet of the CG9812. One is LAN Switch-0
(primary), and the other is LAN Switch-1 (secondary). The two qfe1 ports are
connected with LAN Switch-0, and the qfe2 ports are connected with LAN Switch-1
to communicate with the GSN. The LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC are not
configured in the cabinet. All cables are straight-thru cables.
In early stage of the deployment, because the LAN Switches to the NMS and the BC
are not installed, the qfe0 and qfe3 ports of the dual system are connected to the LAN
Switches in the cabinet of the CG9812. Figure 2-10 shows the cable connections with
the LAN Switches.

2-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Quidway S3526
(1)
(2)
(3)
igwb2
qfe0
(4)
igwb1\igwb2
qfe2
(5)
igwb2
qfe3
LAN Switch-1
Quidway S3526
(3)
igwb1
qfe0
(4)
igwb1\igwb2
qfe1
(5)
igwb1
qfe3
LAN Switch-0
Figure 2-10 LAN Switch cable connection

In Figure 2-10, each cable represents a virtual LAN (VLAN):
z
Cable (1) and cable (2) are used to couple two LAN Switches for subtending.
Cable (3) is used by OM.
Cable (4) is used by Ga.
Cable (5) is used by BC.
Caution:
Dangling cables must be prohibited.
II. Connections between Netra 20 and TC

Connect the COM port A of the primary server with the 2# port of the TC, and connect
the COM port A of the secondary server with the 3# port of the TC to log in to the
primary server and secondary server remotely.
III. Connections between the primary server and the secondary server
Connect the external eri0 port of the primary server with eri0 of the secondary server.
Connect hme0 of the primary server with hme0 of the secondary server. These two
connections serve as heartbeat links between the primary server and the secondary
server. All cables in use are straight-thru cables (crossover cables).
IV. Connections between Netra 20 and StorEdge 3310

Figure 2-11 shows the internal connections in the disk arrays.

2-12

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 2-11 Connections for StorEdge 3310 disk arrays

Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the primary server with the CH1 port of the 3310-0
disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the primary server with the CH1 port of
the 3310-1 disk array.
Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI2 of the secondary server with the CH3 port of the
3310-0 disk array. Connect the SCSI port1 in PCI1 of the secondary server with the
CH3 port of the 3310-1 disk array.
Connect the CH0 port of 3310-0 with the Single Bus port of 3310-0. Connect the CH0
port of 3310-1 with the Single Bus port of 3310-1.
V. Connections between LAN switches

The LAN Switches on the primary server and the secondary server are subtended
through the ports. See Figure 2-10. All cables in use are crossover cables.
VI. Connections related to power cables and ground cables

For connections related to power cables and ground cables, follow the precautions
below:
z
Connect the PGND bar of the DC distribution cabinet securely with the nearest
PGND bar provided by the equipment buyer through the PGND bus. The PGND
cables are yellow-green plastic insulated copper wires with the same core
diameter as that of the power cables.
Label each power cable and ground cable before connection.
For Netra 20, connect the power cables and ground cables for the internal devices in
the CG9812 cabinet as indicated in Figure 2-12.

2-13

HUAWEI CG9812
LAN Switch-1
LAN Switch-0
TC
3310-1
3310-0
Netra 20-1
Netra 20-0
Figure 2-12 Connections of power/ground cables for devices in the CG9812 cabinet
(Netra 20)
2.4.5 Hardware Power-on

To power on the two Netra 20 minicomputers and the disk arrays, follow the sequence
below:
Disk arrays > the upper minicomputer > the lower minicomputer
The power-off sequence is opposite to the power-on sequence.

2-14

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
z
For the minicomputers and disk arrays, sudden power-off is prohibited on the
CG9812 server. Because after UNIX is suddenly powered off, it must be manually
maintained before it can run.
On the CG9812 server, do not restart the two minicomputers frequently.
It is recommended to power on the minicomputers after the disk arrays are

powered on for three minutes.

2-15

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra 20
Chapter 3 Configuring TC, Disk Array, and Netra

20
This chapter describes how to set the TC, disk arrays, and Netra 20, including:
z
Configuring TC
Configuring Disk Array
Configuring Netra 20
3.2 Configuring TC
3.2.1 Introduction to TC
The HA system does not include a video adapter or a display. It is configured with a TC
to transfer the control signals from the two hosts and display them on the monitor
console.
3.2.2 Configuring TC
I. Connect the TC with the console
Your console and your TC must be on the same physical LAN. You can connect one
RJ-45 cable from the Ethernet port of the TC to a spare port from the LAN Switch-0,
and another cable from another spare port of LAN Switch-0 to the console used to
manage the TC.
II. Add route pointing

From the console issue a command to add a route pointing to the IP address of the TC
(192.168.160.10) accessed through the consoles Ethernet interface.
route add 192.168.160.10 mask 255.255.255.0 <IP address of the console>
Example: if the console has IP address 192.168.160.1 the command would be:
route add 192.168.160.10 mask 255.255.255.0 192.168.160.1
III. Log in to TC
From the console issue the telnet command to log in to the TC. Enter root as the user
name and tslinux as password.
IV. Setting the Parameters

Type wiz and press Enter
3-1

HUAWEI CG9812
A Configuration Wizard screen is displayed. You can set the parameters of the TC.
*********************************************
**C O N F I G U R A T I O N
W I Z A R D**
*********************************************
INSTRUCTIONS for using the Wizard:
You can:
1)
Enter the appropriate information for your system and press ENTER or
2)
Press ENTER if you are satisfied with the value within the brackets
[] and want to go on to the next parameter or
3)
Press ESC if you want to exit.
NOTE:For some paramters, if there is nothing within the brackets, it will

continue to ask for a value. In that case,you must enter a valid valur or #
if you do not wish to configure the calue.
Press ENTER to continue
After you configure the parameters of TC, a confirmation screen is displayed.

Current configuration:
Hostname: TC
DHCP: disable
System IP:129.1.1.5
Domain name: #
Primary DNS Server: #
Gateway: #
Network Mask: 255.255.255.0
V. Save the setting
3.3 Configuring Disk Array
Note:
Name the two StorEdge 3310 disk arrays 3310-0 and 3310-1. Both of them need to be
configured.
I. Connect the administrative console and StorEdge 3310

Use a DB9DB9 cable to connect COM port B of the maintenance terminal with the
COM port of the StorEdge 3310 disk array. See Figure 3-1.

3-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-1 Connect the administrative console and StorEdge 3310
II. Set the parameters of COM port B of the console

Add the following statements to the /etc/remote file.
s3310:\
:dv=/dev/term/b:br#38400:el=^C^S^QÛ^D:ie=%$:oe=^D:
III. Set IP address for StorEdge 3310

1)
Power on StorEdge 3310, and tip to the disk array from the console.
#tip s3310
2)
Press Ctrl + L to refresh the screen. The following information is displayed. see
Figure 3-2.

3-3

HUAWEI CG9812

3)
main menu. See Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Main menu in StorEdge 3310 configuration interface

4)
Select View and edit Configuration parameters/Communication

Parameters/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)/LAN0/Set IP Address from the main
menu. The following interface appears. See Figure 3-4.

3-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-4 Set IP address and subnet mask

5)
Enter the IP address: 129.1.1.6 (3310-0), 129.1.1.7 (3310-1), and subnet mask:
255.255.0.0, and then press ESC. Note that the given values are for example
purposes only. See Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 StorEdge 3310 IP configuration interface

6)
Click Yes to set the IP address. The following information is displayed. See
Figure 3-6.

3-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-6 Reset StorEdge 3310 controller

7)
Click Yes to reset the controller.
Note:
To set the IP addresses of StorEdge 3310, refer to Table 1-6, that is, set 3310-0 to
129.1.1.6, and 3310-1 to 129.1.1.7.
8)
Log in to StorEdge 3310 after it is reset.
#telnet 129.1.1.6 (or 129.1.1.7)

Trying IP address of disk array...
Connected to IP address of disk array.
Escape character is ^>.
The IP addresses are set if login is successful. Press Ctrl + L.
IV. Set SCSI channels for StorEdge 3310

1)

3-6

HUAWEI CG9812

2)
main menu.
3)
Select view and edit SCSI channels from the main menu. Configure the SCSI
channels as indicated in Figure 3-8. Press Esc to return to the main menu. Then,
click Yes to reset the controller.
Figure 3-8 Set SCSI channels

4)
Log in to StorEdge 3310 disk array again after it is reset.
#telnet 129.1.1.6 (or 129.1.1.7)

Trying IP address of disk array...

3-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Connected to IP address of disk array.

Escape character is ^>.
Press <Ctrl + L>.
V. Set logical drives for StorEdge 3310

1)

2)
main menu. See Figure 3-10.

3-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-10 StorEdge 3310 Main menu

3)
Select view and edit Logical drives from the main menu, and then press Enter
to configure the logical drive. See Figure 3-11.
Caution:
For a new disk, no logical disk is created. See Figure 3-11. Delete the existing logical
disks, if any. If LUN is mapped, you may fail to delete the logical disks. Unmap the
host LUN before you delete the logical disks.

3-9

HUAWEI CG9812

4)
Select LG0, and then press Enter to continue. See Figure 3-12.

5)
Click Yes, and then press Enter to continue. The following interface is displayed.
See Figure 3-13.

3-10

HUAWEI CG9812

6)
Select RAID5, and press Enter to continue. Select the first four drives as RAID5
mirror disks. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is marked if a disk is selected. See
Figure 3-14

7)
Press Esc for confirmation. The following interface is displayed. See

Figure 3-15.

3-11

HUAWEI CG9812

8)
Select Assign Spare Drives, and then press Enter to select the HotSpare disks.

9)
Select all the rest disks as HotSpare drives. In the Slot column, an asterisk (*) is
marked if a disk is selected. Press Esc to confirm your selection. The following
interface is displayed. See Figure 3-17.

3-12

HUAWEI CG9812

10) Click Yes, and then press Enter to create the logical drive. The process will take
about 70 minutes. Do not perform any other operation during the process. See
Figure 3-18.
Figure 3-18 create logical drive

11) If the process indicator disappears, see Figure 3-19, the RAID5 disk is created,
and you can go on with the next step. Press Ctrl + L to refresh the interface.

3-13

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-19 Initialize RAID5 mirror disk

12) After RAID5 is finished initialization, press Esc twice. The following interface is


3-14

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-21 Select partition
VI. Partition logical drive

1)
Select Partition logical drive, and then press Enter to partition the logical disk.
2)
The system then prompts Continue Partition Logical Drive? See Figure 3-22.
Click Yes, and then press Enter.

3)
Press Enter. The following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-23.

3-15

HUAWEI CG9812

4)
Enter 200 for partition0 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter. See
Figure 3-24.
Figure 3-24 Size of partition0

5)
Enter.

3-16

HUAWEI CG9812

6)
Move to the second row, and then press Enter to allocate space for partition1.
7)
Enter 103,228 in Partition Size (MB), and then press Enter. See Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-26 Size of partition1

8)
Enter to complete the partition.

3-17

HUAWEI CG9812
VII. Map logical drives to Host LUNs

1)
Press Esc twice to return to the main menu. On the main menu, select view and
edit Host LUNs, and then press Enter. See Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28 StorEdge main menu

2)
Select CHL 1 ID 0 (Primary Controller), and then press Enter. See

Figure 3-29.

3-18

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-29 Select channel1
Caution:
Make sure CHL 1 is set to Primary Controller. If CHL1 ID 0 (Secondary Controller) is
displayed, delete this channel, and then add CHL 1 ID 0 (Primary Controller).
3)
Select Logical Drive, and then press Enter. See Figure 3-30.

3-19

HUAWEI CG9812

4)
Select row 0, and then press Enter to map the first LUN. See Figure 3-31.
Figure 3-31 Select the first LUN

5)
Enter the logical drive selection interface. See Figure 3-32.

3-20

HUAWEI CG9812

6)
Select the RAID5 logical drive, and then press Enter. See Figure 3-33.

7)
In Figure 3-34, select LUN 0, and then press Enter.

3-21

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-34 Map host LUN

8)
In Figure 3-35, select Map Host LUN, and then press Enter.
Figure 3-35 Confirm map host LUN

9)
Enter.

3-22

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-36 Select the second LUN

10) Move to LUN 1, and then press Enter to map the second LUN. See Figure 3-37.


3-23

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 3-38 Select logical partition

12) Select LUN 1, and then press Enter. The following interface is displayed. See
Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Map LUN

13) Select Map Host LUN, and then press Enter. The following interface is displayed.
See Figure 3-40.

3-24

HUAWEI CG9812

14) Click Yes, and then press Enter.
15) Press Esc twice to return to the channel selection interface. See Figure 3-41.
Figure 3-41 Select channel 3
Note:
Map host LUN for CH3 in the same way.
16) Then, press Esc till the following interface is displayed. See Figure 3-42.
3-25

HUAWEI CG9812

17) Press Ctrl + ]. The screen shows the following prompt.
telnet>quit
18) Enter quit to close the StorEdge 3310 configuration interface.
3.4 Configuring Netra 20
Note:
Perform the same operations on the two Netra 20 minicomputers.

3-26

HUAWEI CG9812
I. Use a RJ45-DB25 serial port cable to connect the monitor console with Netra
20.
Figure 3-43 Connection schematic

Plug the RJ45 connector of the serial port cable into the monitor port of Netra 20, and
plug the DB25 connector into the port B of the monitor console. See Figure 3-43.
II. Edit the /etc/remote file.

Add the statements below to the end of /etc/remote on the monitor console.
netra20:\
:dv=/dev/term/b:br#9600:el=^C^S^QÛ^D:ie=%$:oe=^D:
III. Connect with Netra 20.

Execute the command below on the monitor console.
#tip Netra 20
ok
Note:
<LOM> is displayed if Netra 20 is powered off. In this case, power on Netra 20, and
then the Ok prompt appears in about three minutes.
IV. Configure Netra 20

1)
Set the standard output
ok setenv output-device ttya
2)
Set the standard input.
ok setenv input-device ttya

3-27

HUAWEI CG9812
3)
Set the MAC address of the network adapter.
ok setenv local-mac-address? true
V. Restart Netra 20
ok reset-all
VI. Quit tip

~.
~
<EOT>
Note:
For hardware installation in a later section, Netra 20 must use ttya (not ttyb) to
connect with the TC. Otherwise, no output information is displayed when you log in to
Netra 20 from the TC.

3-28

HUAWEI CG9812

To install and configure Solaris, follow the steps below::
z
Installing Solaris 8
Installing Solaris Patches
Configuring Solaris
Installing Utilities
4.2 Installing Solaris 8
Note:
Solaris (04/02 or above) must be installed on both hosts.
During the setup process, press ESC+2 to go to the next step, press Up or Down
to locate an option, and press Space or Enter to select the selection.
4.2.1 Connecting Consoles of Host

Netra 20 is not provided with a display device. The Console of the SUN workstation
can be connected through the TC.
II. Operation steps

For igwb1
# telnet 129.1.1.5 7002
For igwb2
# telnet 129.1.1.5 7003
4.2.2 Installing Solaris 8

Generally, Solaris is installed by a designated SUN engineer. The following installation
steps are for your reference only. You can install the HA system software on the two

4-1

HUAWEI CG9812
hosts (igwb1 and igwb2) concurrently. Make sure that the same parameters are
configured for the two hosts.
II. Operation steps

Step
1
Description
Insert the Solaris 8 System Software 1 of 2 CD into the CD-ROM of the
console.
Enter the OK state.
Method 1: If the workstation is not installed with UNIX, press Ctrl+] on the
console, type Send brk, and press Enter to show the ok prompt.
Method 2: If Solaris is installed, type halt as the user root to show the ok
prompt.
Boot the host from the CD-ROM. Type boot cdrom after the OK prompt:
ok boot cdrom
Select English as installation language. See below:

Select a Language
0. English
1. French
9. Traditional Chinese
Select the locale. Select English. See below:

Select a Locale
0. English (C - 7-bit ASCII)
1. Albania (ISO8859-2)
18. Finland (ISO8859-15 - Euro)


4-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Select the terminal type. Select DEC VT100. Because no monitor is
configured in the HA system, the installer cannot identify the terminal type.
To select he terminal type, follow the steps below:
Press Return to show more choices.
What type of terminal are you using?

1) ANSI Standard CRT
2) DEC VT52
3) DEC VT100
...
13) Other
Confirm the selection.

Esc-2_Continue
Esc-6_Help
Esc-2_Continue means to press ESC + 2 to continue, and Esc-6_help

means to press ESC + 6 to display the help information. Other operations
are similar. In the subsequent operations, unless otherwise specified,
Esc-2_Continue means to press ESC + 2 to continue.
Configure Network connectivity. Click Yes. See below:
Networked
[X] Yes
[ ] No
Configure DCHP. Select No. See below:

9
Use DHCP
[ ] Yes
[X] No
Enter the Main Network interface. Enter qfe0.

Primary network interface
10
[X] qfe0
[ ] qfe1
[ ] qfe2
[ ] qfe3
Enter the host name. Enter igwb1 for the primary node, and igwb2 for the
11
secondary node. See below:

Host name:igwb1

4-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Enter the IP addresses. The IP address of igwb1 is 129.1.1.1, and that of
12
igwb2 is 129.1.1.2. See below:

IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for the Secondary node)
Select the subnet mask. Type Yes. The operation is as follows:

13
System part of a subnet

[X] Yes
[ ] No
14
Set Net Mask. Enter 255.255.0.0. see below:

Netmask: 255.255.0.0
Determine whether to enable IPv6. Select No. see below:

15
Enable IPv6
[ ] Yes
[X] No
Press <ESC + 2> to continue. The settings are displayed below:

Networked: Yes
Use DHCP: No
Primary network interface: qfe0
16
Host name: igwb1 (igwb2 for igwb2)

IP address: 129.1.1.1 (129.1.1.2 for igwb2)
System part of a subnet: Yes
Netmask: 255.255.0.0
Enable IPv6: No
Determine whether to configure Kerberos Security. Select No. See below:

17
Configure
Kerberos Security
[ ] Yes
[X] No
Determine whether to provide Name Service. Select None. See below:

Name service
[ ] NIS+
18
[ ] NIS
[ ] DNS
[ ] LDAP
[X] None

4-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Select the Geographic Region, for example, Asia, Eastern. See below:
19
Regions
[X] Asia, Eastern
[ ] United States
Select Time Zone. Select the local time zone, such as Hong Kong. See
below:
20
Time zones
[ ] Hong Kong
[X] Republic of China
Set Data and Time. For example,

Date and time: 2004-02-03 09:00
Year
21
(4 digits) :
2004
Month (1-12)
02
Day
(1-31)
03
Hour
(0-23)
09
Minute (0-59)
00
Press ESC + 2 to continue.

22
Time zone: Republic of China

Date and time: 2004-02-03 09:00:00
23
Initialize the setup process. Press ESC + 4 to select Initial. See below:
F2_Upgrade
24
F4_Initial
F5_Exit
F6_Help
Press ESC + 2 to select the standard installation.

Esc-2_Standard
F3_Go Back
Esc-4_Flash

4-5
F5_Exit
F6_Help

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Select the following character sets from the Geographic Region menu.
Select the geographic regions for which support should be installed.
[ ] Eastern Europe
[/] Asia
[ ] PC Kanji (ja_JP.PCK)
25
[X]
Simplified Chinese EUC
[X]
[X]
[/] North America

[ ]
Canada-English (ISO8859-1)
[X]
26
Determine whether to include the 64-bit support. Select Yes.

[X]
Select
To Include Solaris 64-bit Support
Select the components. Select Entire Distribution Plus OEM support for
full install. See below:
27
[X] Entire Distribution plus OEM
support 64-bit
1587.00 MB
[ ] Entire Distribution 64-bit ................. 1549.00 MB

[ ] Developer System Support 64-bit ............ 1498.00 MB
[ ] End User System Support 64-bit ............. 1073.00 MB
Select the installation directory. Select c0t0d0. See below:

28
[X] c1t0d0
[ ] c1t1d0
(72538 MB) boot disk
72538 MB (F4 to edit)
(72538 MB)72538 MB
Determine whether to preserve the existing data on the hard disk. Press
ESC + 2 to select continue to overwrite the data. See below:
29
Do you want to preserve existing data? At least one of the disks you've
selected for installing Solaris software has file systems or unnamed
slices that you may want to save.
F2_Continue
F3_Go Back
F4_Preserve
F5_Exit
F6_Help
Determine whether to lay out the file system automatically. Press ESC + 4 to
30
select Manual Layout.

F2_Auto Layout F3_Go Back F4_Manual Layout
F5_Exit F6_Help
31
Current hard disk (overlap). Select Continue to conform.
32
Partition the hard disk as indicated in 1.4.3 I. 3), and then select Continue.

4-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Press ESC + 2 to confirm the partition.
File system/Mount point
Disk/Slice
Size
=============================================================
33
c1t0d0s0
57GB
swap
c1t0d0s1
10GB
overlap
c1t0d0s2
68.35GB
/globaldevices
c1t0d0s6
512MB
Determine whether to mount software from a remote file server. Pres

ESC+2 to select Continue.
34
Do you want to mount software

be
from a remote file server? This may
necessary if you had to remove software because of disk space
problems.
F2_Continue
F3_Go Back
F4_Remote Mounts
F5_Exit
F6_Help
Confirm your configurations. Press ESC + 2> to select Continue.

The information shown below is your profile for installing Solaris
software. It reflects the choices you've made on previous screens.
=================================================================
=
Installation Option: Initial
Boot Device: c1t0d0
Client Services: None
Locales: Simplified Chinese EUC
35

Software: Solaris 8, Entire Distribution plus OEM sup
File System and Disk Layout:
/
c1t0d0s0
57 GB
swap
c1t0d0s1
10 GB
/globaldevices
c1t0d0s6
512 MB
=================================================================
F2_Continue
F4_Change
F5_Exit
F6_Help
Press ESC + 2 to ignore the following warning.

36
WARNING: Unused disk space (c1t0d0)

Esc-2_OK F5_Cancel
Esc-2_OK
Installation?

4-7
F5_CancelqReboot
After

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Determine whether to reboot the computer automatically after installation.
37
Select Auto Reboot.

[X] Auto Reboot
[ ] Manual
Start the setup process, and the setup progress is displayed. The setup
38
process takes about 40 minutes. After installation, the system will reboot
automatically.
After Solaris is restarted, the system prompts to enter and confirm the
password of root. Remember the password. See below
39
Root password:******
Press Return to continue.
Re-enter your root password: ******
below:
Media:
40
1. CD/DVD
3. Skip
Media [1]:<Enter>
Insert the Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 CD, and then press Enter. See below,
41
Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Software 2 of 2 (2/02 SPARC

Platform Edition).
After you insert the disc, please press Enter:<Enter>
Determine whether to display the installation details. Select 2 to continue.

See below:
Installation details:
42
Product
Result
More Info
1. Solaris 8 packages (part 2) Installed Available

2. Done
Enter the number corresponding to the desired selection for more
information, or enter 2 to continue [2]:<Enter>

4-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
below:
Media:
43
1. CD/DVD
3. Skip
Media [1]:<Enter>
Insert the CD for Solaris 8 Languages and press Enter. See below:
44
Please insert the CD/DVD for Solaris 8 Languages (2/02 SPARC Platform
Edition).
After you insert the disc, please press Enter: <Enter>.
45
Solaris restarts automatically. The installation is complete.
4.3 Installing Solaris Patches

This section introduces how to install the Solaris patches, including:
z
Installing Patch Tools
Installing Solaris 8 Patch
Installing SAN Patches
Installing SCSI Card Driver
Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch
4.3.1 Installing Patch Tools

Install the patch on igwb1 and igwb2.
II. Operation Steps

Table 4-1shows you the installation steps.
Table 4-1 Installation steps for Solaris standard patch
Step
1
Description

4-9

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Install the patch as root.
2*
# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/install/
# sh ./setup-standard.sh
Disable the power saving daemon. Type y.

Is the power saving daemon to be disabled? [y/n]: y
Disable the keyboard power button. Type y.

Sun keyboard Power button to be disabled? [y/n]: y
Disable the buttons & dials. Type y.

Are the buttons & dials to be disabled? [y/n]: y
Determine whether the remote login of root is allowed. Type y.

Are remote root logins to be allowed? [y/n]: y
Determine whether to install the Automated Crash Analysis Tool (ACT)

7
software package. Type y.

Do you want to install the ACT package? [y/n]: y
Begin to install the explorer package.

Agree to these terms? <y,n>
Set the installation directory. Press Enter to select the /opt/SUNWexplo

9
directory by default.
Where should this package be installed? [/opt/SUNWexplo]:
10
Enter Company Name. For example,

Company name []:Huawei
11
Enter Contract number. Press Enter.

Contract ID []:
12
Enter System Serial Number. Press Enter.

System serial number []:
13
Enter Contact Name. Press Enter.

Contact name []:
14
Enter your email address. Press Enter.

Contact email address []:
15
Enter your phone number. Press Enter.

Phone number []:

4-10

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
16
Description
17

18
Enter your city. Press Enter.

City []:
19
Enter your state. Press Enter.

State []:
20
Enter your zip code. Press Enter.

Zip []:
24
Enter your country. Press Enter.

Country []:
Select the geographic region where the local SUN branch is located. For
22
example. Select APAC: Asia, Pacific. Press Enter.

Geographic Region

23

[y,n] n
24
25
Send the output to other email address: Enter- for none

Enter the return address for analysis result. Enter - for none.
Return address for explorer email output <>:
The settings are displayed. Select y to confirm or select n to reset the
26
information.
Are these values okay? [y,n] y
27

Do you wish to run explorer once a week? [y,n] n
28

Would you like to do this now? [y,n] n
29
The /opt/SUNWexplo does not exist. Select y to create it.

Do you want this directory created now <y,n,?,q>

4-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
The following information is displayed. Select yes, and then press Enter.
30
Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWexplo> [y,n,?]

y
4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch

Install the patches on igwb1 and igwb2.
II. Operation steps

Step
1
Description
# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/8
# unpack-patches
Run the command below to begin the setup process. This process may
take a long time. Please wait.

# cd /tmp/8; /install_all_patches
Restart the computer after the installation is complete.
# sync;sync;sync
# reboot
4.3.3 Installing SAN Patches

II. Operation steps

Step
1
Description
Insert the SAN software installation CD into the CD-ROM of the
corresponding host or workstation console.

4-12

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
# cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN
# unpack-patches
Are you ready to unpack patches into /tmp/SAN? [y/n]:
Run the commands below to install the patches:

3
#cd /tmp/SAN
#./install_patches
Go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8, and then run the commands

below:
#cd cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SAN/8
4
#unpack-patches
May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n] y
Install the patch package with the commands below:.

5
#cd /tmp/8
#./install_patches
4.3.4 Installing SCSI Card Driver

For StorEdge 3310, make sure the SCSI card driver is installed on igwb1 and igwb2.
II. Operation steps

Step
1
Description
Insert the driver CD into the CD-ROM of the corresponding host or

4-13

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Run the commands below to install the SCSI card driver:
#mkdir -p /export/home/software/scsi
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/progs/SUNWqus/8
#cp SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz
/export/home/software/scsi/
#cd /export/home/software/scsi
#gunzip SUNWqus_8_all.tar.gz
#tar xvf SUNWqus_8_all.tar
#pkgadd d .
3
4
5
Select package(s) you wish to process (or all to process all

packages). (default: all) <?,??,q>: (press Enter)
Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWqus> <y,n,?>
y
Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWqusux> <y,n,?>
y
4.3.5 Installing SCSI Card Driver Patch

II. Operation Procedure

Step
Description
Log in as root, and then go to /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SUNWqus/8
#unpack-patches

May I delete /tmp/8? [y/n]: y
#cd /tmp/8
#./install_patches
Are you ready to continue with install? <y/n> y

4-14

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
Restart the computer after installation.
# sync;sync;sync
# reboot -- -r
Use the format command to view all the hard disks on the disk array.
Caution:
Make sure the above software packages are installed in the above sequence. Restart
the computer after a package is installed. The computer can automatically detect the
disk array status during the restart process.
4.4 Configuring Solaris

After Solaris and related patches are installed, modify the configuration file on igwb1
and igwb2 respectively.
4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files

In the /etc/hosts file, add the name and IP address of one host of the dual system to
facilitate the access between the hosts of the dual system.
I. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb1

#
#
127.0.0.1 localhost
129.1.1.1 igwb1
loghost igwb1.net
129.2.1.1 igwb11
129.3.1.1 igwb12
129.1.1.2 igwb2
129.2.1.2 igwb21
129.3.1.2 igwb22
129.1.1.3 ha-igwb
129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2

4-15

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Modify the /etc/hosts file of igwb2.

#
#
127.0.0.1 localhost
129.1.1.2 igwb2
loghost igwb2.net
129.2.1.2 igwb21
129.3.1.2 igwb22
129.1.1.1 igwb1
129.2.1.1 igwb11
129.3.1.1 igwb12
129.1.1.3 ha-igwb
129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2
Note:
The /etc/hosts records the IP addresses of the local nodes and all the nodes in the
dual system. 129.1.1.1 is the IP address of the primary node, and 129.1.1.2 is the IP
address of the secondary node. For a specific IP address, enter as indicated in the IP
planning table.
4.4.2 Creating Network Adapter Configuration Files

Create the network adapter configuration file for igwb1 and igwb2.
I. Create hostname.qfe1 and hostname.qfe3 in the /etc directory of igwb1

Create hostname.qfe1
# vi /etc/hostname.qfe1
Add the line below:

igwb11
Add the line below:

igwb12

4-16

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Create hostname.qfe1 and hostname.qfe3 in the /etc directory of igwb2

Add the line below:

igwb21
Add the line below:

igwb22
4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root

Modify the /etc/default/login file. Comment off the line where CONSOLE is set. For
example, modify
CONSOLE=/dev/console
into:
#CONSOLE=/dev/console
Add a comment on this line. Then the user root can log in to the host by Telnet.
4.4.4 Configuring FTP Login for root

Modify the file /etc/ftpusers. Add # before root to comment off the line. Then, the user
root can log in by FTP.
4.4.5 Executing the .profile File

Open the /.profile files on the two nodes, and then modify the contents related to
TERM. Add the content below to the end of the .profile files.
TERM=vt100; export TERM
Execute the .profile files.

#. /.profile
(# is to enable the .profile file.)
4.4.6 Modifying the /kernel/drv/sd.conf File

Add the contents below to the end of the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file:
target=0 lun=1;
target=1 lun=1;

4-17

HUAWEI CG9812
target=2 lun=1;
target=3 lun=1;
target=4 lun=1;
target=5 lun=1;
4.4.7 Modifying the /etc/system File

Add the line below to the end of the /etc/system file:
Exclude: lofs
Note:
This line is added because Sun Cluster 3.0 does not support the Loopback file system.
For details, refer to Sun Cluster 3.0 Release Notes.
4.4.8 Restarting the Hosts

#sync;sync;sync
#shutdown y g0 i6
4.5 Installing Utilities

This section introduces how to install the utilities, including the TOP utility and the TVS
utility.
4.5.1 Installing the TOP Software

The TOP utility is used to test the hardware states, such as CPU and memory. Install
this software on igwb1 and igwb2.
Step
1
Description
Insert the TOP software CD into the CD-ROM.
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the setup directory.
# cd /cdrom/cdrom0
# cd sun/tools/top

4-18

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
3
Description
Copy the installation package to the temp directory.
# cp top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz /tmp
Unpack the software package
# cd /tmp
# gzcat -d top.3.5b8.SPARC.64bit.Solaris.8.pkg.tgz|tar xvfInstall the package.
# pkgadd -d .top
Do you want to install these as setuid/setgid files [y,n,?,q] y
If the installation is successful, the information below is prompted:

Installation of <top> was successful.
4.5.2 Installing the VTS Software

Install the VTS utility on igwb1 and igwb2.
Step
1
Description
Insert the VTS software CD into the CD-ROM.
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 as root, and then go to the following directories.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/SunVTS-5.1
SUNWvts
SUNWvtsmn
SUNWvtsx
#cd 8
SUNWlxml SUNWlxmlx install-s8xmlpkgs.sh

#./install-s8xmlpkgs.sh
The installation is successful if the information below is prompted on the
screen:
3
## Installing part 1 of 1.
/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so <symbolic link>
/usr/lib/sparcv9/libxml2.so.2
[ verifying class <none> ]
Installation of <SUNWlxmlx> was successful.

4-19

HUAWEI CG9812
Step
Description
#cd ..
#pkgadd -d .
This is interactive installation process. It is required to select the following
parameters:
Select package(s) you wish to process (or 'all' to process
all packages). (default: all) [?,??,q]:

Do you want to enable the Kerberos V5 based security? n
Do you want to continue with the installation of <SUNWvts> [y,n,?]
y
Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and then go to the setup directory.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunVTS/5.1
Unpack the package.
# unpack-patches
# cd /tmp/5.1
Add the patch.
# patchadd 112336-02
If the installation is successful, the following information is displayed on the
8
screen:
Patch packages installed:
SUNWvts
SUNWvtsx

4-20

HUAWEI CG9812

The HA system software includes: Sun Cluster (SC) 3.0 and Volume Manager. To
install the software, follow the steps below:
z
Installing Sun Cluster 3.0
Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5
Entering Volume Manager Licenses
Configuring HA System Parameters

Before installing the HA dual-system software, do the followings:
z
Checking the /etc/hosts File
Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters
Checking the /etc/default/login File
Cleaning Out Device Data
5.2.1 Checking the /etc/hosts File

The /etc/hosts file contains the host names and related IP addresses of:
z
Public and private networks
Logical hosts
The HA system uses the names of the network adapters for communication purposes,
so the /etc/hosts file must provide all the related information.
Check whether the /etc/hosts file contains the same contents below. If not, modify it.
I. On igwb1
#
#
127.0.0.1 localhost
129.1.1.1 igwb1
loghost igwb1.net
129.2.1.1 igwb11
129.3.1.1 igwb12
129.1.1.2 igwb2
129.2.1.2 igwb21

5-1

HUAWEI CG9812
129.3.1.2 igwb22
129.1.1.3 ha-igwb
129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2
II. On igwb2
#
#
127.0.0.1
localhost
129.1.1.2
igwb2 igwb2.huawei.com
129.2.1.2
igwb21
129.3.1.2
igwb22
129.1.1.1
igwb1
129.2.1.1
igwb11
129.3.1.1
igwb12
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb2
loghost
Note:
Only the value of loghost is different between the two hosts.
5.2.2 Checking Configurations of the hostname Network Adapters

z
On igwb1
For /etc/hostname.qfe1, it is set to igwb11.

z
On igwb2


5-2

HUAWEI CG9812
5.2.3 Checking the /etc/default/login File

Check if "#" is added before CONSOLE=/dev/console to comment off this line.
5.2.4 Cleaning Out Device Data

Execute the commands below on the two hosts:
5.3 Installing Sun Cluster 3.0

The SC software is HA software. In Sun cluster, two hosts form a cluster over the
network. Each host is a node. One or more user processes that run on the two nodes
constitute a data service.
SUN Cluster is used to monitor the running status of the data services and the two
nodes. If one node fails, the data services will be transferred to the other node to avoid
longtime service interruption.
To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:
z
Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1
Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2
Configuring the Quorum Device
Checking the Status of the Cluster
5.3.1 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb1

To install the SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1, follow the steps below:
z
Copy installation files
Install SUN Cluster 3.0
Install SUN Cluster 3.0 Patches on igwb1
Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file
Restart igwb1
Check the installation
I. Copy installation files

Copy the installation software package from the Sun Cluster 3.0 CD to the /install
directory of igwb1.
To copy the package, follow the steps below:
1)
Go to the Sun Cluster 3.0 setup directory with the commands below:
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun-internal/progs/SunCluster/3.0/
#cd Sun_Cluster_3.0_Update3_GA

5-3

HUAWEI CG9812
This directory contains the files below:

suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8.tar.gz
scdataservices_3_0_u3.tar.gz
2)
Copy the installation files to igwb1 with the commands below:
root@igwb1 #mkdir p /install

root@igwb1#cp suncluster_3_0_u3_solaris8.tar.gz /install
root@igwb1#cp scdataservices_3_0_u3.tar.gz /install
II. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb1

1)
Log in to igwb1 and unpack the installation package.
#telnet igwb1
root@igwb1#cd tools
This directory includes the files below:
Upgrade
2)
defaults
lib
scinstall
Run scinstall to install SUN Cluster 3.0
root@igwb1 # ./scinstall
3)
Select installation parameters
*** Main Menu ***

* 3) Configure a cluster to be JumpStarted from this install server
* q) Quit
Note:
node.
Press Ctrl+D to return to the main menu during the setup process.

5-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Do you want to continue (yes/no) [yes]? y

Is it okay to continue (yes/no) [yes]? y
What is the name of the cluster you want to establish? sc-igwb
Please list the names of the other nodes planned for the initial
cluster configuration. List one node name per line. When finished, type
Control-D:
Node name: igwb2
Node name (Ctrl-D to finish): ^D
Note:
On igwb2, the following information is displayed:

What is the name of the sponsoring node?
4)
igwb1.
Set the names of the nodes
If the names of the two nodes in the Cluster are correct, type y; if not, enter n to reset
them.
Do you need to use DES authentication (yes/no) [no]? <Enter>
Is it okay to accept the default network address (yes/no) [yes]?
Is it okay to accept the default netmask (yes/no) [yes]?
Note:
The default network address is 172.16.0.0, and the default netmask is 255.255.0.0.
Set these addresses based on your actual configurations.
Does this two-node cluster use transport junctions (yes/no) [yes]?

What is the name of the first junction in the cluster [switch1]?
What is the name of the second junction in the cluster [switch2]?
Select eri0 as the primary private network adapter, and hme0 as the secondary
private network adapter.
Select the first cluster transport adapter to use:
1) eri0
2) hme0
3) Other
Option: 1

5-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
Select eri0 as the primary heartbeat network adapter.
Name of the junction to which "ce1" is connected [switch1]?

Use the default port name for the "ce1" connection (yes/no) [yes]?
Select the second cluster transport adapter to use:
1) hme0
2) Other
Option: 1
Note:
Select hme0 as the secondary heartbeat network adapter.
Name of the junction to which "ce3" is connected [switch2]?

Use the default port name for the "ce3" connection (yes/no) [yes]?
Note:
Your settings are displayed. If the parameters are correct, select yes to continue with
the setup process; if not, select no to reset them.
Continue to configure the Cluster. Then, select q to close the Main Menu.
III. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 Patches on igwb1

1)
Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and run the commands below as root.
root@igwb1#cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunCluster/3.0
/install/sc3.0_8
root@igwb1# cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster
Are you ready to unpack patches into /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster? [y/n]: y
2)
Run the commands below to unpack the installation package.

5-6

HUAWEI CG9812
root@igwb1#cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster/*Cluster
root@igwb1#./sc_install_cluster
Use '/usr/bin/showrev -p' to verify installed patch-ids.
Refer to individual patch README files for more patch detail.
Rebooting the system is usually necessary after installation.
IV. Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file

To edit the ntp.conf.cluster file, follow the steps below:
#vi
/etc/inet/ntp.conf.cluster

Save and exit.
V. Restart igwb1
root@hwhlr-ph1 # sync
root@hwhlr-ph1 # sync
root@hwhlr-ph1 # init 6
VI. Check the installation

root@igwb1# scstat |more
If the configuration is correct, the following information is displayed:
Cluster node:
Node name
Status
igwb1
Online
5.3.2 Installing SUN Cluster 3.0 Software on igwb2

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 software on igwb2, follow the steps below:
z
Install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2
Install SUN Cluster 3.0 patches on igwb2
Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file
Restart igwb2

5-7

HUAWEI CG9812
I. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2

To install SUN Cluster 3.0 on igwb2, follow the steps below :
1)
Copy SUN Cluster 3.0 and unpack it.
#telnet igwb2
root@igwb2# cd /install
root@igwb2#cd /tools
Upgrade
2)
defaults
lib
scinstall
root@igwb2 # ./scinstall
*** Main Menu ***
Option:2
Add this machine as a node in an established cluster.

What is the name of the sponsoring node?igwb1
What is the name of the cluster you want to join? sc-igwb
Do you want to use autodiscovery (yes/no) [yes]?
The following connections were discovered:
igwb1:eri0 switch1 igwb2:eri0
igwb1:hme0 switch2 igwb2:hme0
Is it okay to add these connections to the configuration (yes/no) [yes]?
3)
Continue to configure SUN Cluster 3.0. Then, enter q to close the Main Menu
II. Install SUN Cluster 3.0 patches on igwb2

Insert the patch CD into the CD-ROM, and then run the commands below as root.
root@igwb2#cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/sun/patch/SunCluster/3.0/install/sc3.0_8
root@igwb2# cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster

5-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Are you ready to unpack patches into /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster? [y/n]: y
Go to the directory as prompted and run the patch installation script.

root@igwb2#cd /install/SC3.0-5_8-cluster/*Cluster
root@igwb2#./sc_install_cluster
Use '/usr/bin/showrev -p' to verify installed patch-ids.
Refer to individual patch README files for more patch detail.
Rebooting the system is usually necessary after installation.
III. Edit the ntp.conf.cluster file

Run the command below to edit the ntp.conf.cluster file.
#vi
/etc/inet/ntp.conf.cluster

Save and exit.
IV. Restart igwb2

root@igwb2# sync
root@ igwb2# sync
root@ igwb2 # init 6
5.3.3 Configuring the Quorum Device
Note:
Configure the quorum device on igwb1 only.

5-9

HUAWEI CG9812
1)
Check the disk ID (DID)
root@igwb1#scdidadm -L
Specify a hard disk on the disk array for the Quorum device. Here, select d4.
For example:
igwb1>scdidadm -L
1
/dev/did/rdsk/d1
/dev/did/rdsk/d2
/dev/did/rdsk/d3
/dev/did/rdsk/d4
/dev/did/rdsk/d4
/dev/did/rdsk/d5
/dev/did/rdsk/d5
/dev/did/rdsk/d6
/dev/did/rdsk/d6
/dev/did/rdsk/d7
/dev/did/rdsk/d7
/dev/did/rdsk/d8
/dev/did/rdsk/d9
10
/dev/did/rdsk/d10
Note:
Only the shared disk can serve as the Quorum device.
From above, you can see the disks d4, d5, d6 and d7 are shared by the primary
and secondary nodes. d4 and d6 are on LUN0, and d5 and d7 are on LUN1. Here,
d4 is used as the Quorum device.
2)
Create a lock disk
root@igwb1#scconf -a -q globaldev=d4
root@igwb1#scconf -c -q reset
root@igwb1#scconf -a -T node=.
5.3.4 Checking the Status of the Cluster Nodes

Run the command below to check node status:
If the node configurations are correct, the following information is displayed:
Status

5-10

HUAWEI CG9812
---------
------
Cluster node:
igwb1
Online
Cluster node:
igwb2
Online
------------------------------------------------------------------- Cluster Transport Paths -Endpoint
Endpoint
--------
Status
--------
------
Transport path: igwb1:eri0
igwb2:eri0
Path online
Transport path: igwb1:hme0
igwb2:hme0
Path online
----------------------------------------------------------- Quorum Summary -Quorum votes possible:
Quorum votes needed:
Quorum votes present:
-- Quorum Votes by Node -Node Name
---------
------- -------- ------
Node votes:
igwb1
Online
Node votes:
igwb2
Online
-- Quorum Votes by Device -Device Name
-----------
------- -------- ------
Device votes: /dev/did/rdsk/d3s2
Online
------------------------------------------------------------------- Device Group Servers -Device Group
Primary
Secondary
------------
-------
---------
-- Device Group Status -Device Group
Status
------------
------
------------------------------------------------------------------
5.4 Installing and Configuring Volume Manager 3.5

Volume Manager 3.5 must be installed on igwb1 and igwb2. To install and configure
Volume Manager 3.5, follow the steps below:
z
Installing Volume Manager
Modifying Disk Management Parameters

5-11

HUAWEI CG9812
5.4.1 Installing Volume Manager

To install Volume Manager, follow the steps below:
1)
Insert the Volume Manager installation CD into the CD-ROM.
2)
Log in as root.
#cd /cdrom/cdrom0/sun-internal/progs/veritas-vm
#cd 3.5
The current directory contains the foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz installation
package.
3)
Copy the installation package to the specified directory.
#cp foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz /install

#cd /install
4)
#gzcat foundationproduct3.4sunw.tar.gz|tar xvf 5)
#scvxinstall
Do you want Volume Manager to encapsulate root [no]? y
Where is the Volume Manager cdrom? /install/foundationproduct3.4sunw
6)
Enter the License key.
Please
enter
Volume
Manager
license
key
[none]:xxx
(for
example,
rrpu-ypr6-wp69-204k-6ppp-6ppr-pp)
Note:
Enter the temporary License key before you get the permanent one. Make sure you
apply for a permanent License and install it. If not, after the temporary License
expires, the volume manager cannot be reset if a system failure occurs.
To apply for a permanent License, fill in your hostid in the application form provided
with the product by fax or email to Sun Microsystems Inc. Before it is granted, ask
for a temporary License with Sun Microsystems Inc
The system will restart twice during the setup process.

To install the Volume Manager patches, follow the steps below:
1)
Insert the Sun Patches 4.0.2 CD into the CD-ROM.
2)
Log in as root.

5-12

HUAWEI CG9812
#cd /cdrom/cdrom/sun/patch/veritas-vm
#cd 3.5
#ls
You can find the files below in the current directory:
112392-07.zip 113203-03.zip 113595-05.zip 113596-04.zip
3)
#unpack-patches
Cleaning out /tmp/3.5...
Unpacking.....
Patch 112392-06
Patch 113203-03
Patch 113595-05
Patch 113596-03
You should run:cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches
4)
Install the patches with the command below:
#cd /tmp/3.5; ./install_patches

Determining if sufficient save space exists...
Sufficient save space exists, continuing...
Installing patches located in /tmp/3.5
Installing 112392-06...
Ignore the error messages if prompted.
Caution:
Make sure you have the latest patches on hand. If not, contact Sun Microsystems for
technical support.
5.4.3 Modifying Disk Management Parameters

It the DMP function is enabled by Solaris, disable it in the Volume Manager.
1)
Log in as root, and then execute the command below to disable the DMP
function:
5-13

HUAWEI CG9812
#vxdiskadm
(Select 17 Prevent multipathing/Suppress
devices from VxVM's view)

Do you want to continue ? [y,n,q,?] (default: y)
(Select 5 Prevent multipathing of all disks
on a controller by VxVM)
Enter a controller name [<ctlr-name>,all,list,list-exclude,q,?] all
Continue operation? [y,n,q,?] (default: n) y
Enter q till the main menu is displayed.

2)
Restart the computer to enable the parameters.
#sync
#sync
#init 6
5.4.4 Checking the Installation

1)
Run df k and more /etc/vfstab to check if the mounted device cxtxdxsx is

replaced by volume.
2)
Check if vxconfigd is started normally.
#ps -ef| grep vx

It is properly started if the information below is displayed.
root
3)
20
1 0 19:42:32 ?
0:01 vxconfigd -m boot
Execute the vxdctl mode command to check if the initialization is successful.
If "enable" is displayed, the initialization is successful.
5.5 Entering Volume Manager Licenses
Note:
Enter the respective licenses on igwb1 and igwb2.
5.5.1 Checking Hostid

Check the hostid with the command below:
root@igwb1#hostid
You may get:

5-14

HUAWEI CG9812
8301aad5
Check if it is the same as that in the License.
Caution:
The hostids are different for the two minicomputers.
5.5.2 Checking If the License Is Permanent

Check if it is a permanent License with the command below:
root@igwb1# vxlicrep
If it is not a permanent License, the following information is displayed:

VERITAS License Manager vxlicrep utility version 3.00.007d
Creating a report on all VERITAS products installed on this system
-----------------***********************----------------License Key
= R8CE-FR26-NSNN-R4O4-OZNP-PPP6-PPPP-OL
Product Name
= VERITAS Volume Manager
License Type
= DEMO
OEM ID
Demo End Date
= 4095
= Fri Jul 23 00:00:00 2004
(60.3 days from now).
Features :=
VxVM
CPU Count
= Enabled
= Not Restricted
The information indicates that no permanent License is entered for the product. Note
that the letters in bold indicate the expiry date of the temporary license. After the date,
enter a permanent license.
5.5.3 Entering the Permanent License

root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicinst
VERITAS License Manager vxlicinst utility version 3.00.007d
Enter your license key : rrp9-un3k-rtv8-y6pp-p6pp-ncpc-pp

License key successfully installed for VERITAS Volume Manager

5-15

HUAWEI CG9812
5.5.4 Checking If the License Is Correctly Entered

To check if the License is correctly entered, run the command below:
root@igwb1# /sbin/vxlicrep
5.6 Configuring HA System Parameters

To Set the HA system parameters on igwb1 and igwb2, follow the steps below:
z
Mirroring Root Disk
Creating the igwbdg Resource Group
Configuring NAFO
Registering the igwbrg Resource Group
Installing igwb Monitor Script
Checking the Configuration
5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, all the operations in this section shall be performed on
igwb1 and igwb2.
I. Check the disk information

#vxdisk list
DEVICE
TYPE
DISK
GROUP
STATUS
c1t0d0s2
sliced
rootdisk_1
c1t1d0s2
sliced
online
c3t0d0s2
sliced
error
c3t0d1s2
sliced
error
c4t0d0s2
sliced
error
c4t0d1s2
sliced
error
rootdg
online
Choose the second disk as the mirroring disk of the local hard disk, for example, the
c1t1d0s2 in this example. You can select the disk according to actual conditions.
II. Initialize the selected mirrored disk

#vxdiskunsetup C c1t1d0
#vxdisksetup i c1t1d0
#vxdisk list
DEVICE
TYPE
DISK
GROUP
STATUS

5-16

HUAWEI CG9812
c1t0d0s2
sliced
rootdisk_1
rootdg
online
c1t1d0s2
sliced
online
c3t0d0s2
sliced
error
c3t0d1s2
sliced
error
c4t0d0s2
sliced
error
c4t0d1s2
sliced
error
III. Add the mirrored disk into rootdg

IV. Mirror the root disk

Caution:
rootdisk_1 is the local disk obtained with #vxdisk command.

5.6.2 Creating the igwbdg Resource Group
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, perform the operations in this section only on igwb1.
I. View the disk information

#vxdisk list
DEVICE
TYPE
DISK
GROUP
STATUS
c1t0d0s2
sliced
rootdisk_1
c1t1d0s2
sliced
online
c3t0d0s2
sliced
error
rootdg
online

5-17

HUAWEI CG9812
c3t0d1s2
sliced
error
c4t0d0s2
sliced
error
c4t0d1s2
sliced
error
Select c3t1d1 and c4t1d1 as the disks of the igwbdg disk group. c3t1d0 and c4t1d0
are selected as LUN0 in 200 MB. This LUN is set for system maintenance purpose.
Note:
The drive letter varies with the devices. Select based on the actual configurations.
II. Create the igwbdg disk group
Caution:
z
Create the igwbdg disk group on one host only.
The commands below can be saved as creat_volume.sh. Run chmod 755

create_volume.sh to make it executable, and then run sh ./create_volume.sh.
This process may take a few hours, which depends on the disk capacity.
c3t0d1 in the script below should be the actual disk array number. View the
numbers with the format command. For example, the letters in blue (four disks) is
the required disk array numbers. Note that the number in red is the local disk of
igwb 1 only.
root@igwb1#format
Searching for disks...done
AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS:
/pci@8,600000/SUNW,qlc@4/fp@0,0/ssd@w21000004cfc33819,0
/pci@8,600000/SUNW,qlc@4/fp@0,0/ssd@w21000004cfac4524,0
/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@0,0
/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@4/sd@0,1
/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@0,0
/pci@8,700000/pci@2/scsi@5/sd@0,1

5-18

HUAWEI CG9812
Specify disk (enter its number):<CTRL+D>
Caution:
gwbdg01 and igwbdg02 in the script below is set for LUN1 on the StorEdge 3310.
The space of the front disk and the back disk shall be changed based on the actual
capacity of LUN1.
Partition the disk into four partitions, front, back, log-alarm, and igwbdg-stat.
igwbdg-stat is used by the system. Calculate each partition as indicated below: The
total space is the space of LUN1,101,376 MB. Allocate 512 MB to igwbdg-stat,
4,096 MB to log-alarm, and the rest 103,228 MB are fifty-fifty for the front disk and
the back disk. It is recommended that the allocated space for the front disk and the
back disk be set to integral times of 512 to avoid insufficient available space.
1)
Compile the creat_volume.sh script.
vxdg init igwbdg
igwbdg01=c3t0d1
vxdg -g igwbdg adddisk igwbdg02= c4t0d1
vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make igwbdg-stat

vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make log-alarm
vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make front
vxassist -g igwbdg -U fsgen make back
512m
layout=nolog
igwbdg01
4096m
layout=nolog
igwbdg01
48000m
48000m
layout=nolog
layout=nolog
vxassist -g igwbdg mirror igwbdg-stat layout=nolog
igwbdg02
vxassist -g igwbdg mirror log-alarm
igwbdg02
vxassist -g igwbdg mirror front

vxassist -g igwbdg mirror back
2)
layout=nolog
layout=nolog
layout=nolog
Run the script
Execute sh ./create_volumes.sh in the script directory.

3)
Register the igwbdg resource
root@igwb1 # scsetup
*** Main Menu ***
Please select from one of the following options:

1) Quorum

5-19
igwbdg01
igwbdg01
igwbdg02
igwbdg02

HUAWEI CG9812
2) Resource groups
3) Cluster interconnect
4) Device groups and volumes
5) Private hostnames
6) New nodes
7) Other cluster properties
?) Help with menu options
q) Quit
Option: 4
*** Device Groups Menu ***
1) Register a VxVM disk group as a device group
2) Synchronize volume information for a VxVM device group
3) Unregister a VxVM device group
4) Add a node to a VxVM device group
5) Remove a node from a VxVM device group
6) Change key properties of a device group
?) Help
q) Return to the Main Menu
Option: 1
>>> Register a VxVM Disk Group as a Device Group <<<
VERITAS Volume Manager disk groups are always managed by the cluster
as cluster device groups. This option is used to register a VxVM disk
group with the cluster as a cluster device group.
Is it okay to continue (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>
Name of the VxVM disk group you want to register? igwbdg
Primary ownership of a device group is determined by either
specifying or not specifying a preferred ordering of the nodes that
can own the device group. If an order is specified, this will be the
order in which nodes will attempt to establish ownership. If an order
is not specified, the first node that attempts to access a disk in
the device group becomes the owner.
Do you want to configure a preferred ordering (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>
Are both nodes attached to all disks in this group (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>
Which node is the preferred primary for this device group? igwb1
Enable "failback" for this disk device group (yes/no) <no>? no
Is it okay to proceed with the update (yes/no) <yes>? <Enter>
scconf -a -D type=vxvm,name=igwbdg,nodelist=igwb1:igwb2,preferenced=true
Command completed successfully.
Hit ENTER to continue: <Enter>
*** Device Groups Menu ***
1) Register a VxVM disk group as a device group

5-20

HUAWEI CG9812
2) Synchronize volume information for a VxVM device group

3) Unregister a VxVM device group
4) Add a node to a VxVM device group
5) Remove a node from a VxVM device group
6) Change key properties of a device group
?) Help
q) Return to the Main Menu
Option: q
*** Main Menu ***
1) Quorum
2) Resource groups
3) Cluster interconnect
4) Device groups and volumes
5) Private hostnames
6) New nodes
7) Other cluster properties
?) Help with menu options
q) Quit
Option: q
Please wait while the device suppression/unsuppression operations take effect.
Goodbye.
III. Create the new file system on the igwbdg volume

#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/igwbdg-stat
#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm
#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front
#newfs /dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back
The similar information below is displayed when the above commands are executed.
newfs: construct a new file system /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/ igwbdg-stat : (y/n)?
y
Enter y.
IV. Modify the /etc/vfstab and create the mount points

1)
Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to create the mount points
#cd /var
#mkdir frontsave
#mkdir backsave
5-21

HUAWEI CG9812
#mkdir other
Then, three mount points /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, and /var/other are created on
igwb1 and igwb2.
2)
Modify the /etc/vfstab file on igwb1 and igwb2, and then add the contents below:
/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/front /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/front /var/frontsave ufs
no logging
/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/back
/dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/back
/var/backsave
ufs
no logging
/dev/vx/dsk/igwbdg/log-alarm /dev/vx/rdsk/igwbdg/log-alarm /var/other ufs
2 no logging
5.6.3 Configuring NAFO
Note:
Perform this operation on igwb1 and igwb2. Below is an example on igwb1.
root@igwb1#pnmset
The following information is displayed. The letters in bold should be entered.
In the following, you will be prompted to do configuration for network adapter
failover
Do you want to continue ... [y/n]: y
How many NAFO groups to configure [1]: 1
Enter NAFO group number [0]: 0
Enter space-separated list of adapters in nafo0: qfe1 qfe2
Checking configuration of nafo0:
Testing active adapter qfe1...
Testing adapter qfe2...
NAFO configuration completed
5.6.4 Registering the igwbrg Resource Group
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, perform this operation on igwb1 only.
root@igwb1 # scsetup
5-22

HUAWEI CG9812
Restart the HA system with the command below:

root@igwb1#sync
root@igwb1#sync
root@igwb1#init 6
5.6.5 Installing igwb Monitor Script

Transfer the sc30_script.ta file to the /opt directory on igwb1 and igwb2 in binary
mode.
#cd
/opt
#tar
xvf
sc30_script.tar
Run the command below to restart the HA system.

5.6.6 Checking the Configuration

After configuration, run the commands below to check whether the nodes can be
added and switched over.
I. On igwb1, run the commands below:

root@igwb1 # df -k (check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included.)

root@igwb1 # scswitch -S -h igwb1
(Check if the HA system can be switched over
from igwb1 to igwb2.)
II. On igwb2, run the commands below:

root@igwb1 # df -k (Check if all volumes of the disk arrays are included)

5-23

HUAWEI CG9812

The CG9812 supports the FTP and FTAM billing interfaces. Select one of them as
required.
z
To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software.
The FTP software is installed during the UNIX setup process. To use the FTP
interface, you need to configure the FTP server.
It is recommended to transfer the bill files between the CG9812 and the billing center
by FTP.
6.2 Installing FTP

The installation of the FTP interface is simple. The FTP server software is installed
during the UNIX setup process. It is not required to install it separately.
6.3 Installing FTAM

To use the FTAM interface, you need to install and configure the FTAM software. This
section introduces how to install the FTAM billing interface.
6.3.1 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0

The Solstice FTAM 9.0 is a FTAM software package developed by SUN Microsystems
Inc. It is the update version to Solstice FTAM 8.1.1. Compared with Solstice FTAM
8.1.1, this version supports the 64-bit system and corrects some errors. Typically, the
SUN FTAM package contains two components: the application layer package and
protocol stack package, which can be purchased separately.
1)
Solstice OSI 9.0, the OSI protocol stack of FTAM, contains the following
packages.
SUNWcorpc
Solstice OSI RPC installation package
SUNWcosiA
Solstice OSI core stack kernel files 1
SUNWcosia
Solstice OSI core stack kernel files
SUNWcosib
Solstice OSI core stack configuration files
SUNWcosic
Solstice OSI core stack management utilities
SUNWcosid
Solstice OSI core stack development kit
SUNWosiax
Solstice OSI core stack kernel files (64-bit)
SUNWosicx
Solstice OSI core stack management utilities (64-bit)

6-1

HUAWEI CG9812
SUNWosidx
Solstice OSI core stack development kit (64-bit)
SUNWlicsw
SUNWlit
SUNWcosip
Solstice OSI core stack documentation in PDF
2)
Solstice FTAM 9.0, the application layer software of FTAM (containing RFC 1006
protocol stack package), contains the following packages.
SUNWftama
Solstice FTAM configuration files
SUNWftamb
SUNWftabx
SUNWrk6
SUNWrk6x
SUNWftamp
Solstice FTAM documentation in PDF format.
SUNWlicsw
SUNWlit
Caution:
z
SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x are the packages of the RFC1006 protocol stack,
SUNWrk6 supports the 32-bit OS while SUNWrk6x supports the 64-bit OS. The
RFC1006 protocol stack cannot exist in the same system with the OSI protocol
stack. In other words, if the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the OSI protocol
stack cannot be installed on the same computer.
SUNWlicsw is the License monitor process package, and SUNWlit is the License
management toolkit. They are only required to be installed during the FTAM or OSI
setup process. In other words, if the two packages are installed during the OSI
setup process, you do not need to install them during the FTAM setup process.
Currently, Solstice FTAM 9.0 only supports Solaris 8.
If an earlier version of Solstice FTAM is previously installed, uninstall it before

Solstice FTAM 9.0 is installed.
6.3.2 Installation Preparations

I. Prepare the installation software and Licenses
Solstice FTAM 9.0 and Solstice OSI 9.0 are two CDs with a separate License each.
The License is bound to the hostid. The hostid is an 8-byte hexadecimal digit. In
Solaris, check the hostid with the command below:

6-2

HUAWEI CG9812
#hostid
Then, you may get:.
80e63680
II. Decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer
Before installation, decide the underlying communication protocol with the FTAM peer
end, such as the billing center, you may select the RFC1006 protocol or the OSI
protocol. If the protocol cannot be decided, you probably cannot continue with the
FTAM setup process in a later section.
6.3.3 Installation Steps
Note:
Unless otherwise specified, in the later sections, the letters in bold represent the
information you need to enter, and the letters in italic represent the installer
prompts.
<Enter> indicates to press Enter.
I. Install the OSI protocol stack

If you decide to use the OSI protocol stack to communicate with the FTAM peer, the
OSI protocol stack must be installed. If not, directly go to II. Install the FTAM.
1)
Mount the CD-ROM
Insert the OSI protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager is installed,
Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not, mount it manually with the
commands below:
#mkdir /cdrom/osi_9_0
#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/osi_9_0
2)
Open the /cdrom/osi_9_0 directory and install the OSI package.
#cd /cdrom/osi_9_0
#pkgadd -d
1 SUNWcorpc

(sparc) 9.0

6-3

HUAWEI CG9812
2 SUNWcosiA

(sparc) 9.0
3 SUNWcosia

(sparc) 9.0
4 SUNWcosib

(sparc) 9.0
5 SUNWcosic

(sparc) 9.0
6 SUNWcosid

(sparc) 9.0
7 SUNWcosip

(sparc) 9.0
8 SUNWlicsw

(sparc) 6.1
9 SUNWlit

(sparc) 4.1
10 SUNWosiax

(sparc) 9.0


11 SUNWosicx

(sparc) 9.0
12 SUNWosidx

(sparc) 9.0
Select the package you want to install (or select all to install all packages).
Select the packages, or install all the packages by default. Press Enter. Enter y if
prompted during the setup process. For example,
Do you want to continue to install SUNWcorpc?y (Press Enter)
Caution:
Install the OSI Core Stack Configuration Files package of SUNWcosib before other
packages are installed.

6-4

HUAWEI CG9812
After all the packages are installed, the installer gives prompts again.
1 SUNWcorpc

(sparc) 9.0
2 SUNWcosiA

(sparc) 9.0
3 SUNWcosia

(sparc) 9.0
4 SUNWcosib

(sparc) 9.0
5 SUNWcosic

(sparc) 9.0
6 SUNWcosid

(sparc) 9.0
7 SUNWcosip

(sparc) 9.0
8 SUNWlicsw
9 SUNWlit
(sparc) 6.1
(sparc) 4.1
10 SUNWosiax

(sparc) 9.0

The installer prompts the message below.

11 SUNWosicx

(sparc) 9.0
12 SUNWosidx

(sparc) 9.0
Select the package you want to execute (or select all to execute all packages).
Enter q to exit.
3)
Install the License manager
#./lit_tty
The license installation interface prompts the message below:
Select Product
[x] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC

6-5

HUAWEI CG9812

[ ] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC

** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page
Select Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC, and then the information below is
displayed:
Solstice OSI (Stack)

9.0 for SPARC
Servers: [x] 1 [ ] 3 [ ] 5
SERVER NAME
HOSTID
1: igwb2
80c7dff7
(+1) 800-872-4786
Rights to Use:1
Data Checksum: d5
Select Product
[ ] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC

** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page

4)
Install the OSI patches
#pachadd 111344-01
6-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Check installed patches...
111344-01 is the patch of Solstice OSI 9.0.

5)
6)
Check whether the OSI protocol stack is successfully installed.
#ps -ef | grep osi

If the /usr/sbin/osinetd process is displayed, the OSI protocol stack is successfully
installed.
II. Install the FTAM

1)
Mount the CD-ROM
Insert the FTAM protocol stack CD into the CD-ROM. If the Volume Manager is
installed, the CD-ROM is automatically mounted to the /cdrom/osi_9_0 file system. To
check whether Volume Manager is installed, run the ps -ef | grep vold command.
Usually, Solaris is installed with the Volume Manager, if not, mount it manually with the
commands below:
#mkdir /cdrom/ftam_9_0
#mount -rF hsfs /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s0/cdrom/ftam_9_0
2)
Open the /cdrom/ftam_9_0 directory and install the FTAM package.
#cd /cdrom/ftam_9_0
#pkgadd -d .
The installer shows the prompt below.
1 SUNWftabx

(sparcv9) 9.0
2 SUNWftama

(sparc) 9.0
3 SUNWftamb

(sparc) 9.0
4 SUNWftamp

(sparc) 9.0
5 SUNWlicsw

(sparc) 6.1
6 SUNWlit

(sparc) 4.1
7 SUNWrk6

(sparc) 1.1
8 SUNWrk6x

(sparc) 1.1

6-7

HUAWEI CG9812
In this step, if the OSI protocol stack is installed, select packages 16 only and do not
install the RFC1006 packages, including SUNWrk6 and SUNWrk6x. Otherwise, press
Enter to install all the packages. Then, enter y if prompted. For example,
Do you want to continue to install SUNWftabx? Y <Enter>
After the packages are installed, the prompt is displayed again:

1 SUNWftabx

(sparcv9) 9.0
2 SUNWftama

(sparc) 9.0
3 SUNWftamb

(sparc) 9.0
4 SUNWftamp

(sparc) 9.0
5 SUNWlicsw

(sparc) 6.1
6 SUNWlit

(sparc) 4.1
7 SUNWrk6

(sparc) 1.1
8 SUNWrk6x

(sparc) 1.1
Enter q to exit.
3)
Install the License manager.
#./lit_tty
The installer shows the following information.
Select Product
[ ] Solstice OSI (Stack) 9.0 for SPARC

[x] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC

6-8

HUAWEI CG9812

** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page
Select Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC and the message below is displayed:
Solstice FTAM
9.0 for SPARC
Servers: [x] 1 [ ] 3 [ ] 5
SERVER NAME
HOSTID
1: igwb2
80c7dff7
(+1) 800-872-4786
Rights to Use:1
Data Checksum: d5
Select Product

[*] Solstice FTAM 9.0 for SPARC

** n=Next Page
p=Previous Page

4)
Restart the computer.
5)
Check whether the FTAM is successfully installed.
Use the command below to check whether FTAM is successfully installed.

#ps -ef | grep osi

6-9

HUAWEI CG9812
If the OSI protocol stack is installed, the four processes osinetd, osiftamd, osiftrd -164,
and osiftrd -264 are displayed.
If the RFC1006 protocol stack is installed, the three processes osiftamd, osiftrd -164,
and osiftrd -264 are displayed. Also, check whether the rk6d process is running by
using the ps -ef | grep rk6d command.
6.3.4 Configuring Parameters

I. Related parameters
1)
NSAP
The NSAP represents the network service access point. The FTAM client (Initiator)
finds the FTAM server (Responder) through the NSAP and set up connection with the
server.
The NSAP consists of five parts. See Figure 6-1
AFI
IDI
SI
PA
NSEL
Figure 6-1 NSAP formats

AFI: Authority and Format Identifier (2 bytes)
IDI: Initial Domain Identifier (to be defined)
SI: Subnetwork Identifier
PA: Point of Attachment
NSEL: Network Selector (1 byte)
The NSAP has multiple configuration formats, and the nbs format is frequently used.
In the format, AFI is set to 49, IDI is null, SI+PA is a hexadecimal digit with 15 bytes
(like hostid), and NSEL is 01.
For example, the NSAP is 491234567801.
2)
T-SELECTOR, P-SELECTOR, and S-SELECTOR represent the selectors of the

transmission layer, presentation layer and session layer respectively.
T-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 32 bytes.
P-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex, with up to 4 bytes.
S-SELECTOR can be ASCII or hex with up to 16 bytes.
3)
Partner
The FTAM runs in Initiator/Responder mode. To initiate the connection with the
Responder, the Initiators must know the parameters like NSAP of Responder. Typically,
a Partner is used to represent the FTAM Responder.

6-10

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Set the OSI parameters.

For most network systems, you can use the default values for the parameters of
Solstice OSI protocol stack. To check or modify the parameters, start the GUI tool
/opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool.
Start ositool with the command below:
# /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin/ositool
Figure 6-2 shows the graphical interface after the tool is started.
Figure 6-2 Configure OSI parameters

With this tool, you can set the parameters for Stack Manager, Network Layer Address,
Router Manager, and ES-IS Configuration (End System). Do not modify these
parameters.
The OSI uses the ES-IS protocol so that the subnets that interconnect can invoke and
update network addresses through the broadcast messages.
III. Configure Solstice FTAM parameters

1)
Set up a Partner for the FTAM peer.
#./osiftam
osiftam>rdb add entry1 -n H4980ed0f2d01 -p Cftr -s CPtr -t CFTAM -z 1
z
-n is followed by the NSAP of the FTAM peer entry1, H indicates the NSAP format
is hexadecimal, and 80ed0f2d is the hostid of FTAM peer.
-p is followed by P-SELECTOR, and C indicates the P-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely ftr in this example.
6-11

HUAWEI CG9812
z
-s is followed by S-SELECTOR, and C indicates the S-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely Ptr in this example.
-p is followed by T-SELECTOR, and C indicates the T-SELECTOR is in text

format, namely FTAM in this example.
-z is followed by the underlying protocol type. 0 indicates the Connection Oriented

Network Service (CONS), for example, x.25; 1 indicates the Connectionless
Network Protocol (CLNP) network, for example, Ethernet and FDDI; 2 indicates
the RFC 1006, namely TCP/IP. If the OSI protocol stack is installed, select 1 or 2;
if the RFC 1006 protocol stack is installed, select 2. Figure 6-3 shows the process
of network addressing.
SNPASubnetworkPoint of Attachment
Figure 6-3 Selector and network addressing

2)
Check whether the peer end is accessible.
#cd /opt/SUNWconn/osinet/bin
#./osi_ping -n 4980ed0f2d01
If the peer end is accessible, 4980ed0f2d01 is alive is displayed. 4980ed0f2d01 is the
NSAP of the FTAM peer. Make sure the computer where 4980ed0f2d01 is located is
started and FTAM is running normally when you run the command.
3)
Test whether a Partner is available.

6-12

HUAWEI CG9812
#./osiftam
osiftam>open entry1 -n username -p password
If login is successful, osiftam prompts the information below.

connection established
recovery available
Here,
z
entry1 is the FTAM Partner name.
-n is followed by the user name.
-p is followed by the login password.
After login is successful, you can use the commands like dir, get, and put to test
whether you can interact with the FTAM Partner. For usage of the commands, refer to
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands.
Note:
Solstice FTAM 9.0 provides you with a graphical tool, ftamtool, to configure the FTAM
parameters. The functions provided by this tool are the same as those of the rdb
command in osiftam. The user usually logs in to a UNIX workstation by Telnet to set
the parameters, and the ftamtool is not always usable, so the ftamtool usage is not
introduced in this section.
6.3.5 Introduction to Solstice FTAM 9.0 Commands

1)
Set up a FTAM connection.
#/opt/SUNWconn/ftam/bin/osiftam
osiftam>open entry -n username -p password
In this command, entry is the FTAM Partner name created with the rdb add
command.
2)
List the remote directories
osiftam>dir remotedir
Note:
executed.

6-13

HUAWEI CG9812
3)
Get a file from the remote end
osiftam>get remotefile localfile
Note:
executed.
4)
Display the existing FTAM Partners
osiftam>rdb list
Note:
Do not connect with any Partner if this command is executed.
5)
Modify the parameters of a Partner
osiftam>rdb change entry -p CFTR

then, the entry of P-SELECTOR is changed into FTR.
6)
Display the detailed parameters of a Partner
osiftam>rdb show entry

6-14

HUAWEI CG9812

This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 server, including:
z
Installing Server Software
Upgrading Server
Rolling Back to Last Version
Note:
For parameter configuration, refer to Part III Parameter Configuration and System
Commissioning.

Typically, the CG9812 delivered to the site has finished the installation steps before
and including Chapter 5 Installing HA System Software.
Check the following contents before installation.
7.2.1 Checking Hardware Connections

To check if all the hardware cables are properly connected, refer to 2.4 Hardware
Connections.
7.2.2 Checking System Software Installation
Note:
This section applies to the first installation of the server software. For upgrade
operations, skip this step.
I. Check if Solaris 8 can be properly started

If you can log in by TC or Telnet, it indicates that Solaris 8 is properly started.

7-1

HUAWEI CG9812
1)
After Solaris is started, you can log in to the two hosts from the COM ports of
other terminals or the TC. For the DC TC, you can telnet (TCP/IP) and then select
7002 port to log in to igwb1 and select 7003 port to log in to igwb2. Note that the
default IP of the TC is set to 192.168.160.10.
2)
After Solaris is started, you can log in as root by FTP or Telnet. You can log in to
the hosts by Telnet. The default IP addresses are set in the /etc/hosts file. For
details, see Figure 7-1.
129.1.1.1 igwb1
129.1.1.2 igwb11
129.1.1.3 igwb12
igwb1 default IP address
129.1.1.2 igwb2
129.2.1.2 igwb21
129.2.1.3 igwb22
igwb2 default IP
129.1.1.3 ha-igwb
129.2.1.3 ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3 ha-igwb2
CG9812 default floating IP
Figure 7-1 The /etc/hosts file on igwb1

For details about the /etc/hosts file, refer to 4.4.1 Configuring the /etc/hosts Files.
In Figure 7-1, the three different lines indicate the interrelations between the local IPs
and the floating IPs. For example, the local IPs 129.1.1.1 and 129.1.1.2 correspond to
the floating IP 129.1.1.3.
Table 7-1 Description for the /etc/hosts file
IP address
Logical host
127.0.0.1
localhost
129.1.1.1
igwb1
Description
Remarks
Local IP of qfe0 for
IP factory default
maintenance purpose.
for igwb1

7-2

HUAWEI CG9812
IP address
Logical host
Description
Remarks
Local IP of qfe1. qfe1 and qfe2

129.2.1.1
igwb11
are
mutually
backed
up,
sharing the same floating IP.

129.3.1.1
igwb12
129.1.1.2
igwb2
129.2.1.2
Local IP of qfe3
Local IP of qfe0 for
maintenance purpose.
igwb21
Local IP of qfe1. qfe1 and qfe2
IP factory default
are
for igwb2.
mutually
backed
up,
sharing the same floating IP.

129.3.1.2
129.1.1.3
igwb22
ha-igwb
Local IP of qfe3.
The floating IP of qfe0. It is
The three IP
used to connect the NMS and
addresses are
the maintenance console.
external floating IP
Local IP of qfe1. qfe1and qfe2

129.2.1.3
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb1
ha-igwb2
are mutually backed up,

sharing the same floating IP to
factory defaults.
Note: The three
floating IPs are the
connect with SGSN or GGSN.
same for igwb1
The floating IP of qfge3. It is
are enabled when
used to connect with the billing
the SCs are
center
started.
and igwb2. They
II. Check if the two nodes can be switched over each other
For SUN Cluster3.0, to check whether the primary node and the secondary node can
be switched over each other, follow the steps below.
1)
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2, run scstat | more to view the SC information. You may
get the information below:
--Cluster Nodes -Node name

--------Cluster node:
Status
------
igwb1
Online (online indictes that igwb1 is a
igwb2
Online (online indictes that igwb2 is a
cluster member)
Cluster node:
cluster member)
2)
Make sure that both igwb1and igwb2 are cluster members.

7-3

HUAWEI CG9812
3)
You can only access the disk arrays on igwb1 or igwb2. Make sure the attached
directories for the disk arrays are correct.
Log in to igwb1 or igwb2 through the TC or by Telnet, and run df -k command to view
the output information. Only on one of the two hosts, you can check the volume of the
disk array, including /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, /var/other, and /ha-igwb.
4)
Run the command below on the host where you can view the volume of the disk
array:
#scswitch -S -h xxx (xxx for local node, such as igwb1)

Then, check the volume again. Now, you can only view the information on the other
node.
7.2.3 Installation Prerequisites

I. Make sure you have the right software version on hand.
II. Modify the IP addresses of igwb1 and igwb2
You can reset the IP addresses in the /etc/hosts files. Restart the computer after you
finish.
Caution:
z
After you modify the hosts files, make sure you also modify the iP addresses set in
the igwb.ini files. Otherwise, the CG9812 server cannot be started. The default
installation path for igwb.ini is /opt/igwb/config/ini.
For
details
on
parameter
configurations,
refer
to
Part
III.
Parameter
Configurations.
You can modify the /etc/hosts on igwb1 and igwb2 to reset the IP addresses.
1)
For the floating IP addresses, modify them based on your actual configurations. If
the floating IP addresses are not in the same network segment, change the
subnet masks for igwb1 and igwb2 in the /etc/netmasks files. Restart the hosts
to enable the settings.
2)
The maintenance IP addresses of igwb1 (129.1.1.1 by default) and igwb2

(129.1.1.2 by default) shall be set in the same network segment with the first
external floating IP (129.1.1.3 by default).
3)
For other IP factory defaults of igwb1 and igwb2, if they are not in conflict with the
IP addresses configured in the current LAN, keep the factory defaults. Record if
an IP address needs to be modified.

7-4

HUAWEI CG9812
4)
qfe1 and qfe2 are mutually backed up, sharing the same floating IP. If qfe1 is
disabled, qfe2 is enabled; if qfe2 is disabled, qfe1 is enabled.
III. IP address configuration instance

The configuration instance is given below. Table 7-2 shows the onsite service floating
IP addresses.
Table 7-2 Onsite service floating IP planning
Network
Default
Onsite
adapter
floating IP
floating IP
Function
Remarks
Connect with the

qfe0
129.1.1.3
10.11.5.30
NMS and the

maintenance
console
qfe1
qfe3
1)
129.2.1.3
129.3.1.3
202.11.6.20
5.16.17.18
Connect with
SGSN or GGSN
Connect with the
billing center
Use the related network

ports for multiple
access points.
-
IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb1:
129.1.1.1
igwb1
(This IP is for maintenance purpose. It can be changed into 10.11.5.1, which is in the sanme
network segment with 10.11.5.30.)

129.1.1.2
igwb11
129.1.1.3
igwb12
129.1.1.2
igwb2

129.2.1.2
igwb21
129.2.1.3
igwb22
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
(Change it into 10.11.5.30.)
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb3

7-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
The last three IP addresses are the external service floating IP addresses set by
default. They are configured with same values on igwb1 and igwb2. The floating IP
addresses will not be enabled untill the SC is started.

2)
IP addresses configured in /etc/hosts on igwb2
129.1.1.2
igwb2

129.2.1.2
igwb21
129.2.1.3
igwb22
129.1.1.2
igwb1

129.1.1.2
igwb11
129.1.1.3
igwb12
129.1.1.3
ha-igwb
129.2.1.3
ha-igwb1
129.3.1.3
ha-igwb2
7.2.4 Key Terminologies You Need to Know

Before installation, you need to know the following key terminologies:
I. Consolidation
Two or more partial bills are created when the GSN process a PDP call. Consolidation
is to consolidate these partial bills into one or more bills.
II. Sort
Sort the bills on the back disk. Two or more bill formats may be included in a bill
package. Currently, bills can be sorted based on the conditions below:
z
For R98 770, this bill format is compatible with R98 760 and can be only sorted by
RecordType.
For R99 3a0, it is compatible with R99 390 and R99 360, and can be sorted by
RecordType and ChargingCharacteristics.
For R4 440, it can be sorted by RecordType and ChargingCharacteristics.

7-6

HUAWEI CG9812
For RecordType, bills can be sorted by S-CDR, G-CDR, M-CDR, SMO-CDR, or
SMT-CDR.
For ChargingCharacteristics, bills can be sorted by Hot billing, Flat rate, Prepaid
service, or Normal billing
III. Bill protocol versions

The bill protocol versions include R98, R99, and R4.
7.3 Installing Server Software

1)
Copy the server software installation files igwb_install.tar.gz, igwb_install.sh,

S99CGCfgMonitor, and sc30_script.tar to a specific directory on the
workstation or the client, and then transfer these files to the specific directory on
igwb1 and igwb2 by FTP. For FTP transfer modes and transfer destination paths,
see Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Transfer installation files

Installation file
FTP transfer mode
FTP destination path
igwb_install.tar.gz
Binary
sc30_script.tar
Binary
The /opt directory on igwb1 and
igwb_install.sh
ASCII
igwb2
igwb_rollback.sh
ASCII
S99CGCfgMonito
ASCII
The
/etc/rc3.d
directory
on
igwb1 and gwb2
2)
Log on to igwb1 as root. The root password is set to be root by default.
3)
Go to the /etc/rc3.d directory and execute the commands below:
# cd/etc/rc3.d
# chmod 755 S99CGCfgMonitor
4)
Go to the /opt directory and run the command below to begin the setup process.
# cd /opt
The following information is displayed. Select the bill protocol version:
1) --- R98 V7.7.0
2) --- R99 V3.a.0
3) --- R4 V4.4.0

7-7

HUAWEI CG9812

Select the installed version , Consolidation or not , <y/n>:
Select sort type:

1) --- Without Distinguishment
2) --- Distinguishment by record-type
3) --- Distinguishment by ChargingCharacteristics
Please select from the Distinguishment menu:
Then, continue the setup process.

When the installation is finished, you will get the following message:
5)
Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory. Open and configure the igwb.ini file

with the vi tool.
#vi igwb.ini
Note:
For parameter configurations in igwb.ini, refer to Chapter 3. Save the igwb.ini file
after you finish. Close the vi program.
6)
7)
Repeat the above step 1) 5) on igwb2.

Run the commands below on igwb1 or igwb2 to add the igwbapp service to the
SC.
#cd /opt
#tar xvf sc30_script.tar
#cd /opt/hwigwb/util
#ksh ./register.ksh
8)
Run the commands below on igwb1 or igwb2 to start the igwbapp service and
run the related program.

7-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
Make sure no files or directories are under /var/frontsave, /var/backsave, and
/var/other.
9)
Then, run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to backup the version of the
server application:
# cd /opt
Then the following information will appear:
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback
Select 1 to back up the software version. Backup is finished if the information below is
displayed:
Backup complete !
7.4 Upgrading Server

7.4.1 General Upgrade
To perform a general upgrade, follow the steps below. During the process, services will
not be interrupted, except the switchover interval.
1)
Log in to igwb1 and igwb2 by Telnet.
2)
Run the commands below to back up the product version on igwb1 and igwb2.
# cd /opt
# sh /igwb_rollback.sh
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback

displayed.
Backup complete !

7-9

HUAWEI CG9812
3)
Run the commands below to back up igwb.ini on igwb1 and igwb2.
# cp /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak
4)

5)
Run the command below to check the resources are controlled by igwb1 or
igwb2.
# ps -ef |grep proc

6)
Check if the processes are started, including cls_proc, om_proc, knl_proc, and
ap_proc.
7)
If the above processes are started, then the related node controls the resources
and is activated to provide the application services.
8)
Suppose igwb1 controls the resources. On igwb2, perform the operations below:
Go to the /opt directory and install the server software:
# cd /opt
z
Select the language:
The following information is displayed. Enter c for Chinese, and enter e for English.
Select the language to be installed (Chinese or English), <c/e>:

z
Select the bill protocol version:
1) --- R98 V7.7.0

2) --- R99 V3.a.0
3) --- R4 V4.4.0

z
Decide if bill consolidation is supported:

Select the installed version , Consolidation or not , <y/n>:
z
Select sort type
1) --- Without Distinguishment

2) --- Distinguishment by record-type
3) --- Distinguishment by ChargingCharacteristics
Select the proper type.

z

7-10

HUAWEI CG9812
9)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 or the client to switch the server from
the primary node to the secondary node
# scswitch -S -h xxx (xxx for source node, such as igwb1)

10) After a few minutes, check if the processes runs properly on the upgraded node
(igwb2).
11) Run the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb2. You may see the similar
information displayed below:
root 2188 2182 0 09:27:33 ?
0:01 ./cls_proc
root 2195 2188 0 09:27:34 ?
0:02 knl_proc
root 2196 2195 0 09:27:35 ?
0:01 ./om_proc
root 2197 2195 1 09:27:35 ?
11:30 ./ap_proc 1
Note:
If the installation is successful, go on with the steps below. If not, stop the upgrade
process, and then ask for technical support. If the problem cannot be solved, make
sure to roll back to the last version. For details, refer to7.4.1
General Upgrade.
Repeat steps8) to upgrade igwb1
12) Run the commands below to back up the product version on igwb1 and igwb2.
# cd /opt
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback
Please enter the number of the operation from the menu:

displayed.
Backup complete !
7.4.2 Special Upgrade

Follow the steps below to perform a special upgrade. Note that the services can be
interrupted during the upgrade process.
1)
Run the auxiliary upgrade command on the client.

7-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
z
For auxiliary upgrade on the client, refer to Part IV. You can continue the upgrade
process only if the auxiliary upgrade is executed successfully.
For upgrade installation, if the version type is changed, you need to rest the
igwb.ini file.
2)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to stop the igwbapp service and
# scswitch
-n -j
igwbapp
Caution:
The following steps 3)7) must be performed on igwb1 and igwb2, and only if these
steps are finished, you can continue the upgrade process.
3)
Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to back up the igwb.ini file.
# cp igwb.ini /opt/igwb.bak
Caution:
You may need to reset igwb.ini.
4)

5)
# cd
Run the commands below to install the software.

/opt
# sh ./ igwb_install.sh
6)
Select the options as required if prompted. If different options are selected in

pre-installation, make sure you reset the igwb.ini file and ignore step 6.
7)
Go to the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory to restore the igwb.ini file you back up.

7-12

HUAWEI CG9812
# cp /opt/igwb.bak
8)
igwb.ini
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb2 to start the igwbapp service.
# scswitch
-e
-j
igwbapp
After a few minutes, check if the processes run properly on the upgraded node. Run
the ps -ef | grep _proc command on igwb1 and igwb2. You may see the similar
information below is only displayed on one node.
root 2188 2182 0 09:27:33 ?
0:01 ./cls_proc
root 2195 2188 0 09:27:34 ?
0:02 knl_proc
root 2196 2195 0 09:27:35 ?
0:01 ./om_proc
root 2197 2195 1 09:27:35 ?
11:30 ./ap_proc 1
7.5 Rolling Back to Last Version

Rollback is needed if update fails. Follows the steps below to perform the rollback
operation. Note that you can roll back only to the version before this upgrade.
1)
Run the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to stop the igwbapp and the related
application:
#scswitch
2)
-n
-j
igwbapp
Run the commands below on igwb1 and igwb2 to roll back the last version:
# cd /opt
0) Exit
exit the script
1) Backup
version backup
2) Rollback
version rollback
Select 2 to roll back the version. The information below is displayed:

Are you sure to roll back the version (yes or no), [y/n]:
Enter y. Rollback is complete if the following information is displayed.

Roll back now. Please wait ...
Roll back complete. Please make certain that igwb.ini is correct.
3)
un the command below on igwb1 or igwb1 to start the igwbapp service and the
#scswitch
-e
-j
igwbapp

7-13

HUAWEI CG9812

This chapter introduces how to install the CG9812 client, including:
z
Installing Client Software
Upgrading Client
Checking Client Software
8.2 Installing Client Software

1)
Copy the Client setup directory in the installation CD to a directory on the client.
Double-click \Client\SETUP.EXE. The Choose Setup Language dialog box is
Figure 8-1 Choose Setup Language interface

2)
Select your desired language, and then click OK. Then, the Welcome dialog box
is displayed. See Figure 8-2.

8-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-2 Welcome interface

3)
Click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed. See
Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 Software License Agreement interface

8-2

HUAWEI CG9812
4)
Click Yes to accept all the terms in the agreement. The User Information dialog
box is displayed. See Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 User Information interface

5)
Enter the user name and company, and then click Next. The Select Program
Folder dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-5.

8-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-5 Select Program Folder interface

6)
Click Next. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed. See
Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6 Choose Destination Location interface

8-4

HUAWEI CG9812
7)
To change the destination installation directory, click Browse to select your

desired directory. It is recommended to use the default directory. Click Next to
continue. The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed. In the box, your
settings are displayed. See Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Start Copying Files interface

8)
Click Next to copy files. Then, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed. See
Figure 8-8.

8-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-8 Setup Complete interface

9)
Click Finish. The CG9812 client is installed.
8.3 Upgrading Client

1)
Before upgrade, check the OS in use.
For Windows XP, back up the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file.
For Windows 2000, back up the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.
2)
Select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client/Uninstall System. The

Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed.
3)
Click Yes. The Remove Programs From Your Computer dialog box is

8-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Figure 8-9 Remove Programs From Your Computer

4)
Then, the following dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10 Uninstall complete

8-7

HUAWEI CG9812
5)
Click OK to finish the uninstall process.
6)
Reinstall the client as described in 8.2 Installing Client Software.
7)
Overwrite the uiconfig.ini file in the system directory with the backup one.
For Windows XP, overwrite the C:\windows\uiconfig.ini file.
For Windows 2000, overwrite the C:\winnt\uiconfig.ini file.
The client is successfully upgraded.
8.4 Checking Client Software

To check if all the components are installed, follow the steps below:
In Windows 2000 or Windows XP, select Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client
to show the client components.
The client software includes the following components:
z
Help
iGWB Client
Uninstall System

8-8
HUAWEI
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Part III Parameter Configuration

and System Commissioning
User Manual Part III Parameter Configuration and System Commissioning

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Parameter Configuration............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console ............................................................. 1-1
1.2 Common Operations.......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.1 Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console ..................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 Locking System ....................................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.3 Adding Login ........................................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.4 Logging out Office ................................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.5 Changing Password .............................................................................................. 1-11
1.2.6 Closing Parameter Configuration Console............................................................ 1-11
1.2.7 Viewing igwb.ini Parameter File ............................................................................ 1-12
1.2.8 Adding Parameter Sections .................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.9 Deleting Parameter Sections ................................................................................ 1-15
1.2.10 Adding Parameters ............................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.11 Deleting Parameters ........................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.12 Modifying Parameter Value................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.13 Comparing Parameters of Different Offices ........................................................ 1-19
1.2.14 Saving the Configuration..................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.15 Loading the Parameter Configuration File .......................................................... 1-20
1.2.16 Obtaining the Configuration Information ............................................................. 1-20
1.2.17 Customized Setting ............................................................................................. 1-21
1.3 Configuring the igwb.ini File............................................................................................. 1-22
1.3.1 Common Parameters ............................................................................................ 1-23
1.3.2 Cluster Parameters ............................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.3 Access Point Parameters...................................................................................... 1-24
1.3.4 MML Server Parameters ....................................................................................... 1-26
1.3.5 Log Parameters..................................................................................................... 1-28
1.3.6 Disk and File Control Parameters ......................................................................... 1-28
1.3.7 Network Backup Parameters ................................................................................ 1-29
1.4 CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance................................................................. 1-31
1.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................. 1-31
1.4.2 Configuration of IP Addresses of Network Adapters............................................. 1-32
1.4.3 Content of the igwb.ini Configuration Files ........................................................... 1-34
1.5 Port Usage ....................................................................................................................... 1-37
1.6 Modifying Client Settings ................................................................................................. 1-38
1.7 Network Backup Configuration Instance ......................................................................... 1-39
1.7.1 Network Backup Instance ..................................................................................... 1-39
1.7.2 Simplest Backup Configuration ............................................................................. 1-41

i

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
1.7.3 Configuring Two Backup Tasks ............................................................................ 1-42

1.7.4 Configuring Two Backup Tasks with Different User Names and Passwords ....... 1-42
1.7.5 Configuring Defaulted Backup Mode .................................................................... 1-43
1.7.6 Configuring Backup Time List ............................................................................... 1-44
1.7.7 Configuring the Backup Start Time and End Time................................................ 1-45
1.7.8 Configuring One-off Backup List ........................................................................... 1-46
1.7.9 Configuring the Last File Backup .......................................................................... 1-46
1.7.10 Configuring the Deletion of Source File after Backup ......................................... 1-47
1.7.11 Configuring the Deletion of the Second Bill Copy without Date Directory after
Backup ........................................................................................................................... 1-48
1.7.12 Configuring the Save Days for Files under the Destination Path........................ 1-49
1.7.13 Configuring Connection Retry Times When Backup Fails.................................. 1-49
1.7.14 Configuring the Source Backup Path for Status Files......................................... 1-50
1.7.15 Backup Precautions ............................................................................................ 1-51
Chapter 2 System Running .......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Program Startup on the CG9812 Server ........................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Program Close at the CG9812 Server............................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Running Status of the CG9812 Client ............................................................................... 2-2
Chapter 3 System Commissioning .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain ............................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 CG9812 and GSN ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2 CG9812 and Billing Center ..................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 CG9812 and NMS................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 CG9812 and Other Devices............................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.1 CG9812 Receives CDRs ........................................................................................ 3-3
3.3.2 Billing Center Collects CDRs .................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.3 Connectivity Between NMS and CG9812 ............................................................... 3-3

ii

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Chapter 1 Parameter Configuration

After installing the CG9812 server and client, you must configure CG9812 system
parameters.
This chapter introduces how to configure system parameters and provide configuration
examples through the following topics:
z
Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console
Common Operations
Configuring the igwb.ini
CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance
Port Usage
Modifying Client Settings
Network Backup Configuration Instance
1.1 Introduction to Parameter Configuration Console

On the parameter configuration console, you can modify and maintain the igwb.ini file
(stored in the /opt/igwb/config/ini directory of the CG9812 server) of the
active/standby server remotely. In addition, you can compare the system parameters
between different office directions.
The parameter configuration console is a graphic user interface (GUI), as shown in
Figure 1-1.

1-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
6
1.Main window
4.Navigation tree
2.Menu bar
5.Sub-window
3.Toolbar
6.Status bar
Figure 1-1 Interface of parameter configuration console
I. Main Window
The main window includes all elements, such as the topic, menu bar, navigation tree,
toolbar, and status bar.
II. Menu Bar

Menus are the entry to all functions and features of the parameter configuration
console. In terms of the functionality, the console sets the System, View, Tree Nodes,
Operation, and Help menus.
For details, see Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Menu bar
Menu
System
Sub-menu
Function
Relogin
To log out and log in as another user.
Addlogin
After logging in one office, log in to the

parameter configuration console of
another office. You can press F2 to do
this.
LogoutOffice:office
name
1's
Log out the parameter configuration

console from the login office. "Office 1"
is the office you first logged in.

1-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Menu
Sub-menu
Function
LogoutOffice:office 2's
name

console of the other office. When you
log in to the other office, the submenu
"LogoutOffice: disconnection" changes
into "LogoutOffice: office 2". Here,
"office 2" is the name of the other office
you have logged in.
Lock System
When you do not use the debugging

console, you can lock the system. You
can also do this by pressing F12.
Change Password
Change the config user password.
Exit
Exit the system.
View
info
View
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
parameter
config
View the parameter

information
configuration
ToolBar
Show/Hide the tool bar
StatusBar
Show/Hide the status bar.
Split Windows
Split the current window.
Shrink
Shrink the directory structure of the

navigation tree.
Expand
Expand the directory structure of the

navigation tree.
TreeNode
Operation
Office:
office 1's
name
Office:
office 2's
name
Save
the
current
config info
Save office1 configuration to the local

disk.
Save
the
current
config info
as

or other disks.
Load config
info
from
local file
Get office1parameter
from the local disk.
Get
the
current info
again
Get office1 parameter configuration

from the server again.
Get the last

config info
Get office1parameter configuration

submitted last time from the server.
Get
the
delivery
config info
Get the server delivery configuration

file from the server.
Save
the
current
config info

disk.

1-3
configuration

HUAWEI CG9812
Menu
Sub-menu
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Function
Save
the
current info
as

or other disks.
Load current
config info
from
local
file

from the local disk.
Get
the
current info
again

from the server again.
Get the last

config info

submitted last time from the server.
Get
the
delivery
config info
Get the server delivery configuration

file from the server.
Save All
Save all current parameter information.
Help Topics
Open the help system, and help topics

regarding the parameter configuration
console are displayed.
About ParaCfg
Display the version information of the

Help
III. Toolbar
The toolbar contains some shortcut icons for the frequently used menus shown in
Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Shortcut buttons of the parameter configuration console
Shortcut
Matched menu option
Function
Relogin
To log out and log in to as another user.
AddLogin
After logging in one office, log in to the

parameter configuration console of
another office. You can press F2 to do
this.
Save All
Save all current parameter information.
Logout 1

console from the login office. "Office 1" is
the office you first logged in.
Logout 2

console from the login office. "Office 2" is
the office you second logged in.

1-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Shortcut
Matched menu option
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Function
Lock System
When you do not use the debugging

console, you can lock the system. You
can also do this by pressing F12.
Expand
Expand all nodes under the igwb.ini

node.
Shrink
Collapse all nodes under the igwb.ini

node.
Exit
Exit the
console.
Help
Display the help information.
parameter
configuration
IV. Navigation Tree

The navigation tree shows the information of parameters in igwb.ini. The parameters
are arranged in different sections. The node in the first layer indicates the igwb.ini,
those in the second layer indicate parameter sections, and those in the third layer
indicate parameters, as shown in Figure 1-2.
File name
Parameter
section
Parameter
name
Figure 1-2 Structure of the navigation tree of the parameter configuration console
V. Sub-windows
Sub-windows include:

1-5

HUAWEI CG9812
z
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
The sub-window on the upper right corner: the sub-window displayed after you
select the parameter section in the navigation tree and showing the parameter
values under the selected node
The sub-window on the lower right corner: the sub-window displayed after you
select the parameter domain in the navigation tree and showing the details of the
selected parameter
VI. Status Bar

The status bar shows the IP address, network connection status, login user name,
current parameter section of the CG9812 server connected with the parameter
configuration console.
1.2 Common Operations

On the GUI parameter configuration console, you can add, delete, or modify the
parameter configuration file igwb.ini on the system server. The default setup folder of
igwb.ini is /opt/igwb/config/ini.
1.2.1 Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console

I. Task Description
Log in to the parameter configuration console and configure the igwb.ini file.
II. Prerequisite
The parameter configuration process cfg_proc.exe of the CG9812 server is started.
The default setup folder of cfg_proc.exe is /opt/igwb.

1-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
III. Operation Procedure

No.
Operation Description
Double-click
in the Bin directory of the CG9812 client, or choose
Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V200 Client > Parameter Configuration
to start the parameter configuration console. The User Login dialog is
displayed.
Click Office Management to display the Office Management dialog.
In the Office Management dialog, enter the office parameters, including

office name, IP address, and type. Click Set to add it to the list box. Click
Save to finish this operation. The system returns to the User login dialog.
3
Enter the correct user name and password. Select the office to be managed.
Click OK to log in to the parameter configuration console.
See Figure 1-1.

1-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
IV. Parameters Related to the User login Dialog

Parameter
Description
Example
User name
Mandatory. This is the user name that the operator

uses to log in to the CG9812 parameter
configuration console. The default value is the
system administrator admin.
admin
Password
Mandatory. The password of the operators

account. The initial password is null. The password
of the system administrator is at least eight digits,
with letters and numbers mixed. The password of a
common operator is at least six digits, with letters
and numbers mixed.
Office
Mandatory. This refers to the office name of the

CG9812 server that is maintained by the parameter
configuration console.
Shenzhen
IP address
Mandatory. For the parameter configuration

console, the office IP address can be configured to
the actual IP address of any network adapter on the
CG9812 server. When the CG9812 client and
server are installed on the same server, you can
configure the IP address to 127.0.0.1.
129.2.1.3
Gateway
Optional. The proxy function that the NMS

provides to the network elements.
Gateway IP
Optional. Configure the IP address if you use the

gateway.
129.2.1.15
V. Parameters Related to the Office Management Dialog

Parameter
Description
Example
Office
Mandatory. Office refers to the CG9812

server offices maintained by the CDR
console. Set an office before logging in to
the Client.
Beijing
IP
Mandatory.
For
the
parameter
configuration console, the office IP address
can be configured to the actual IP address
of any network adapter on the CG9812
server. When the CG9812 client and the
server are installed on the same server, you
can configure the IP address to 127.0.0.1.
129.2.1.3
Type
Mandatory. Select the office type to be

added.
iGWB

1-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
1.2.2 Locking System

I. Task Description
Lock the parameter configuration console to avoid unauthorized operations.
II. Prerequisite
None.

No.
On the main interface, choose System > Lock System, or click
toolbar, or press F2.
in the
Then, the Lock System dialog is displayed.
If you want to return to the current system, enter the original password in the
Lock System dialog and click OK.
If you want to log in to the system again, click Relogin in the Lock System
dialog and click OK in the popup confirmation dialog.
1.2.3 Adding Login

I. Task Description
Log in to the parameter configuration consoles of two different offices at the same time
to compare their parameter information.
II. Prerequisite
You log in to the parameter configuration console of office 1. Before logging in to the
parameter configuration console of another office, you must configure another office.

1-9

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration

No.
On the main interface, choose System > AddLogin, or click
toolbar.
on the
The Add Login dialog is displayed.
Enter the correct user name and password, select the office to be managed,
and click OK.
Then, you can log in to the parameter configuration console of the other
office.
1.2.4 Logging out Office

I. Task Description
Log out the office.
II. Prerequisite
None.

No.
On the main interface, choose System > LogoutOffice: office name, or
click
and
. The system asks you whether to log out. Here,
indicates the office you first log in, and

you log in later.
indicates to log out the office
After confirmation, the system will close all windows of the current office.
1-10

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
1.2.5 Changing Password

I. Task Description
Log in the parameter configuration console to change the password.
II. Prerequisite
Log in as admin or the config operator.

No.
On the main interface, choose System > Change Password and the
Password dialog is displayed.
Enter a new password in New Password and Confirm Password. Click OK.
Note:
You can only change the config password of the current office.
1.2.6 Closing Parameter Configuration Console

I. Task Description
Close the parameter configuration console after you finish the operation tasks.
II. Prerequisite
None.

1-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration

No.
On the main interface, choose System > Exit, or click

displayed, asking you for confirmation.
Click Yes, and you can exit the console at once.
. A dialog is
1.2.7 Viewing igwb.ini Parameter File

I. Task Description
View the igwb.ini parameter configuration on the CG9812 server in real time.
II. Prerequisite
None.

No.
On the main interface, choose View > Realtime Browse Parameter

Configuration Information.

1-12

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Select different parameters on the left navigation tree.
Then, the current configuration is displayed on the right view window in real
time.
The upper right pane is open when you select a corresponding parameter
section on the left navigation tree. This pane displays the value information
for the parameter under the selected node on the tree.
The lower-right pane is open when you select a parameter domain on the left
navigation tree. This lower pane displays the details of the selected current
parameter for your reference.
Note:
For the details of the igwb.ini parameter configurtion, see section 1.3 Configuring the
igwb.ini File. For more detailed parameter information, see Parameter Configuration
Console > Parameter Configuration Management > Browse igwb.ini Parameter of
the help system.
1.2.8 Adding Parameter Sections

I. Task Description
Add new parameter sections to igwb.ini.

1-13

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
II. Prerequisite

No.
On the main interface, right-click the igwb.ini node or a node in the second
layer. Select Add Section.
The Add Section dialog is displayed.
Select the parameter section you want to add, and click OK. After
confirmation, the added parameter section appears in the navigation tree as
a node.
For example, if the default configuration file igwb.ini has the parameter
section [BackupTask1], you need to add the parameter section
[BackupTask2] to configure two backup tasks

1-14

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Choose Operation > Office: office name > Save the Current Config Info.
The current parameter configuration is submitted to the server.
Note:
After modifying igwb.ini, you can restart the server by choosing Operation/Reset
iGWB on the CDR console or using the command # cd /opt/igwb and # ./killigwb.
You can validate the parameter setting by restarting the server process.
IV. Parameters Realted to the Add Section Dialog

Parameter
Description
AccessPoint
Access point parameter
AgentAlarm
Alarm related parameter
Alarm
Alarm related parameter
BackupTask
Backup related parameter
CdrStat
CDR statistic parameter
Channel-
Disk related parameter
DiskFile
Disk related parameter
Kernel
Kernel parameter
License
License related parameter
Link
Heartbeat link parameter
Log
Log related parameter
OM
O&M parameter
Perf
Performance related parameter
Resource
Dual-system resource parameter
1.2.9 Deleting Parameter Sections

I. Task Description
Delete parameter sections in igwb.ini.

1-15

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
II. Prerequisite

No.
On the main interface, right-click the igwb.ini node or a node in second layer.
Select Delete Section. In the popup dialog, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
2
3
The current parameter configuration information is submitted to the server.
Restart the CG9812 server to validate the deletion.
1.2.10 Adding Parameters

I. Task Description
Add parameters to igwb.ini.
II. Prerequisite

No.
On the main interface, right-click the node in second layer or in third layer.
Select Add Parameter.

1-16

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
The Add Parameter dialog is displayed.
Select the parameter you want to add, and click OK. After confirmation, the
added parameter appears in the navigation tree as a node.
For example, add the parameter AlarmBoxUsingMode under the parameter
section [Backup Task2].
3
4
Restart the CG9812 server to validate the addition.
1.2.11 Deleting Parameters

I. Task Description
Delete parameters in igwb.ini.
II. Prerequisite

No.
On the main interface, right-click the node in second layer or in third layer.
Select Delete Parameter. In the popup dialog, click Yes to confirm the
deletion. The selected parameter node is deleted.

1-17

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
2
3
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Restart the CG9812 server to validate the deletion.
1.2.12 Modifying Parameter Value

I. Task Description
Change the value of a parameter in igwb.ini.
II. Prerequisite

No.
On the main interface, select the parameter node in the third layer you want
to modify. The upper right sub-window shows the parameter values under
your selected node.
Double-click the parameter value, and you can select or edit the parameter
values of your login office, such as the ServerNo under Common. The right
lower sub-window displays the detailed description of this parameter.

1-18

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
4
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Restart the CG9812 server to validate the change.
Note:
The parameters in igwb.ini are very important and cannot be changed at will.
1.2.13 Comparing Parameters of Different Offices

I. Task Description
Compare the parameter configuration of two offices.
On the parameter configuration console, you can log in to two offices at the same time.
This helps to compare their parameter configurations for maintenance.
II. Prerequisite

No.
Log in to the parameter configuration console of the first office. Then, log in to
office 1.
See section 1.2.1 Logging in to Parameter Configuration Console.
Log in to the parameter configuration console of the second office. Then, log
in to office 2.
See section 1.2.3 Adding Login.
After login, the configuration of both offices is displayed in the sub-window at

the same time. The admin can compare the parameter information of
different offices.
1.2.14 Saving the Configuration

I. Task Description
Save the current configuration information.

1-19

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
II. Prerequisite

No.
On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > Save The
Current Config Info As.
In the popup dialog, select the path and file name, and click Save.
The current configuration information is saved to the local disk.
1.2.15 Loading the Parameter Configuration File

I. Task Description
To update the current configuration, you can load the configuration information from the
local disk or other storage media.
II. Prerequisite
None.

No.
On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > Load
Config Info From Local File.
Select a local file that you want to load.

The configuration information is obtained from the file.
1.2.16 Obtaining the Configuration Information

I. Task Description
Obtain the parameter configuration.
This task involves three topics:
z
Re-obtaining the current configuration file
Obtaining the configuration file of last operation
Obtaining the delivery configuration file

1-20

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
II. Prerequisite
None.

1)
Re-obtaining the current configuration file
No.
On the main interface, choose Operation > Office: office name > Get The
Current Config Info Again.
Obtain the configuration information from the server.
2)
Obtaining the configuration file of last operation
No.
Last Config Info.
Obtain the configuration information submitted last time from the server.
3)
Obtaining the delivery configuration file
No.
Base Config Info.
After confirmation, obtain the delivery configuration file igwb.ini from the
server.
1.2.17 Customized Setting

I. Task Description
Customize the interface display style of the parameter configuration console as
desired.
II. Prerequisite
None.

1-21

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration

No.
On the parameter configuration console, select View, and then
z
z
1
z
Select View Parameter Config Info to view parameter information.

Select ToolBar. If there is a check mark "" before the ToolBar option,
the toolbar is shown. Otherwise, it is hidden.
Select StatusBar. If there is a check mark "" before the StatusBar
option, the status bar is shown. Otherwise, it is hidden.
Select Split Window to split the display proportion of the navigation tree
on the left and the parameter display window on the right.
On the parameter configuration console, select Tree Nodes, and then

2
Select Shrink to collapse all nodes under the igwb.ini node.
Select Expand to expand all nodes under the igwb.ini node.
Note:
You can save common settings for next time use. In this case, you need not reset after
re-login.
1.3 Configuring the igwb.ini File

You need to configure the parameters after the primary/secondary CG9812 server
software is installed. The configuration file on the server is igwb.ini, and its default path
is /opt/igwb/config/ini. Go to the path and configure the igwb.ini file by using the
parameter configuration console or vi editor. Use the following commands:
#vi igwb.ini
When you install the server version, the application already configures most
parameters in this file by default, so you do not need to modify configurations usually.
The parameters that may need to be modified are as follows.
z
For the optional configuration item, you can use the default value without
modifications in general cases.
The mandatory configuration items must exist in the configuration file or must be
modified based on actual conditions.

1-22

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
1.3.1 Common Parameters

The [Common] section defines the common parameters for the various processes on
the CG9812 server.
Table 1-3 Configuration of common parameters
Configuration
item
Configuration description
Recommende
d value
APCount
Mandatory. The number of access points..

Each access point matches an access point
process on the CG9812 server, indicating the
access point process to which the host system
connecting to the CG9812 server is accessed.
Designed as a multi-access system, the
CG9812 allows simultaneous access by
multiple switching systems of the same product
or different products. Thus, in the real carrier
network, the GSN of WCDMA and the MSC of
GSM may access to the CG9812 at the same
time. For the fixed accesses of 3G and GPRS,
the APCount is 2.
ServerNO
Mandatory. Used to set the active (0) or

standby (1) state for the CG9812 server.
According to the installation requirement, the
server installed in the lower position of the rack
is the active one, while the one in the upper
position is the standby one.
ClusterMode
Mandatory. Indicating whether it is in the dual

system mode (1: Dual system, 0: single
system). To guarantee reliability, the dual
system mode is recommended.
Caution:
For the GSN, If multiple SGSNs or GGSNs access in the same process, APCount is 1
rather than the actual number of GSNs.This parameter usually uses the default value 1.
1.3.2 Cluster Parameters

The [Cluster] field is used to configure the information of the Sun Cluster and applicable
only on the Solaris platform.

1-23

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration

Table 1-4 Configuration of cluster parameters
Configuration
item
CLUSTVER
Recommended
value
Mandatory. Version number of Sun
Cluster.
3.0
Note:
The CG9812 HA system server consists two minicomputers of SUN Netra and the SCs.
The related parameters are already configured before delivery and should not be
modified.
1.3.3 Access Point Parameters

The [AccessPoint1] field defines the access point features.
Table 1-5 Configuration of access point parameters
Configuration
item
Recommended
value
APType
Mandatory. The type of the access point. You

must enter the parameter correctly. The
parameter value can be 0-128,1-MSC,2-STP,
3-PS, 5-SoftSwitch.
Use the default

value.
APName
Optional. The name of the access point. Any

string is allowed, but it is recommended to
name the access point based on the product
name. In multi-access, the APName cannot
be identical.
Release
Optional. The release number of 3GPP.

When APType is 3 (PacketSwitch), the
parameter is mandatory; otherwise, it is
optional. The supported releases are R98,
R99 and R4.

1-24
Use the default

installation
value.
Configure based
on actual
conditions.
Use the default
installation value
usually.

HUAWEI CG9812
Configuration
item
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Recommended
value
Use the default
installation value
usually.
FmtDll
Optional. The ASN.1 dynamic database used

by 3GPP. When APType is 3 (PacketSwitch),
this item is mandatory. You can select
r98_760, r98_770, r99_360, r99_3a0 and
r4_440.
SaveSecond
Optional. Indicates whether the CG9812

should save a copy for the final CDR files. (0:
Not needed; 1: Needed).
LocalIpToEx
Mandatory. The local IP for communication

between the access point and the switch.
When APType is 3 (PS), it indicates the IP
address where the access point is connected
with GSN. This IP address must be set
correctly, otherwise, starting the access point
process may fail. Do not modify this parameter
unless in some special cases.
LocalPortToEx
Optional. The local port number for

communication with the switch. When the
APType is 3 (PS), it refers to the UDP port
number used to connect to GSN, 3386 by
default. Do not modify this parameter unless in
some special cases.
3386
BackSavePatc
hName
Optional. It can be configured to

ASN1_NoLenIndicator to remove the prefix
information of the second copy stored in the
back disk.
FinalFileMaxSi
ze
Optional. The normal size of the original

CDR, which ranges from 3 MB to 20 MB, in
KBs. If the value is smaller than the minimum
value, use the minimum value. If the value is
greater than the maximum value, use the
maximum value instead. Do not modify this
parameter unless in some special cases.
1024
OrigFileMaxSiz
e
Optional. The maximum generation time of a

final CDR, which ranges from 5 to 3600, in
seconds. If the value is smaller than the
minimum value, use the minimum value, and if
the value is greater than the maximum value,
use the maximum value instead. Do not
modify this parameter unless in some special
cases.
3072

1-25
Configure based
on
actual
conditions.
1
The
default
value
is
129.2.1.3.
Configure based
on
actual
conditions.

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Configuration
item
Recommended
value
FinalFileMaxTi
me
Optional. The local IP for communication

between the access point and the switch.
When APType is 4 (WCDMA), it indicates the
IP address where the access point is
connected with GSN. This IP address must be
set correctly. Otherwise, starting the access
point process may fail. Do not modify this
parameter unless in some special cases.
1800
MustMerge
Optional. It indicates whether to merge the

CDRs, which is only valid in PS domain
products (0: Not need; 1: Need). This item is
determined based on the merge or not
option. If yes, MustMerge is 1. If no,
MustMerge is 0.
RedirAddress
Optional. It indicates the Redirection address.

The CG9812 with this IP address will be used
when the current CG9812 sends a
"Redirection Request" to the GSN. If this
parameter is configured as its default
"0.0.0.0", the CG9812 will not send the
redirection request to the GSN.
0.0.0.0
Note:
The IP address of LocalIpToEx should be the same as the IP address of ha-igwb1 in the
/etc/hosts file of igwb1 and igwb2. This IP address is the float IP address used to
connect with GSN.
For the configuration of the /etc/hosts file, see Part II System Installation.
1.3.4 MML Server Parameters

The [MML] field defines the network parameters for the communication between the
CG9812 server and client. Because the CG9812 server and the CG9812 client
communicate in MML mode, and the MML server of the CG9812 server works as the
TCP/IP server of the client, you need to configure the TCP/IP address and port number
of the MML server.

1-26

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Table 1-6 Configuration of MML server parameters

Configuration item
Recommended value
LocalIpToMMLClient
Mandatory. The IP address of

the MML server for connecting
with the MML client (namely, the
CG9812 client) locally. The IP
address is also the IP address
of the CG9812 for connecting
with the NMS.
Set it to the IP address

allocated to the client
during network planning.
MaxConnectUserNu
mber
Optional. It indicates the

maximum number of LMT to
connect with the CG9812.
10
PersistUser
Optional. The MML user

information file. Do not modify
this parameter unless in some
special cases.
/var/other/mml
LocalPortToCM
Optional. The maintenance

port of the MML client, which
should be 6000.
6000
LocalPortToAR
Optional. The alarming port of

the MML client, which should be
6001. Do not modify this
parameter unless in some
special cases.
6001
LocalPortToRD
Optional. The debugging port

of the MML client, which should
be 6007. Do not modify this
parameter unless in some
special cases.
6007
LocalPortToSynConf
Optional. The synchronous

port of MML and M2000. The
default value is 6099. Do not
modify this parameter unless in
special cases.
6099
MaxUserNumber
Optional.
The
maximum
number of users allowed by
CG9812, ranging from 1 to 30.
If the setting is beyond the
range, select the maximum
value.
30
MaxConnectUserNu
mber
Optional. The maximum link

number on the MML client.
Default: 5. Maximum: 30. If the
setting exceeds the value
range, use the maximum value.
(The client and debugging
console takes a single unit for
each)
10

1-27

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Note:
The IP address of LocalIpToMMLClient should be the same as the IP address of
ha-igwb in the /etc/hosts file of igwb1 and igwb2. This IP address is the float IP
address used to connect the NMS and the maintenance console.
For the configuration of the /etc/hosts file, refer to Part II System Installation.
1.3.5 Log Parameters

The [Log] field is used to configure the log parameters. The parameters in this field are
optional.
Table 1-7 Configuring log parameters
Configuration
item
Recommended
value
LogRootDir
Optional. The log storage directory.

Do not modify it unless in special
cases.
/var/other/log
ArchiveDir
Optional. The log archiving directory.
/var/other/log_archive
ArchiveTime
Optional. The log archiving time, in a

format of HH:MM:SS. The default
value is 2:00:00.
Configure based on
actual conditions.
LogSaveDays
Optional. The save time of log files.

The logs can be stored for six hours.
30
1.3.6 Disk and File Control Parameters

The [DiskFile] field configures the CDR storage path and disk alarming space. Because
these parameters are optional, you can directly use the default values.
Table 1-8 Configuration of disk and file parameters
Configuration item
MinDiskAlarmRoom
Optional. The size of the front or back disk

triggering a critical alarm (%).

1-28
Recomm
ended
value
5

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Recomm
ended
value
Configuration item
MinDiskHandoverR
oom
Optional. It indicates that the alarm for media

insufficient space is generated and switchover
happens if the rest space of the
FrontSaveRootDir
or
BackSaveRootDir
directory (or file system) is smaller than the
MinDiskHandoverRoom. This parameter is
recommended to be 15% of the total disk space,
in MBs.
500
FrontSaveRootDir
Optional. The root directory (or file system) for

storing the original CDRs. On UNIX, its path is
/var/frontsave. It is related to the mounting
point of the disk array in the operating system.
Do not modify this parameter unless in some
special cases.
/var/front
save
BackSaveRootDir
Optional. The root directory (or file system) for

storing the original CDRs. On UNIX, its path is
/var/backsave. It is related to the mounting
point of the disk array in the operating system.
Do not modify this parameter unless in some
special cases.
/var/back
save
FetchFileTimeOut
Optional. Indicating that the alarm for CDR

fetching delay is generated if the CDR is not
fetched by the billing center after the time
configured in FetchFileTimeOut. 10120
minutes is recommended (It is often set to 30. 0
indicates that no alarm occurs).
1.3.7 Network Backup Parameters

The [NetBackup] and [BackupTaskN] fields are related to backup over the network.
Through some configuration, you can back up the CDRs to the remote computer or
local disk by FTP. The backup mode supports the Push mode that the billing center
uses to collect CDRs. In this mode, the CG9812 works as the FTP client, the billing
center works as the FTP server, and the CG9812 sends CDRs to the billing center by
FTP. For details, see Table 1-9.
Table 1-9 Configuration of network backup parameters
Configuration
item
UserName
Optional. The FTP user name, which contains

255 characters at most.

1-29
Recommend
ed value
Configure
based on
actual
conditions.

HUAWEI CG9812
Configuration
item
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Recommend
ed value
DestHostIP
Optional. The IP address of the destination

host. When network backup is used, this
parameter indicates the IP address of the
remote host, and if it is set to local, it indicates
local backup.
Configure
based on
actual
conditions.
LocalIP
Optional. The IP address for FTP

transmission.
Billing centers
IP address is
recommended
BeforeEncode
Mandatory. It indicates that the password is set

in plain text for the first time, and BeforeEncode
must be set to 1 when network backup is used.
Afterwards, you can modify the password and
BeforeEncode values manually. After the
CG9812 runs, it will encrypt the plain code to
the password and modify BeforerEncode to 0.
Password
Optional. The password for logging in to the

network backup server. It is used together with
UserName.
BackupTaskCo
unt
Optional. The number of backup tasks.
It depends.
SourceDir
Optional. The path of the source files to be

backed up.
/var/frontsave
DestDir
Optional. The destination backup path. It can

be an FTP virtual directory when network
backup mode is adopted.
/frontsave/bac
kup
ReConnectInter
val
Optional. The interval for reconnecting the FTP

server, which ranges from 1 to 3600, in
seconds. It refers to the interval. It is the time
between two successive connections in the
network backup mode.
300
SearchFilesInte
rval
Optional. The CG9812 adopts real-time file

scanning, that is, backup immediately after a
new file is detected. This parameter indicates
the scanning frequency, in seconds. The value
ranges from 1 to 604800.
300
DelAfterBak
Optional. Indicating whether to delete the

source files after backup (0: Not delete; 1:
Delete).
DestFilesSave
Days
Optional. The save time of the destination file.

If this parameter is set to a number greater than
365, 365 is used. If it is set to 0, the system
does not support the remote deletion.
BakeupLastFile
File
Optional. Indicating to back up the last file (0:

Not backup; 1: Backup). Note: This parameter
of backing up original CDRs uses the default
value 0.

1-30

HUAWEI CG9812
Configuration
item
FileSaveDays
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Optional. Indicating the save days of source
files (0-Default; Maximum days=180). 0 means
Not delete.
Recommend
ed value
0
Note:
z
The parameters in [BackupTaskN] are related to those in [NetBackup]. The N in

[BackupTaskN] indicates the ID of backup task, and its parameter value is the value
of BackupTaskCount in [NetBackup]. For example, if BackupTaskCount is set to 2,
there are two backup tasks, and their parameter fields are [BackupTask1] and
[BackupTask2].
For each parameter, if it is configured in [BackupTaskN] (N indicates the backup

task No.), use the configuration in [BackupTaskN], otherwise use that in
[NetBackup].
When the network backup mode is adopted, the password is set in plain text for the
first time, and it will be automatically encrypted into password after the program
runs.
1.4 CG9812 Dual-System Configuration Instance

After the CG9812 servers are installed, the configuration parameters must be modified
based on the actual requirements of the installation site. Otherwise, the servers cannot
run normally. This section shows you a configuration instance in cluster mode by
introducing networking, IP address configuration principle, and the configuration file.
1.4.1 Networking Diagram

1)
If SUN Netra 240 minicomputer is employed, the networking in cluster mode of the
CG9812 is shown in Figure 1-3.

1-31

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
bge2
bge0
igwb2
LAN Switch-1
To Office LAN
To BC
bge1
bge3
bge2
bge0
GSN
LAN Switch-0
igwb1
bge1
To Office LAN
To BC
bge3
Figure 1-3 Networking in cluster mode (with Netra 240)

2)
If SUN Netra 20 minicomputer is employed, the networking in cluster mode of the

CG9812 is shown in Figure 1-4.
qfe2
qfe0
igwb2
LAN Switch-1
To Office LAN
To BC
qfe1
qfe3
qfe2
qfe0
GSN
LAN Switch-0
igwb1
qfe1
To Office LAN
To BC
qfe3
Figure 1-4 Networking in cluster mode (with Netra 20)
1.4.2 Configuration of IP Addresses of Network Adapters

When the CG9812 is configured with dual-system, you need to set the float IP address
of the network adapter. In addition, you need to modify the IP address of the files
/etc/hosts and igwb.ini. The IP address of these two files must be the same.
Otherwise the system cannot work normally.
1)
If SUN Netra 240 minicomputer is employed, the IP address planning in cluster

mode of the CG9812 is listed in Table 1-10.

1-32

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Table 1-10 IP address planning in cluster mode (with Netra 240)

Computer
Primary
node
Secondary
node
2)
Name
igwb1
igwb2
Network
identific
ation
Peer
device
Fixed IP
Default
virtual
IP
Actual
virtual IP
bge0
For NMS
and LMT
connection
129.1.1.1
129.1.1.
3
10.11.5.30
bge1/
bge2
For GSN
connection
129.2.1.1
129.2.1.
3
202.11.6.2
0
bge3
For billing
center
connection
129.3.1.1
129.3.1.
3
5.16.17.18
bge0
For NMS
and LMT
connection
129.1.1.2
129.1.1.
3
10.11.5.30
bge1/
bge2
For GSN
connection
129.2.1.2
129.2.1.
3
202.11.6.2
0
bge3
For billing
center
connection
129.3.1.2
129.3.1.
3
5.16.17.18
If SUN Netra 20 minicomputer is employed, the IP address planning in cluster

mode of the CG9812 is listed in Table 1-11.
Table 1-11 IP address planning in cluster mode (with Netra 20)

Computer
Primary
node
Secondary
node
Name
igwb1
igwb2
Network
identific
ation
Peer
device
Fixed IP
Default
virtual
IP
Actual
virtual IP
qfe0
For NMS
and LMT
connection.
129.1.1.
1
129.1.1.
3
10.11.5.3
0
qfe1/
qfe2
For GSN
connection.
129.2.1.
1
129.2.1.
3
202.11.6.
20
qfe3
For billing
center
connection.
129.3.1.
1
129.3.1.
3
5.16.17.1
8
qfe0
For NMS
and LMT
connection.
129.1.1.
2
129.1.1.
3
10.11.5.3
0
qfe1/
qfe2
For GSN
connection.
129.2.1.
2
129.2.1.
3
202.11.6.
20
qfe3
For billing
center
connection.
129.3.1.
2
129.3.1.
3
5.16.17.1
8

1-33

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Note:
z
The network adapter naming mode of the services provided by Netra 240 and Netra
20 are different. The naming mode of Netra 240 is bge0 bge3. The naming mode
of Netra 20 is qfe0 qfe3.
The float IP address providing services by the CG9812 need to be modified based
on actual conditions. The IP address listed here is just an example.
1.4.3 Content of the igwb.ini Configuration Files

When the CG9812 runs in cluster mode, you need to configure the igwb.ini files for
both servers. The configuration content for the two CG9812 severs is different.
I. Configuration instance of igwb.ini file in primary node

[Common]
APCount = 1
/*Accesspoint count*/
ServerNo = 0
/*Server No., 0-Primary, 1-Secondary*/
ClusterMode = 1
/*Flag
of
cluster
or
not,
1-cluster
mode,
0-single-host mode */
[Cluster]
CLUSTVER=3.0
/*version of SUN Cluster, the default value is 3.0*/
[AccessPoint1]
APType = 4
/*Accesspoint type, the value of APType is 4 when the
release is R4*/
APName = R4
/*Accesspoint name, need no modification*/
Release = R4
/*Release version of 3GPP, need no modification*/
LocalIpToEx = 129.2.1.3
/*Virtual IP to connect GSN, modify based on actual
virtual IP 202.11.6.20*/
LocalPortToEx = 3386
/*UDP port to connect GSN, need no modification*/
MustMerge = 1
/*whether merge the CDRs (0: Not need; 1: Need)*/
SaveSecond = 1
/*Save two shares for each final CDR file (0: Not
need; 1: Need)*/
RedirAddress = 0.0.0.0
[MML]
LocalIpToMMLClient =129.1.1.3
/* Virtual IP to connect client, modify based
on actual virtual IP 10.11.5.30*/
[NetBackup]

1-34

HUAWEI CG9812
UserName=administrator
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
/* FTP user name, modify based on actual condition*/
DestHostIP=5.16.17.20
/* Destination host IP address, modify based on actual
condition*/
LocalIP=129.3.1.3
/* Local host IP address, modify based on actual
virtual IP 5.16.17.18*/
Password=*****
/*T FTP user password, modify based on actual condition */
BeforeEncode=1
/* Flag of indicating whether the password is encoded,
0 means yes, 1 means no */

BackupTaskCount=1
/*Total number of backup task, modify based on actual
condition */
[BackupTask1]
SourceDir=/var/backsave/R4
/* Source files' directory*/
DestDir=/home/huawei /R4
/* Destination directory*/
Note:
After the server software is installed, the parameters in bold in the configuration
instance must be modified:
z
For LocalIpToEx under [AccessPoint1], its float IP address connecting with GSN
should be set based on actual conditions, and should be the same as the IP address
of ha-igwb1 in the /etc/hosts file.
For LocalIpToMMLClient under [MML], its float IP address connecting with NMS
should be set based on actual conditions, and should be the same as the IP address
of ha-igwb in the /etc/hosts file.
The network backup parameters [NetBackup] and [BackupTask1] should be

modified based on actual conditions. For the configuration of network backup, refer
to 1.7 Network Backup Configuration Instance.
II. Configuration instance of igwb.ini file in secondary node

[Common]
APCount = 1
/*Accesspoint count*/
ServerNo = 1
/*Server No., 0-Primary, 1-Secondary*/
ClusterMode = 1
/*Flag
of
cluster
or
not,
1-cluster
mode,
0-single-host mode */
[Cluster]
CLUSTVER=3.0
/*version of SUN Cluster, the default value is 3.0*/
[AccessPoint1]

1-35

HUAWEI CG9812
APType = 4
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
/*Accesspoint type, the value of APType is 4 when the
release is R4*/
APName = R4
/*Accesspoint name, need no modification*/
Release = R4
/*Release version of 3GPP, need no modification*/
LocalIpToEx = 129.2.1.3
/*Virtual IP to connect GSN, modify based on actual
virtual IP 202.11.6.20*/
LocalPortToEx = 3386
/*UDP port to connect GSN, need no modification*/
MustMerge = 1
/*whether merge the CDRs (0: Not need; 1: Need)*/
SaveSecond = 1
/*Save two shares for each final CDR file (0: Not
need; 1: Need)*/
RedirAddress = 0.0.0.0
[MML]
LocalIpToMMLClient =129.1.1.3
/* Virtual IP to connect client, modify based
on actual virtual IP 10.11.5.30*/
[NetBackup]
/* FTP user name, modify based on actual condition*/
/* Destination host IP address, modify based on actual
condition*/
LocalIP=129.3.1.3
/*Local host IP address, modify based on actual virtual
IP 5.16.17.18*/
Password=*****
/*FTP user password, modify based on actual condition*/
BeforeEncode=1
/*Flag of indicating whether the password is encoded,
0 means yes, 1 means no*/

BackupTaskCount=1
/*Total number of backup task, modify based on actual
condition*/
[BackupTask1]
/*Source files' directory*/
/*Destination directory*/

1-36

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Note:
After the server software is installed, the parameters in bold in the configuration
instance must be modified:
z
For ServerNo under [Common], set it to 1 representing the secondary node 1.
For LocalIpToEx under [AccessPoint1], set the float IP address connecting with
GSN based on actual conditions, and ensure that it is the same as the IP address of
ha-igwb1 in the /etc/hosts file.
For LocalIpToMMLClient under [MML], set the float IP address connecting with
NMS based on actual conditions, and ensure that it is the same as the IP address of
ha-igwb in the /etc/hosts file.
The network backup parameters [NetBackup] and [BackupTask1] should be

modified based on actual conditions.
1.5 Port Usage

The common ports and their functions are listed below.
I. Ports Used by CG9812

Table 1-12 lists the ports used by the CG9812 while the CG9812 runs normally.
Table 1-12 Ports used by the CG9812
Port
Type
Function
21
TCP
FTP server (control channel)
20
TCP
FTP server (data channel)
23
TCP
telnet server
137
UDP
NetBIOS name service
138
UDP
NetBIOS datagram service
161
UDP
SNMP
162
UDP
SNMP
II. Ports Used by Application

Table 1-13 lists the ports used by the application while the CG9812 runs normally.

1-37

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Table 1-13 Ports used by the application

Port No.
Type
Parameters modified in
the configuration file
Function
6000
TCP
The maintenance port open to

the client
[MML] LocalPortToCM
6001
TCP
The alarm port open to the

client
[MML] LocalPortToAR
6002
TCP
The performance statistics

port open to the NMS
[MML] LocalPortToPF
6007
TCP
The debugging port open to

the client
[MML] LocalPortToRD
6099
TCP
The
synchronization
configuration port open to the
NMS
[MML] LocalPortToSynConf
6100
TCP
The port that the CG9812

opens to the alarm box
[MML]
LocalPortToAlarmBox
3386
UDP
The UDP port that

CG9812 opens to GSN
[AccessPoint%d]
LocalPortToEx
LocalPortToExBak
9999
TCP
The communication port

between internal processes
the
[Common] LocalPortToMsg
1.6 Modifying Client Settings

The client uses two ports: a maintenance port and a debugging port. By default, the
maintenance port number is 6000, and the debugging port number is 6007. Use the
default values.
The client software supports the port configurations. You can open the configuration file
uiconfig.ini in the system directory (C:\Winnt\uiconfig.ini) to modify the configuration
items under [PORT] as follows:
[PORT]
MAINTAINPORT=6000
DEBUGPORT=6007

1-38

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Note:
MAINTAINPORT is the configuration item of the maintenance port. DEBUGPORT is
the configuration item of the debugging port.

Make sure that the configuration of the MAINTAINPORT port must be the same as
that of the corresponding port of the server. For server configuration, refer to the
value of LocalPortToCM under [MML] in the igwb.ini configuration file.
1.7 Network Backup Configuration Instance

Network backup is an important function of the CG9812. This section provides you with
some network backup instances for reference. The following parameters are all out of
the configuration file of igwb.ini. This chapter mainly introduces the following contents:
z
Network backup instance
Description for backup parameters
Backup precautions
1.7.1 Network Backup Instance

I. Task Description
This section provides a full-process operation instance about the complete network
backup parameter configuration.
II. Operation Procedure

1)
Set up the FTP server in the Windows 2000 operating system:
No.
Operation Steps
Run Start/Programs/Administrative Tools/Internet Service Manager to

create an FTP site.
Click New FTP Site Guide to configure the parameters. The IP address is
configured with the local IP address. TCP port is 21. Then, set the FTP main
directory to read & write.
After the FTP is created, configure other parameters in the Open Site
Property window. Disable anonymous connection. Add an FTP user
account. Select UNIX for catalog list style. Use the default values for other
options.
After the configuration is complete, log in to the FTP site. Check if the site
can be logged in, written, accessed, and operated by the added user
account.
If login is successful, the site is writable, and files and catalog can be
accessed, then the FTP server is set up successfully.
1-39

HUAWEI CG9812
2)
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Modify the igwb.ini file by using the vi editor and configure the network backup
parameters.
No.
Operation Steps
Use the following command to log in to the active and standby nodes of the
CG9812, for example, igwb1.
# telnet igwb1
Enter the correct user name and password to log in to igwb1, and the
following prompt is displayed: root@igwb1#.
Go to the directory /opt/igwb/config/ini, and edit the igwb.ini file by using
the vi editor.
root@igwb1#cd /opt/igwb/config/ini
root@igwb1#vi igwb.ini
Modify the [NetBackUp] field, change or add the parameters DestHostIP,

LocalIP, UserName, PassWord, BeforeEnCode, and BackUpTaskCount
based on the actual conditions.
Modify [BackUpTask1] field, and then configure the items SourceDir and
DestDir (in UNIX path format) based on the actual conditions.
For example:
[NetBackUp]
UserName= administrator
; use network backup login user name
; Backup destination IP
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
; Backup local IP
Password=******
sensitive)
; Use network backup login user password (case
BeforeEncode=1
; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812
encodes the password after started. Then, the value becomes 0. If the
password is changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.
BackupTaskCount=1
; Total number of backup tasks
[BackupTask1]
; Source path for the backup task
; Destination path for the backup task
(Optional) If there are two or more backup tasks, you can add the parameter
section [BackUpTaskN] (N for sequence number of the backup task) to the
parameter configuration console. Then add and configure SourceDir and
DestDir based on the actual conditions.
Other network backup parameters are optional or configured by default. After

modifications, enter wq! to exit from the vi editor.

1-40

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
Note:
When the billing center works in UNIX, the users opened to the CG9812 are not the
root users in general cases, so directories must be configured with full names.
For the usage of vi commands, refer to common vi commands in Appendix A
Common UNIX Commands.
3)
Reset the CG9812 server to activate the changed parameters.
No.
Operation steps
Run the CG9812 server process, and then log in to the CDR console.
Double-click Frame.exe in the Bin directory on the CG9812 client or click
Start/Programs/iGateway Bill V200 Client/iGWB Client to open the CDR
console interface.
On the main interface of the CDR console, choose Operation > Reset
iGWB.
In the popup dialog, click Yes to reset the CG9812 server process.
4)
Open the debugging console to view the network backup process of a single task.
No.
Operation Steps
Make sure the debugging process runs normally on the CG9812 Client
before login. Double-click debugws.exe in the installation directory Bin of
the CG9812 or choose Operation > Debug on the main interface of the
CG9812 Client to open the Login dialog.
Enter the correct user name and password. Select the office to be managed.
Click OK to log in to the debugging console.
Choose Debug > Browse Debug Message or click

on the tool bar to
display the Debuginfo window. In the Debuginfo window, you can view the
real-time debugging information and the related message on backup
success.
5)
Check if the backup is succeeful and correct in the destination path.
1.7.2 Simplest Backup Configuration

I. Task Description
Configure the simplest backup task.
II. Configuration instance

[NetBackup]

1-41

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1
; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812 encodes the
password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. If the password is

changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.
BackupTaskCount=1
[BackupTask1]
; The first backup task
; Source path of the backup task
DestDir=/home/huawei/R4
; Destination path of the backup task
1.7.3 Configuring Two Backup Tasks

I. Task Description
Configure two backup tasks with the same user name and password.
II. Configuration Instance

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

BackupTaskCount=2 ; Total number of backup tasks
[BackupTask1]
[BackupTask2]

; The second backup task
SourceDir=/var/backsave/Second/R4
1.7.4 Configuring Two Backup Tasks with Different User Names and
Passwords
I. Task Description
Configure two backup tasks with different user names and passwords.
1-42

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration

[NetBackup]
BackupTaskCount=2
[BackupTask1]
UserName=root
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password= BeforeEncode=1
; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812 encodes
the password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. If the password
is changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.
[BackupTask2]
; The second backup task
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

SourceDir=/var/backsave/Second/R4
Note:
Both 1.7.2 Simplest Backup Configuration and 1.7.4 Configuring Two Backup Tasks
with Different User Names and Passwords belong to the configuration of different
auto-backup modes.
1.7.5 Configuring Defaulted Backup Mode

I. Task Description
Configure the default backup mode: back up the files every 10 minutes.
The backup mode is controlled by the following two parameters (values given by
default):

1-43

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
SearchFilesInterval =300; The search interval (in seconds) when the backup module
backs up the files
ReConnectInterval = 300; The time interval (by second) when the FTP Server is
reconnected

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1
password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. if the password is

SearchFilesInterval =300 ; The search interval (in seconds) when the backup
module backs up the files
ReConnectInterval = 300
; The time interval (by second) when the FTP Server
is reconnected
[BackupTask1]
1.7.6 Configuring Backup Time List

I. Task Description
Set the backup time list. The daily listed time is backed up. If there is no listed time, the
system will wait.
The backup is controlled by the parameter backup_list_time=HH:MM:SS,HH:MM:SS.
The format is hour:minute:second. Different time is separated by comma. This
parameter is optional. If you configure this parameter, then the backup mode will have
the highest priority.

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=

1-44

HUAWEI CG9812
BeforeEncode=1
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration

[BackupTask1]
backup_list_time=HH:MM:SS,HH:MM:SS
; Hour:minute:second
1.7.7 Configuring the Backup Start Time and End Time

I. Task Description
Set the backup start time and end time. The backup task is started only during this
period.
The backup is controlled by the following two parameters (values are given by default).
These parameters are optional. The backup priority is lower than that of backing up
time list.
backup_begin_time=00:00; Backup task start time. The format is MM:SS.
backup_end_time = 23:59; Backup task end time. The format is MM:SS.

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1
; 1 is set for the first time. The CG9812 encodes
the password after it is started. Then, the value becomes 0. if the password
is changed, set it to 1 and reset the CG9812.
[BackupTask1]
backup_begin_time=00:00
; Backup task start time. The format is MM:SS.
backup_end_time = 23:59
; Backup end time. The format is MM:SS.

1-45

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
1.7.8 Configuring One-off Backup List

I. Task Description
One-off backup list indicates that the time point is deleted after the files are backed up
at this time point, and the related configuration items in igwb.ini are also removed. The
backup is controlled by the following parameter:
once_bk_list_time = YYYY-mm-DD HH:MM:SS, YYYY-mm-DD HH:MM:SS. The format
is year-month-day hour:minute:second. Different time is separated by comma. This
parameter is optional. The backup priority is lower than that of configuring the
backup start time and end time.

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

[BackupTask1]
once_bk_list_time = YYYY-mm-DD HH:MM:SS
; The format is year-month-day
hour:minute:second.
1.7.9 Configuring the Last File Backup

I. Task Description
This configuration aims at backing up the last file in the backup source directory. For a
Windows platform, it means that you can backup the last file in the directory of
/var/frontsave when it is generated. It is unnecessary to wait till the last file is closed
(This is because the size is restricted before the file in the /var/frontsave directory of
the front save disk is closed.) The configuration is controlled by the following
parameters (values are given by default):
BackupLastFile = 0
; Flag of backing up the last file (0-no; 1-yes)

1-46

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
This parameter can be used together with other parameters.

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

BackupTaskCount=1
[BackupTask1]
BackupLastFile = 0
; Flag of backing up the last file (0-no; 1-yes)
1.7.10 Configuring the Deletion of Source File after Backup

I. Task Description
Delete the source file after it is successfully backed up. The configuration is controlled
by the following parameter (by default):
DelAfterBak = 0
; Flag of deleting the source file after backup (0-no; 1-yes)

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

[BackupTask1]

1-47

HUAWEI CG9812
DelAfterBak = 0
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
; Flag of deleting the source file after backup (0-no;
1-yes)
1.7.11 Configuring the Deletion of the Second Bill Copy without Date
Directory after Backup
I. Task Description
Delete the files in the second directory of the back save disk (UNIX /var/backsave).
The configuration is controlled by the following parameter:
FileSaveDays = 0 ;#ave days for the source file (0-Default; Max.=180). 0 means Not
delete.
Caution:
z
This parameter is only applicable to the second bill copy without date directories. In
addition, only the files in the directory are deleted, but the directory is not deleted.
If the source directory is backed up before it is deleted, because it is backed up by

two backup tasks, you must configure the same FilePoolID for the directory to
prevent it from being deleted by one task before the other task backs it up.
This parameter can be used together with other parameters. In addition, SourceDir
must be in the directory of Second.

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

BackupTaskCount=1
[BackupTask1]

1-48

HUAWEI CG9812
FileSaveDays = 0
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
; Save days for the source file (0-Default; Max.=180).
0 means Not delete.
1.7.12 Configuring the Save Days for Files under the Destination Path
I. Task Description
Delete the files in the specific directory of DestDir. The configuration is controlled by
the following parameter:
DestFilesSaveDays = 0 ; save days for the files under the destination path. If it is
configured with more than 365 days, the value is 365; if it is configured with 0, then the
files should not be deleted.

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

[BackupTask1]
DestFilesSaveDays = 0
; save days for the files under the destination path.
If it is configured with more than 365 days, the value is 365; if it is configured
with 0, then the files should not be deleted.
1.7.13 Configuring Connection Retry Times When Backup Fails

I. Task Description
When a file fails to be backed up, you can configure the retry time within a backup cycle.
The configuration is controlled by the following parameter:
BackupRetryTimes = 2
; connection retry times when backup fails (05)

1-49

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

BackupRetryTimes = 2
; Connection retry times when backup fails (0-5)
[BackupTask1]
1.7.14 Configuring the Source Backup Path for Status Files

I. Task Description
Configure the backup path for the status files. The configuration is controlled by the
following parameter:
/var/other/StatusFile/Status ; Source backup path for Windows status files

[NetBackup]
LocalIP=10.70.141.170
Password=
BeforeEncode=1

BackupTaskCount=1
StatusBackupSrcDir= /var/other/StatusFile/Status
; Save path for the status
file of the backup module
[BackupTask1]

1-50

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Parameter
Configuration
1.7.15 Backup Precautions

I. Setting the Local Backup Function
The backup function of the CG9812 includes network backup and local backup. For
local backup, configure DestHostIP=Local. Other configuration is the same as that of
network backup.
II. Setting the Backup FTP

If the CG9812 provides the network backup function, it must be configured with the FTP
server. This is because the CG9812 is the Client of the FTP server in backup.
Note: Backup can be successful only if the full path for DestDir is configured for some
FTP servers. For example, for the FTP Server-U, if /var/backup is set to the FTP
directory, you should follow the following settings for DestDir: DestDir = /backup/R4.
III. Setting the Backup Source Path

When you configure the backup source path and the backup destination path, note that
the source path can be configured to the second-level directory only. If you want to
backup the file /var/backsave/R4/200040115/b000000001.dat, the path /var
/backsave/R4 is the shortest path that can be configured to backup the file, or you can
configure the path /var/backsave/R4/200040115.

1-51

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 2 System Running

2.1 Introduction
z
This section introduces the running of the CG9812 server, including:
Program Startup on the CG9812 Server
Program Close at the CG9812 Server
2.2 Program Startup on the CG9812 Server

Programs on the CG9812 server are started automatically when the operating system
(OS) is started. Program startup does not need manual operation and can be
automatically restarted after the exceptional exit. (The prerequisite is that the CG9812
configurations are correct).
Program startup sequence is as follows:
1)
2)
After the startup of Solaris OS, the SC system is automatically started.

The SC starts the ha script group (that is, the scripts after installing sc30_script.tar)
that manages the igwbapp resource.
3)
The SC system starts the cluster process (cls_proc) by using the ha scripts.
4)
The cluster process starts the Kernel process (knl_proc).
5)
The Kernel process sequentially starts the operation and maintenance process
(om_proc) and access point process (ap_proc).
Note:
Execute steps 3) - 5) sequentially. Any failure in these steps may lead to the CG9812
startup failure and active/standby switchover.

2-1

HUAWEI CG9812
2.3 Program Close at the CG9812 Server

Programs at the CG9812 server are stopped in the following sequence:
1)
The cluster process (cls_proc) receives the exit signal.
2)
The cluster process sends the exit command to the Kernel process (knl_proc).
3)
The Kernel process receives the exit command and sends the exit command to
operation and maintenance process (om_proc) and access point process
(ap_proc).
4)
The operation and maintenance process (om_proc) and access point process
(ap_proc) exit after receiving the command.
5)
The Kernel process (knl_proc) exits.
6)
The cluster process (cls_proc) exits.
The CG9812 server uses the dual-system. On the UNIX platform, the active node
(active server) runs a cls_proc, a knl_proc, an om_proc, and one or multiple ap_proc
processes according to the access point number. These processes cannot run on the
standby node (standby server). You can use the command ps -ef | grep _proc on two
nodes respectively to view the running status of processes.
Note:
For the directory structure and system manitenance of the CG9812, refer to Part V
System Maintenance".
2.4 Running Status of the CG9812 Client

You can log in to the CG9812 server through the CG9812 Client to perform daily
management and maintenance. The CG9812 client consists of the CDR console,
system debugging console.
For detailed operations on the client, refer to Part IV Basic Operations or CG9812
Online Help.
I. Operation Procedure
To start the bill console, do as follows:
1)
Ensure that processes of the active CG9812 server are already started. Log in to
the active CG9812 server and use the command ps -ef | grep _proc to see
whether the cls_proc, knl_proc, om_proc, and ap_proc processes are started.

2-2

HUAWEI CG9812
2)
On the CG9812 client, choose Start > Programs > iGateway Bill V200 Client >
iGWB Client, or double-click Frame.exe in the Bin directory under the installation
directory of the CG9812 Client. Then the User Login dialog is displayed, as
Figure 2-1 User Login

3)
Click Office Management to open the Office Management dialog, as shown in

Figure 2-2. In the dialog, enter the office parameters, including office name, IP
address, and type. Click Set to add it to the list box. Click Save to complete this
operation. The system will return to the User login dialog.
Figure 2-2 Office management

4) In the User Login dialog, enter the correct user name, password, and set the
office to be managed. Then click OK. If the login is successful, the main interface
of the CDR console is displayed.

2-3

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Parameter Description

1)
Parameters in the User Login dialog

Parameter
Operation
Example
User name
Mandatory. This is the user name that the

operator uses to log in to the CG9812 parameter
configuration console. The default value is the
system administrator admin.
admin
User Pwd
Mandatory. The password of the operators

account. The initial password is blank. The
password of the system administrator is at least 8
digits, with letters and numbers mixed. The
password of a normal operator is at least 6 digits,
with letters and numbers mixed.
Office
Mandatory. This refers to the office name of the

CG9812 server that is maintained by the
Shenzhen
Office IP
Mandatory. It is the IP address used by the

CG9812 server to connect with the CG9812 client
(or the NMS). It must be consistent with the
LocalIpToMMLClient value under the MML
configuration item in the igwb.ini file.
129.3.1.1,
modify it
based on
actual
condition.
Use Gateway
Optional. The proxy function that the NMS

provides the network elements.
Optional. Configure the IP address if you use the

gateway.
129.1.1.8,
modify it
based on
actual
condition.
Gateway IP
Note:
z
The default user name and password of the CG9812 client are admin and null
respectively. You need to change the password of the administrator immediately.
Configure the office direction before you log in to the client.
Hereinafter, the mark - in a table means an example is omitted.

2-4

HUAWEI CG9812
2)
Parameter description of [Office Management] Interface

Parameter
Operation
Example
Office
Mandatory. Office refers to the CG9812 server

offices maintained by the CDR console. Set an
office before logging in to the Client.
Beijing
IP
Mandatory. For the parameter configuration

console, the office IP can be configured with the
actual IP address of any network adapter on the
CG9812 server.
10.70.141.11
Type
Mandatory. Select the office type to be added.
iGWB

2-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 3 System
Commissioning
Chapter 3 System Commissioning

3.1 Introduction
After installing the CG9812, you must commission the system to check the connectivity
between the CG9812 and the GSN, billing center, and NMS.
Commissioning includes:
z
Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain
CG9812 and Other Devices
3.2 Typical Networking in Packet Switched Domain

The CG9812 is an independent unit in GPRS/UMTS. Major network elements (NEs) in
the CG9812 networking include the GSN (SGSN and GGSN), M2000, and billing
center.
Figure 3-1 shows the networking relationship between the CG9812 and the GSN
(SGSN and GGSN), NMS, and billing center in GPRS/UMTS.
OSS
MML
FTP/FTAM
M2000
BC
Core Network
Ga
GSN(GGSN/SGSN)
CG9812
Figure 3-1 CG9812 networking in GPRS/UMTS
3.2.1 CG9812 and GSN

In general, the CG9812 and GSN (GGSN/SGSN) are in the same equipment room.
They connect to each other through LAN (or WAN) and communicate by using the
standard Ga interface (over UDP/IP) to transfer bills. They also follow the GTP
prescribed by 3GPP. Ensure the following:
3-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 3 System
Commissioning
The network between the CG9812 and GSN are connected normally.
The bill protocols of the sender (GSN) and the receiver (the CG9812) are the
same. For example, the bill protocols are all in the form of R98, or R99, or R4.
The Ga interface settings are the same and the IP address and port in GSN for
sending bills are the same as those in the CG9812.
3.2.2 CG9812 and Billing Center

Billing center connects with the CG9812 through LAN/WAN. The CG9812 is the
passive party when it uses FTP (in PULL mode) or FTAM, that is, bill collector actively
logs in to the CG9812 to collect bills. Therefore, accounts should be added on the
CG9812 for the bill collector.
I. Setting Directories for Billing Center Users

If a bs user is opened for the billing center, and the directory of the second final CDR to
set is /var/backsave/Second, do as follows:
1)
The root user logs in to the CG9812 server with disk array (active CG9812
server).
2)
Add the bs user: #useradd -d /var/backsave/Second bs.
3)
Set a password for the bs user: #passwd bs. Enter the password and confirm it.
4)
Check the settings and log in to the CG9812 server as the bs user to validate
whether CDRs can be taken or deleted successfully.
II. Setting Static Routing

You can create a file under the /etc/rc3.d directory of igwb1 and igwb2 and add
routings in the file.
Configure as follows:
1)
#cd /etc/rc3.d
2)
#vi
3)
File content: route add
4)
Assign authority for users to execute the file: #chmod 755
5)
Restart the system and perform necessary validations.
S99CGENV
/*S is in capital*/
local IP address/subnet mask
S99CGENV
3.2.3 CG9812 and NMS

M2000 is the NMS of the GPRS/UMTS network structure. The CG9812 provides
M2000 with the NM interface in MML to manage the CG9812 alarms. The CG9812
communicates with M2000, or local maintenance terminal (LMT) on the CG9812 client
by using the MML interface.
z
Ensure that the network between the CG9812 and NMS are normal.
Ensure that their maintenance port settings are the same.

3-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 3 System
Commissioning
Note:
The maintenance port of the CG9812 does not need to be reset without special
requirpements or changes.
When you need to reset it, see 1.6 Modifying Client Settings.
3.3 CG9812 and Other Devices

When the CG9812 runs normally, check the connectivity between the CG9812 and
other devices.
3.3.1 CG9812 Receives CDRs

After SGSN or GGSN sends the generated CDRs, you can log in to the CG9812 server
from the LMT of the CG9812 client. In the original CDR navigation tree, check whether
there are CDRs send from GSN. If there are CDRs, it proves that no error exists on the
Ga interface.
3.3.2 Billing Center Collects CDRs

After the CG9812 generates the final CDRs (It takes some time to transfer the original
CDRs to the final CDRs), you can see the final CDRs on the LMT of the client. Then
check whether the billing center can take the open CDRs normally.
3.3.3 Connectivity Between NMS and CG9812

To check whether the LMT of the CG9812 client can be logged on and work normally,
check CDRs and version numbers.
To check whether M2000 can be connected normally and whether alarms are normal,
do as follows:
1)
On the CG9812 client, log in to the CG9812 with an incorrect password for three
times sequentially.
2)
The CG9812 generates an event alarm of illegal login.
3)
Check whether the alarm is displayed on M2000.

3-3
HUAWEI
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Part IV Basic Operations
User Manual Part IV Basic Operations

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Quick Start.................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Introduction to CG9812 Client ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 GUI of the CDR Console ................................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 GUI of the Debugging Console.......................................................................................... 1-6
Chapter 2 Common Operations ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Logging in to the CDR Console ......................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Locking CDR Console ....................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Logging out of the CDR Console ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Closing the CDR Console.................................................................................................. 2-4
2.6 Customizing the Layout ..................................................................................................... 2-4
2.7 Managing Operators .......................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Adding an Operator................................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.2 Deleting an Operator............................................................................................... 2-8
2.7.3 Modifying an Operator............................................................................................. 2-8
2.8 Managing Offices ............................................................................................................. 2-10
2.8.1 Adding an Office.................................................................................................... 2-10
2.8.2 Deleting an Office.................................................................................................. 2-11
2.8.3 Modifying an Office ............................................................................................... 2-12
2.9 Customizing the System .................................................................................................. 2-13
2.9.1 Customizing Timeout Setting ................................................................................ 2-13
2.9.2 Customizing Lock Time......................................................................................... 2-14
2.10 Managing CDRs............................................................................................................. 2-15
2.10.1 Browsing CDRs by Type ..................................................................................... 2-15
2.10.2 Browsing CDRs by Format.................................................................................. 2-18
2.10.3 Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions .............................................................. 2-20
2.10.4 Saving CDR Information ..................................................................................... 2-22
2.10.5 Printing a CDR .................................................................................................... 2-22
2.11 Managing Performance ................................................................................................. 2-23
2.11.1 Querying System Performance Status................................................................ 2-25
2.11.2 Setting State Query Properties ........................................................................... 2-27
2.11.3 Clearing State Information .................................................................................. 2-28
2.12 Managing Logs .............................................................................................................. 2-29
2.12.1 Browsing Logs..................................................................................................... 2-29
2.12.2 Saving Logs......................................................................................................... 2-32
2.12.3 Clearing Logs ...................................................................................................... 2-34
i

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
2.12.4 Printing Logs ....................................................................................................... 2-34

2.13 Manual Switchover ........................................................................................................ 2-35
2.14 Auxiliary Upgrade........................................................................................................... 2-36
2.15 Logging in to the Debugging Console ........................................................................... 2-37
2.16 Exiting the Debugging Console ..................................................................................... 2-38
2.17 Managing Debugging Messages ................................................................................... 2-39
2.17.1 Browsing Debug Messages ................................................................................ 2-40
2.17.2 Saving Debug Messages .................................................................................... 2-41
2.17.3 Masking the Debug Level.................................................................................... 2-42
2.17.4 Setting Debug Colors .......................................................................................... 2-44
2.18 Managing Protocol Messages ....................................................................................... 2-45
2.18.1 Browsing Protocol Messages.............................................................................. 2-46
2.18.2 Saving Protocol Messages.................................................................................. 2-46
2.19 Managing Workflow Messages...................................................................................... 2-47
2.19.1 Browsing Workflow Messages ............................................................................ 2-48
2.19.2 Saving Workflow Messages ................................................................................ 2-49

ii

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 Quick Start

This section introduces the CG9812 client interfaces and guides you to use the online
help system, to get familiar with the CG9812 quickly and includes the following
contents:
z
Introduction to CG9812 Client
GUI of the CDR Console
GUI of the Debugging Console
1.2 Introduction to CG9812 Client

The CG9812 client consists of the CDR console, system debugging console, and the
parameter configuration console. Their functions, access methods, and related
reference chapters are indicated as shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Brief introduction to CG9812 client
No.
CDR console
System debugging
console
Parameter
configuration
console
Function
Description
The CDR console is

the maintenance
console of the
CG9812 system. You
can execute various
operations through
the CDR console,
including CDR
querying and
browsing, CDR
statistics, system
performance
monitoring, log
management, user
management, and so
on.
Through the system

debugging console,
you can query the
system debugging
messages, protocol
trace messages,
and service
workflow trace
messages, to
monitor the running
of the system in real
time.
Through the
parameter
configuration console,
you can remotely
modify and maintain
the configuration file
igwb.ini of the server
and compare the
system parameters of
different offices to help
users in O&M.

1-1

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Entry 1
Entry 2
CDR console
System debugging
console
Parameter
configuration
console
Double-click
Frame.exe in the Bin
directory under the
installation directory
of the CG9812 Client.
Double-click
debugws.exe in the
Bin directory under
the installation
directory of the
CG9812 Client.
Double-click
ParaCfg.exe in the
Bin directory under
the installation
directory of the iGWB
Client.
On the main
interface of the CDR
console, select
Services/Debug, or
Select
Start/Programs/iGat
eway Bill V200
Client/Parameter
Configuration
Console.
Select
Start/Programs/iGat
eway Bill V200
Client/CDR
Console.
click the
shortcut
button in the toolbar.
Note:
This chapter covers the basic operations of the CDR console and the system
debugging console only. Part III introduces the operation of the parameter configuation
console.
1.3 GUI of the CDR Console

The CDR console enables you to maintain the CG9812 system. You can perform such
operations as CDR querying, system performance monitoring, log management, and
user management. The CDR console is a graphic user interface (GUI) as shown in
Figure 1-1. It consists of a main window, a menu bar, a toolbar, a navigator tree, a
sub-window, and a status bar.

1-2

HUAWEI CG9812
2
3
4
5
1. Main window
4. Navigator tree
2. Menu bar
5. Sub-window
3. Toolbar
6. Status bar
Figure 1-1 Main interface of the CDR console
I. Main window
The main window contains all elements of the CDR console interface, including the title,
menu bar, toolbar, navigator tree, and status bar.
II. Menu bar

The menus are the entry to all functions and features of the CDR console. The CDR
console provides the following main menus according to the menu functions: System,
View, Operation, Security, Window and Help. The menus of CDR console are dynamic,
and different operation menu options are provided in different modes. For example, if
the Client is in the state query mode, you will see the State Query menu item.
Table 1-2 lists all the menus on the main window of the CDR console.
Table 1-2 Menus on the CDR console GUI
Menu
System
Sub-menu
Function
Relogin
To log out the current user and log in as

another user.
Logout
To log out the current user and end the

current operation.
Lock System
To lock the CDR console when it is not used.

The shortcut key is F12.

1-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Menu
View
Operation
Security
Window
Help
Sub-menu
Function
Office Management
To set the offices managed by the CDR

console.
System Customization
To set the wait time for locking the system

and the timeout time of the system.
Exit
To quit the CDR console.
Navigator Tree
To show or hide the navigator tree. The

shortcut key is F2.
Toolbar
To show or hide the toolbar.
Status Bar
To show or hide the status bar.
Refresh
To refresh the navigator tree and display new

CDR files. The shortcut key is F5.
Debug
To enter the system debugging mode.
State Query
To enter the state query mode.
Switch
To manually switch over the active and

standby CG9812 servers.
Upgrade
To execute auxiliary upgrade of the system.
Operator
Management
To enter the operator management mode.
Log Browse
To view the operation logs and system logs.
Cascade
To cascade all windows.
Tile
To tile all windows.
Arrange Icons
To arrange all window icons.
Close All
To close all windows.
Help Topics
To open the help.
About iGWB
To display the version of the CDR console.
III. Toolbar
The toolbar provides shortcuts to the basic operations. On the toolbar, the shortcut
icons vary with the current mode. Table 1-3 lists the shortcut icons on the toolbar.
Table 1-3 Toolbar on the CDR console GUI
Shortcut
Related menu
option
Relogin
Function
To log out and log in as another user.

1-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Shortcut
Related menu
option
Function
Office Management
To set the offices managed by the CDR console.
Logout
To log out the current user and end the current

operation.
Lock System
To lock the CDR console when it is not used.
Navigator Tree
To show or hide the navigator tree.
Debug
To enter the system debugging mode.
Help Topics
To open the help.
IV. Navigator tree

The navigator tree is composed of one or more tabs, each of which contains the
information of an access point. It displays the CDR storage mode in the server. See
Figure 1-2.
1)
Under Original Bill, the CDRs are displayed by date. The corresponding CDR file
is *.bil.
2)
Under Final Bill, the bill types (also called channel) supported by the system are
displayed. Under each channel node, the final bills are displayed by date. The
corresponding CDR file is *.dat. The channels are determined by the format
library.
Name
Original Bill
Date
Final Bill
Channel
Date
1#Access
Point
2#Access
Point
Figure 1-2 Bill storing mode

1-5

HUAWEI CG9812
For the SGSN, the channels are S-CDR, M-CDR, S-SMO-CDR, S-SMT-CD,
LCS-MO-CDR, LCS-MT-CDR and LCS-NI-CDR. The bill formats include:
z
S-CDR: The PDP context bills.
M-CDR: The user mobility management bills.
S-SMO-CDR: The short message sending bills.
S-SMT-CDR: The short message receiving bills.
LCS-MO-CDR: The MS location sending bills.
LCS-MT-CDR: The MS location receiving bills.
LCS-NI-CDR: The network-initiated location bills.
For the GGSN, the channel is G-CDR. The bill format is:
G-CDR: The PDP context bills.
Note:
z
LCS-MO-CDR, LCS-MT-CDR and LCS-NI-CDR are only available in R4 or later

versions.
The final bill channel is determined by the distribution type selected by the user
while installing the server.
V. Sub-window
The sub-window is displayed after you select a menu or click a shortcut icon. It
implements the specific function.
VI. Status bar

The status bar shows the IP address of the CG9812 server connecting to the client.
1.4 GUI of the Debugging Console

You can switch the CDR console to the system debugging console to view the system
debugging information, protocol trace information, and the workflow trace information.
With these data, you can monitor the system running in real time. The debugging
console is a GUI as shown in Figure 1-3. The interface consists of a menu bar, a toolbar,
a main window, a sub-window, and a status bar. You can customize the layout of the
debugging console.

1-6

HUAWEI CG9812
2
3
1. Main window
4. Sub-window
2. Menu bar
5. Status bar
3. Toolbar
-
Figure 1-3 Interface of the debugging console
I. Main window
Main window includes all the elements on the debugging console GUI: title, menu bar,
toolbar, and status bar.
II. Menu bar

Menus provide entries to all functions and features of the CG9812 debugging console.
The debugging console provides the following main menus according to the menu
functions: System, View, Debug, Protocol, Workflow, Window, and Help. Table 1-4 lists
all the menus on the main window of the debugging console.
Table 1-4 Menus on the debugging console GUI
Menu
System
View
Sub-menu
Function
Relogin

another user.
Set Debug Colors
To set different colors for the debugging

information based on the debugging level.
Open iGWB Client
To switch to the CDR console from the

debugging console.
Exit
To exit the debugging console.
Toolbar
To show or hide the toolbar.

1-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Menu
Sub-menu
Status bar
To show or hide the status bar.
Browse Debug Message
To browse the running state of each

module of the CG9812 server in real time.
Save Debug Message
To save the running state of each module

of the CG9812 server in real time.
Debug
Mask
Level
Protocol
Function
List Mask
Level
Query the mask debug information.
Set Mask
Level
Set the conditions for masking debugging

information.
Browse Protocol
Message
To browse the messages between the

CG9812 and the switch in real time.
Save Protocol Message
To save the messages between the

Browse Workflow
Message
To browse the service messages among

modules and processes on the CG9812
server in real time.
Save Workflow Message
To save the service messages among

Cascade
To cascade all windows.
Tile Horizontally
To tile all windows horizontally.
Tile Vertically
To tile all windows vertically.
Arrange Icons
To arrange all window icons.
Minimize All
To minimize all the opened windows.
Clear
To clear all the information in the current

window.
Clear All
To clear all the information in all opened

windows.
Close
To close the current window.
Close All
To close all windows.
About iGWB
To display the version information of the

CG9812 debugging console.
Workflow
Window
Help
III. Toolbar
The toolbar provides shortcuts to the frequently performed operations. Table 1-5 lists
the shortcut icons on the toolbar.

1-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Table 1-5 Toolbar on the debugging console GUI

Shortcut
Related menu option
Function
Relogin

another user.
Browse Debug Message
To browse the running state of each

module of the CG9812 server in real time.
Browse Protocol Trace

Message
To browse the messages between the

Browse Workflow
Message
To browse the service messages among

Exit
To exit the debugging console.
Set Debug Colors
To set different colors for the debugging

information based on the debugging level.
Open iGWB Local

Manager
To switch to the CDR console from the

debugging console.
IV. Sub-window
The sub-window is displayed after you select a menu or click a shortcut icon, to
implement the specific function.
V. Status bar
The status bar shows the IP address and network connection status of the CG9812
server connected with the client.

1-9

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 2 Common Operations

This section introduces common operations in the CG9812 system.
2.2 Logging in to the CDR Console

I. Task description
To log in to the CG9812 server from the client to perform routine management and
maintenance.
II. Prerequisites
The CG9812 server process is running, run #ps -ef|grep _proc on active node,
ensure that cls_proc, knl_proc, ap_proc and om_proc are running.

No conflicts occur among ports.
III. Operation procedure

No.
Operation description
Double-click Frame.exe in the Bin directory under the installation directory of
the CG9812 Client, or select Start\Programs\iGateway Bill V200
Client\iGWB Client. Then the Login dialog box is displayed.

2-1

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
In the Login dialog box, enter the correct user name, password, and set the
office to be managed. Then click OK. If the login is successful, the main
interface of the CDR console is displayed.
IV. Parameter descirption

Parameter
Description
Example
User name
Mandatory This is your user name used to log in to

the CG9812 CDR console. The default value is
admin.
admin
Password
Mandatory It is your password. The default value is

null. It is recommended that the password of the
administrator be an alphanumeric string of at least
8 digits, and that of an operator be an alphanumeric
string of at least 6 digits.
Office name
Mandatory This refers to the name of the office

managed by the CDR console. You need to
configure the office before logging in to the client.
For details, refer to 2.8 Managing Office.
Shenzhen
Office IP
address
Mandatory It is the IP address used by the CG9812

server to connect with the CG9812 client (or the
NMS). It must be consistent with the
LocalIpToMMLClient value under the MML
configuration item in the igwb.ini file.
10.70.141.111
Use
Gateway
Optional It is to enable the proxy function provided

by the network management system (NMS).
Gateway IP
Optional It is the IP address of the gateway.

Configure it if you use the gateway.
10.70.141.133
Note:
z
The default user name and password of the CG9812 client are admin and null
respectively. You need to change the password of the administrator immediately.
Configure the office direction before you log in to the client.
Hereinafter, the identifier - in a table means an example is omitted.

2-2

HUAWEI CG9812
2.3 Locking CDR Console

I. Task description
To lock the CG9812 client to avoid unauthorized operations.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select System/Lock System or
click
box.
on the toolbar (or press F12) to display the Lock System dialog
To return to the current system, enter your password in the Lock System
dialog box, and then click OK.
To re-log in to the system, click Relogin in the Lock System dialog box.
In the dialog box that pops up, click OK to confirm your operation.
2.4 Logging out of the CDR Console

I. Task description
To log out of the system.
II. Prerequisites
None.

2-3

HUAWEI CG9812

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select System/Log Out or click
on the toolbar. Then the system asks you to confirm.
After you confirm your operation, the system closes all windows of the CDR
console.
2.5 Closing the CDR Console

I. Task description
To close the CDR console.
II. Operation procedure

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select System/Exit. A dialog box
is displayed, prompting you to confirm your operation.
Click Yes to close the CDR console.
2.6 Customizing the Layout

I. Task description
To customize the layout of the CDR console as desired.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.
On the CDR console, select View. Then select
Navigator Tree (or press F2) to show or hide the navigator tree.
ToolBar to show or hide the toolbar.
StatusBar to show or hide the status bar.

2-4

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
On the CDR Console, select Window. Then select
z
Cascade to display all opened windows in a cascading manner.

Tile to tile all the opened windows orderly on the lower right part of the
main interface.
Arrange Icons to arrange the icons of all opened windows.
Close All to close all the opened sub-windows.
Note:
Once you customize the layout of the CDR console, the layout will be saved and you
need not customize it again.

2-5

HUAWEI CG9812
2.7 Managing Operators

I. Brief Introduction
The CG9812 system has two types of users with different
authorities.
z
Task
description
Administrator is automatically generated during system

installation. Its user name is "admin" and default password is null.
It has all the authorities.
Operator is created by the administrator or another operator
authorized to create operators. Its user name and authorities are
allocated by the creator, and can be changed by the
administrator later.
Through operator management, you can control the authorities of all

operators to avoid unauthorized operations.
Entry
On the main interface of the CDR console, select

Security/Operator Management. The Operator Management
window is displayed.
Operator
Managemen
t Interface
II. Function Description

This section introduces the following contents:
z
Adding an Operator
Deleting an Operator
Modifying an Operator
2.7.1 Adding an Operator

I. Task description
To add an operator.

2-6

HUAWEI CG9812
After the Client software is installed, the system automatically creates the administrator
named admin. It is the only administrator in the system and cannot be deleted. Other
operators are added manually.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to create new
operators.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/Operator

Management to display the Operator Management window. Then the User
menu is added to the menu bar of the main interface.
Select User/Add or click
in the Operator Management window to
display the Add Operator dialog box.
Enter values in all fields, and then click OK. View the Operator Management
window, and you can find that the new operator has been added.
IV. Parameter Description

Parameter
Description
Example
Name
Mandatory Enter the full name of the new operator
Zhangshan
Description
Optional Describe the new operator
Operator
Authority
Optional Determine the operator type. The value is

Normal, unchangeable.
Normal User
Password
Mandatory Enter the login password of the

operator. Note: The password must be an
alphanumeric string of no less than six digits.
Z123456

2-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Parameter
Description
Mandatory Enter the login password of the
operator again.
Confirm
Example
Z123456
2.7.2 Deleting an Operator

I. Task description
To delete an operator.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to delete operators.

No.

menu is added on the menu bar of the main interface.
2
3
Select the operator to be deleted in the list. Select User/Delete or click the
button in the Operator Management window.
to refresh the user list. You
Click Yes in the popup dialog box, and click
can find that the selected operator has been deleted.
2.7.3 Modifying an Operator

I. Task description
To modify the account of an operator.
II. Prerequisites
z
The administrator can modify the description and password of itself or any
operator.
An operator can only modify its own description and password.

2-8

HUAWEI CG9812

No.

menu is added on the menu bar of the main interface.
Select the operator to be modified in the list. Select User/Modify or click
in the Operator Management window to display the Modify Operator
Property dialog box.
The administrator and Operator can modify all information except the name.
After modification, click OK.

2-9

HUAWEI CG9812
2.8 Managing Offices

Task
description
Entry
Office refers to the CG9812 server offices maintained by the CDR

console. The office management is used to set the IP address of an
office. The system allows you to set the IP addresses of multiple
offices so that you can select any of them to maintain from the client.
In the CDR console, select System/Office Management or click
on the toolbar to display the Office Management dialog box.
Office
Manageme
nt Interface

This part introduces the following contents:
z
Adding an Office
Deleting an Office
Modifying an Office
2.8.1 Adding an Office

I. Task description
To add an office maintained by the CDR console.
II. Prerequisites
None.

2-10

HUAWEI CG9812

No.
Obtain the IP address of the office to be added, that is, the IP address used
by the CG9812 server to connect with the CG9812 client (or the NMS), and
define the office name.

toolbar to display the Office Management dialog box.
Enter the following parameters: office, IP address and office type.
Click Set, and then the office information will be listed in the list box. After
confirmation, click Save to add the office.
on the

Parameter
Description
Example
Office
Mandatory Office refers to the name of the CG9812

server offices maintained by the CDR console. You
need to set an office before logging in to the Client.
Beijing
IP
Mandatory Enter the IP address used by the

CG9812 server to connect with the CG9812 client (or
the NMS). It must be consistent with the
LocalIpToMMLClient value under MML in the
igwb.ini file.
10.70.141.11
Type
Mandatory Select the type of the office to be added.
iGWB
Caution:
You must set an office when you run the client for the first time. Otherwise, the client
cannot connect with the CG9812 server. Specifically, when the User Login dialog box
is displayed in the CDR console, click Office Management to set the office in the
Office Management dialog box before you log in.
2.8.2 Deleting an Office

I. Task description
To delete an office that is no longer maintained by the CDR console.

2-11

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.
Determine the IP address and name of the office to be deleted.

Select the office to be deleted, and then click Delete. After confirmation, click
Save to delete the office.
on the
2.8.3 Modifying an Office

I. Task description
To modify the information of an office maintained by the CDR console.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.

Select the office to be modified in the list box and enter the new office
information in the dialog box.
Click Set, and then the new office information is listed in the list box. After
confirmation, click Save to modify the office information.

2-12
on the

HUAWEI CG9812
2.9 Customizing the System

Task
description
Entry
Customize the timeout time and lock time of the CG9812 Client.
In the CDR console, click System/System Customize to display the
System Customize dialog box.
System
Customize
Interface

z
Customizing Timeout Setting
Customizing Lock Time
2.9.1 Customizing Timeout Setting

I. Task description
To set the timeout time of the client.
Timeout time refers to the maximum interval for the client to receive a result from the
server after it submits a command.
II. Prerequisites
None.

2-13

HUAWEI CG9812

No.

Select the checkbox before Timeout Setting (20 600s). Enter the time
value, and then click OK.
Note:
The timeout value ranges from 20 seconds to 600 seconds.
2.9.2 Customizing Lock Time

I. Task description
To set whether to lock the CDR console after a specified idle time.
Once the client is locked, you have to enter the password to unlock it.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.

Set the idle time (in minutes) before the system is locked and click OK. The
value ranges from 0 to 1440 minutes. If it is set to 0, the system will never be
locked.

2-14

HUAWEI CG9812
2.10 Managing CDRs

Task
description
CDR management includes series important functions which are

browsing, querying, printing, saving CDRs, and manually outputting
CDR files.
Entry
Log in to the CDR console. The left pane shows the navigator tree
that is divided into several tab pages based on access points (for
example, the CG node shown in the following figure). The navigator
tree displays the CDR storage mode in the server.
CDR
operation
interface

This section introduces the following contents:
z
Browsing CDRs by Type
Browsing CDRs by Format
Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions
Saving CDR Information
Printing a CDR
2.10.1 Browsing CDRs by Type

I. Task description
To browse the generated CDRs by type.

2-15

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse CDRs.

No.
Log in to the CDR console. The left pane shows the navigator tree that is
divided into several Tab pages based on access points (for example, the
CG node shown in the following figure.), The navigator tree displays the
CDR storage mode in the server.
Right-click the sub-window and you will see the following options on the
shortcut menu:
Select Refresh to obtain the latest CDR information from the CG9812
server.
Select Up to open the upper level directory list
Select Back to open the previous directory.
Select Bill Query to query the CDR files by format.
Select Bill Browse to display the content of a selected CDR.
Select Find to set the specified querying conditions, such as name, type
or size to find the CDRs.
Select Bill Browse or click a CDR file to display the Choose Bill Format for
File Browsing dialog box.
Select a bill format.

2-16

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Click OK and the Bill Info menu is added to the menu bar of the CDR
console. The Browse Original Bill window pops up and displays all bills in
this format.
If the bills are displayed on more than one page, right-click the current page
and select Next page/Previous page or click
pages. Each page displays 50 records.

2-17
and
to view other

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
z
Click
to save the queried bills.
Click
to print the queried bills.
Double-click a bill record or click

Information dialog box.
to display the Bill Detailed
The bill detailed information varies with the CDR types. Click OK to close the
dialog box.
Note:
The example only describes the operations against CDRs. The operations against final
bills are similar.
2.10.2 Browsing CDRs by Format

I. Task description
To browse CDRs by format.

2-18

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse CDRs.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, double-click a date under

Original Bill of the navigator tree in the left pane to display the Original Bill
window.
Right-click the bill list window and select Bill Query from the shortcut menu
to display the Choose Format for Bill Browsing dialog box.
Select the bill format to be queried and then click Next to display the Set
Query Condition dialog box.
The query conditions displayed will vary with the CDR formats. Set the query
conditions, and click OK to display the Bill Query window.

2-19

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
If the bills are displayed on more than one page, right-click the current page
and select Next page/Previous page or click
pages. Each page displays 50 records.
z
Click
to save the queried bills.
Click
to print the queried bills.
Double-click a bill record or click

Information dialog box.
and
to view other
to display the Bill Detailed
Note:
bills are similar.
2.10.3 Browsing CDRs by Multiple Conditions

I. Task description
To find CDR records based on multiple conditions like CDR name, type, size, modifying
date and creating date.

2-20

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse
CDRs.
Only CDRs in the CDR list can be browsed.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, double-click a date under

Original Bill of the navigator tree in the left pane to display the Original Bill
window.
Right-click the CDR list window and select Find from the shortcut menu to
display the Find dialog box.
Enter the content of the CDR you want to find in Content.
Enter the search type in Field, including Name, Type, Size, Modifying Date,
and Creating Date.
Enter the filed matching condition in Matching, including Entire Filed, Field
Head, and Part of Field.
Click Find First to display the first CDR matching the conditions:
z
6
z
If the first CDR is found, you can click Find Next to display the next CDR
matching the conditions.
If no CDR is found, a dialog box is displayed, prompting Cannot find the
searching string. After confirmation, lick OK to return to the Find dialog
box
Click Close to close the Find dialog box.
Note:
bills are similar.

2-21

HUAWEI CG9812
2.10.4 Saving CDR Information

I. Task description
To save all or selected CDRs on the CG9812 Client in text format.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to manage CDRs.

No.
1
Browse or find the CDRs as required.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select Bill Info/Save, or click
in the Bill Browse or Bill Query window. Then the Save Bill Information
dialog box is displayed.
Select Save bills of the current page or Only save selected bills as
required. Enter the name and the path of the destination file, or select an
existing path by clicking Browse. Click OK to save the CDRs.
2.10.5 Printing a CDR

I. Task description
To print the CDRs that you have browsed or queried.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to manage CDRs.

2-22

HUAWEI CG9812

No.
1
Browse or query the CDRs as required.
In the CDR list window, select the CDRs to be printed. Then select Bill
Info/Print or click
Print window.
Set print parameters to print the selected CDRs.
in the toolbar of the Bill Browse window to display the
Note:
Select Bill Info/Print Preview to preview the CDRs before printing. Select Bill
Info/Print Setting to set the font of the CDRs to be printed.
2.11 Managing Performance

Task
description
To know about the current running status of CG9812, such as CPU

usage, disk space usage, and heartbeat state by monitoring the
performance of the system.
Entry
On the main interface of the CDR console, click Operation/State

Query to display the State Query dialog box.
State
Query
Interface

2-23

HUAWEI CG9812

Parameter
Description
Primary/Secondary
State
It indicates the state of the active/standby server. If the server

runs normally, the corresponding green indicator flashes. 0
represents the active node, and 1 represents the standby
node.
Heartbeat State
It indicates the working state of the heartbeat links. There are

two values displayed in the "n/m" format. m indicates the total
number of heartbeat links (generally m=2) and n indicates the
number of normal heartbeat links. If n=0, the heartbeat is
abnormal. Also, if n0 and mn, the heartbeat is abnormal.
To ensure the reliable running of the system, check the
abnormal heartbeat links and restore them in time.
CPU1 Usage (%)
The CPU1 usage of the dual-system. Currently, the CG9812

can display two CPU usages at most. If only one CPU is
configured, then - is used to replace the second CPU usage.
CPU2 Usage (%)
The CPU2 usage of the dual-system. Currently, the CG9812

can display two CPU usages at most. If only one CPU is
configured, then - is used to replace the second CPU usage.
Front Disk Space

(MB)
Indicates the storage space for CDRs. There are two values
displayed in the "n/m" format. Where, m indicates the total
space of the disk in MB, and n indicates the available space in
MB.
Back Disk Space

(MB)
Indicates the storage space for final bills. There are two
values displayed in the "n/m" format. Where, m indicates the
total space of the disk in MB, and n indicates the available
space in MB.
Physical MEM
(MB)
Indicates the current physical memory usage. There are two

values displayed in the "n/m" format. Where, m indicates the
total size of the physical memory in MB, and n indicates the
available size in MB.
III. Function Description

z
Querying System Performance Status
Setting State Query Properties
Clearing State Information

2-24

HUAWEI CG9812
2.11.1 Querying System Performance Status

I. Task description
To query the running state of the CG9812 server, including CPU usage, heartbeat state,
and disk space usage.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to query system
information.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select Operation/State Query.

The State Query dialog box is displayed, and the State Query menu is
added to the menu bar of the CDR console.
The state information for the current server is displayed in the State Query
dialog box.

2-25

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Double-click a record to display the State Detailed Information dialog box.
You can see all the detailed information in real time.
Click OK to close the State Detailed Information dialog box.

Parameter
Description
CPU1 Used /CPU2

Used
Indicate the CPU usage of the dual-system.
Physical MEM
Indicate the memory usage.
Primary/Secondary
State
Indicate the state of the active/standby server. If the

active/standby server runs normally, the corresponding green
indicator flashes.
Heartbeat State
Indicate the working state of the heartbeat links. There are two
indicators -- total and active.
Front Disk Space
Indicate the CDR storage space, including two indicators

total and active.
2-26

HUAWEI CG9812
Parameter
Back Disk Space
Description
Indicate the final bill storage space, including two indicators
total and available.
2.11.2 Setting State Query Properties

I. Task description
To set the state query properties, including the state refreshing period and whether to
save the state query result.
II. Prerequisites
information.

No.

Select State/Setting Properties or click
in the State Query dialog box to
display the Setting Prosperities dialog box.
Set the two parameters (Save Status and Time Span) as required.

2-27

HUAWEI CG9812

Parameter
Description
Example
Save
Status
It means whether to save the state information in the

State Query window to the StatsInfo.txt file under the
installation directory of the Client. Select Open to save
the information. Otherwise, select Close.
Open
Time Span
It refers to the interval when the server state information

is refreshed. The time span ranges from 0 second to 600
seconds.
2.11.3 Clearing State Information

I. Task description
To clear the state information manually.
II. Prerequisites
information.

No.

in the State Query dialog box. The

Select State Query/Clear, or click
displayed status information is then cleared.

2-28

HUAWEI CG9812
2.12 Managing Logs

Task
description
The system provides both operation logs and system logs to help
you locate problems. One log file is created daily, named as the date
plus log as its extension. Each log file is saved for one month and
then deleted.
Entry
On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/Log

Browse to display the LogView dialog box.
Log View
Interface

z
Browsing Log
Saving Log
Clearing Log
Printing Log
2.12.1 Browsing Logs

I. Task description
To browse operation logs and system logs.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to browse logs.
z
The administrator can browse the system log and the operation logs of all the
operators.
2-29

HUAWEI CG9812
The operators with log browsing authority can browse their own operation logs, but
they cannot browse the system log.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select Security/Log Browse to

display the LogView window. The Log menu is added to the menu bar of the
CDR console.
in the LogView window, and the Set
Select Log/Browse Log or click
Log Browse Property dialog box is displayed.
Enter the log browse conditions. Select the user name and log type, and set
the start time and end time for log browsing. Then, click OK. The logs
meeting the conditions are displayed in the LogView window.

2-30

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Double-click a log entry, or select it and press Enter, to view the detailed
information of it.
In the Detailed Information of Log window, click Next to view the next log
entry, and click Previous to view the previous log entry.
IV. Parameters in the Set Log Browse Property Interface

Parameter
Description
User name
The object that generates logs. Its drop-down

list includes "All Users" and each user
created. All users refer to all created users. If
you log in as administrator, you can select a
created user or all users; if you log in as an
operator, your own user name is selected by
default.
All users
LogType
Including "System Log" and "Operation Log".

A system log records the running process of
software modules. An operation log records
the operations of users.
Operation Log
Start/End
Start time/End time indicates the time range in

which a log is created.

2-31
Example
Start:
2005-01-22-18:00:50
End:
2005-01-24-18:00:50

HUAWEI CG9812
V. Parameters in Detailed Information of Log Interface

Parameter
Sequence
Number
User name
Description
Example
The sequence number of a log.
For an operation log, the actual user name is

displayed.
admin
For a system log, - is displayed.

Date
The date when the operation is performed.
2005-01-22
18:00:50
Operation
Place
The IP address of the CG9812 server that sends

the operation command.
10.70.141.132
Log Source
For an operation log, - is displayed. For a system

log, the module ID is displayed.
For a system
log, the
operation
command is "-".
Operation
Command
The operations performed by the user, which are

recorded by the program. Only an operation log
has an operation command; a system has not.
Command
Detail
Including the position (office) where the command

is executed and the command string.
Query
the
information of
an operator.
Operation
Result
Command execution result. "SUC" means

success. "FAIL" means failure.
SUC
LogType
"SYS" refers to system log. "OPER" refers to

operation log.
OPRT
For an operation
log, the
operation
command is the
actual
operation, such
as LST OP.
2.12.2 Saving Logs

I. Task description
To save all of or selected logs to the Client in text format for future reference.
II. Prerequisites
z
Only the administrator can save the system logs and the operation logs for all
operators.

2-32

HUAWEI CG9812
The operators with log operation authority can browse their own operation logs but
cannot save the system logs.

No.

display the LogView window. The Log menu is then added to the menu bar
of the CDR console.
on the toolbar in the LogView window.
Select Log/Save to File, or click
The Save Log Information dialog box is displayed
Select Save All Log Record or Only Save Selected Log Record as
required. Enter the destination file name to save the log records, or select an
existing path by clicking Browse. Click OK to save the log records

Parameter
Description
Example
Save All Log

Record
Save all logs found.
Only
Save
Selected Log
Record
Save the selected log records found as

required.
Path
Mandatory Manually enter or select the

save path and log file name by clicking
Browse. The default save path is
C:\iGWB_Client\Bin of the Client.
If you enter
20040702.txt, then the
log is saved in the
C:\iGWB_Client\Bin\20
040702.txt file.

2-33

HUAWEI CG9812
Note:
The CG9812 system creates the log files everyday. The logs created are saved in the
D:\other\log directory of the CG9812 server.
2.12.3 Clearing Logs

I. Task description
To clear the log records that is no longer needed.
II. Prerequisites
The administrator can clear the system logs and the operation logs for all
operators.
The operators with log operation authority can only clear their own operation logs
but cannot clear the system logs.

No.

of the CDR console.
Select Log/Clear or click

in the LogView window.
in the LogView window to clear all log records
2.12.4 Printing Logs

I. Task description
To print the selected log records for future reference.
II. Prerequisites
z
The administrator can print the system logs and the operation logs for all
operators.
The operators with log operation authority can only print their own operation logs
but cannot print the system logs.

2-34

HUAWEI CG9812

No.

of the CDR console.
Select Log/Print or click
The Print dialog box is displayed. Set the print parameters as required and
click OK to print the logs.
in the LogView window.
Note:
Click
in the LogView window to preview the logs before printing.
2.13 Manual Switchover

I. Task description
To switch over the active/standby CG9812 server manually.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator or an operator authorized to perform
switchover manually.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select Operation/Manual

Switch.
A confirmation dialog box pops up. Click Yes to check the status of the bulb
icon in the status bar. The standby server is activated, and executes #ps
-ef|grep _proc, ensure that cls_proc, knl_proc, ap_proc and om_proc are
running.

2-35

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
If the switchover is successful, the server will be disconnected with the CDR console.
Therefore, perform this operation with caution.
2.14 Auxiliary Upgrade

I. Task description
To prepare for upgrading the server software (for example, combine all CDRs, or stop
receiving CDRs).
Only perform auxiliary upgrade in the following cases:
The interface between the CG9812 and the switch changes. In other words, the
bill format changes, such as the CDR length.

The interface between the CG9812 and the billing center changes. In other words,
the CDR format or CDR file format changes.

In both cases, you need to reconfigure the igwb.ini file. In addition, you need to delete
the system status file. Otherwise, the serial number of CDR files still increases.
II. Prerequisites
You have logged in as the administrator.

No.
On the main interface of the CDR console, select Operation/Auxiliary

Upgrade.
Click Yes in the popup dialog box to start auxiliary upgrade for the CG9812
server.

2-36

HUAWEI CG9812
Caution:
z
After you perform auxiliary upgrade, the system no longer receives CDRs, which
may cause CDR loss. Therefore, perform this operation with caution. In case of
indeliberate operation, restart the CG9812 program.
In auxiliary upgrade, determine whether to delete the system state files according to
the installation guide to the specific version.
2.15 Logging in to the Debugging Console

I. Task description
To log in to the debugging console.
Through the debugging console, you can know about the current running state of the
system.
II. Prerequisites
The CG9812 server process is running normally.

No.
Double-click the debugws.exe file in the Bin directory of the CG9812 client
to display the User Login Dialog box.
Enter the user name, password, and the office to be managed. Then the
debugging console GUI is displayed.
Note:
z
You can also select Operation/Debug on the main interface of the CDR console or
click
on the toolbar to enter the system debugging console.
After you log out, click
on the toolbar to log in as another operator.

2-37

HUAWEI CG9812
2.16 Exiting the Debugging Console

I. Task description
To exit the system debugging console.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.
. A dialog box is displayed, asking you for
Select System/Exit, or click

confirmation.
Click Yes, and you can exit the debugging console immediately.

2-38

HUAWEI CG9812
2.17 Managing Debugging Messages

Task
description
Debugging message refers to the running state information of each

module of the server, which is displayed by level. You can browse the
information in real time. The debugging information can be used in
troubleshooting.
Entry
on the toolbar.
Select Debug/Browse Debug Message, or click
The DebugInfo window appears, displaying the debugging
messages in real time.
CG9812
Debuginfo
GUI
II. Parameters in Debuginfo Interface

Parameter
Description
Example
Debug
Content
Displaying debugging messages in real time.
Currently normal. The

sequence number of
the file is 6.
Debug
Level
Displaying the level of debugging messages.

The debugging messages of different levels
are displayed in different colors.
Major
Debug
Information
Displaying the module of the debugging

information.
MT_FRONTSAVE

2-39

HUAWEI CG9812

z
Browsing Debug Message
Saving Debug Messages
Masking the Debug Level
Setting Debug Colors
2.17.1 Browsing Debug Messages

I. Task description
To browse the running state information of each module of the CG9812 server in real
time.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.
Select Debug/Browse Debug Message, or click
on the toolbar. The
DebugInfo window pops up, displaying the debugging messages in real
time. The debugging messages are displayed in different colors according to
different levels.

2-40

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
Right-click in the debugging information window and select:
z
z
Refresh to clear all messages in the window.

No Scrolling to stop scrolling the messages in the window. In this case,
is activated, and you can print the messages.
2.17.2 Saving Debug Messages

I. Task description
To save the current debugging information for future reference.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.
Select Debug/Save Debug Message to enable the save function (then you
can see a mark before Save Debug Message. The Please select save
path dialog box is displayed.
The default path is C:\iGWB_Client, and the default file name is

D_20040717180106_DB.txt. Click Save.

2-41

HUAWEI CG9812
2.17.3 Masking the Debug Level

I. Task description
To set the level of debugging messages to be masked.
Note that the information masked is not deleted.
z
List Mask Level
Set Mask Level
Delete Mask Level
II. Prerequisites

1)
List Mask Level
No.
1
Select Debug/Mask Level/List Mask Level.
The Result of Query window pops up, displaying the mask level.
2)
Set Mask Level
No.
1
Select Debug/Mask Level/Set Mask Level.

2-42

HUAWEI CG9812
No.
The Add Mask Conditions dialog box pops up.
Select a mask level: Urgent, Important, Normal, and Minor.

Click OK, the confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes, and the
debugging information of the selected level is masked.
3)
Delete Mask Level
No.
1
Select Debug/Mask Level/List Mask Level.
The Result of Query window is displayed.
Right-click in the window and select:

z
3
z
Delete Selected Condition to delete a selected mask level. In the popup

dialog box, click Yes to confirm your operation.
Delete All Conditions to delete all mask levels. In the popup dialog box,
click Yes to confirm your operation.
Refresh to refresh the list of mask levels.

2-43

HUAWEI CG9812
2.17.4 Setting Debug Colors

I. Task description
To set the display color of each other of debugging messages.
II. Prerequisites
None.

No.
Select System/Set Debug Colors, or click
dialog box is displayed.
. The Set Debug Colors
Set the color for each level. Click Restore to Default if you want to restore to
the default settings. Click OK to finish setting.

2-44

HUAWEI CG9812
2.18 Managing Protocol Messages

Task
description
The protocol trace information refers to the message information

between the CG9812 and the switch. You can browse the protocol
trace information in real time. This is helpful for troubleshooting.
Entry
Select Protocol/Browse Protocol Message, or click

. The
ProtocolTrace window pops up, displaying the protocol trace
information in real time.
ProtocolTra
ce GUI

Parameter
Description
Example
Msg
Sender
The party sending the protocol messages,

usually the CG9812 or switch (GGSN).
CG9812
Msg
Receiver
The party receiving the protocol messages,

usually the CG9812 or switch (GGSN).
Module 1
Sequence
Number
The unique ID of the protocol message

frame.
Msg Type
The type of the protocol message.
Saving CDRs.
The contents of the protocol message.
The total length of a

CDR is, and the
sequence number is
46.
Protocol
Trace
Content

2-45

HUAWEI CG9812

z
Browsing Protocol Message
Saving Protocol Message
2.18.1 Browsing Protocol Messages

I. Task description
To browse the messages between the CG9812 and the switch, to help troubleshooting.
II. Prerequisites

No.
Select Protocol/Browse Protocol Message, or click

. The
ProtocolTrace window pops up, displaying the protocol trace information in
real time.
Right-click in the ProtocolTrace window and select:
z
2
z
Refresh to clear all information in the window. Then the system will
display new debugging information.
2.18.2 Saving Protocol Messages

I. Task description
To save the current protocol trace information.
II. Prerequisites

2-46

HUAWEI CG9812

No.
Select Protocol/Save Protocol Message to enable the save function (then

you can see a mark before Save Protocol Message. The Please select
save path dialog box is displayed.

D_20040717172622_PT.txt. Click Save.
2.19 Managing Workflow Messages

Task
description
The workflow information refers to the service messages between

the CG9812 and the switch. You can browse the workflow messages
in real time. This is helpful for troubleshooting.
Entry
Select Workflow/Browse Workflow Message, or click

. The
Workflow window pops up, displaying the workflow information in
real time.
Workflow
GUI

Parameter
Sender
PID
Description
Each process of the CG9812 server has a
process ID (PID). The workflow message
contains the PID of the sender.

2-47
Example
PT_OM

HUAWEI CG9812
Parameter
Description
Example
Sender
MID
Each module in a process of the CG9812

server has a module ID (MID). The workflow
message contains the MID of the sender.
MT_COLAGENT
Receiver
PID
Each process of the CG9812 server has a

PID. The workflow message contains the
PID of the receiver.
PT_KERNEL
Receiver
MID
Each module in a process of the CG9812

server has an MID. The workflow message
contains the MID of the receiver.
MT_LICENSEMANGE
R
APP Type
The type of the workflow message.
MML
Client No.
Each MML client has one allocated ID as its

unique identifier.
MML
Client IP
It is the IP address of the MML Client.
0.0.0.0
CMD Code
It is the command code for the internal

communication structure of the CG9812.
220
Len of
Data
It is the size of the data in the communication

frame of the workflow message.

z
Browsing Workflow Message
Saving Workflow Message
2.19.1 Browsing Workflow Messages

I. Task description
To browse the service messages among modules and processes at the server and help
troubleshooting.
II. Prerequisites

2-48

HUAWEI CG9812

No.
. The Workflow
Select Workflow/Browse Workflow Message, or click
window pops up, displaying the workflow information in real time.
Right-click in the Workflow window and select:
Refresh to clear all the information in the window. Then the system
displays new workflow trace messages.
2.19.2 Saving Workflow Messages

I. Task description
To save the current workflow trace messages for future reference.
II. Prerequisites

No.
Select Workflow/Save Workflow Message to enable the save function

(then you can see a mark before Save Workflow Message. The Please
select save path dialog box is displayed.

D_20040717173210_WF.txt. Click Save.

2-49
HUAWEI
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Part V System Maintenance
User Manual Part V System Maintenance

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 System Overview ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Types of System Users...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 System Directory and Main Files ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.3.1 Directory structure and main files of the server ...................................................... 1-1
1.3.2 CDR storage directory and main files ..................................................................... 1-3
1.3.3 Common directory structure and main files ............................................................ 1-5
1.4 Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client .......................................................................... 1-6
Chapter 2 Routine Maintenance................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 System Running................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 Hard Disk Detection ........................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Operation Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 2-3
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Fault Positioning Information on the CG9812.................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Fault positioning information on OS................................................................................... 3-3
3.4 Collection of Fault Positioning Information ........................................................................ 3-4
3.5 Trace Information and Maintenance .................................................................................. 3-5
3.5.1 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space................. 3-5
3.5.2 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space ................. 3-5
3.5.3 Usable Backup Medium Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space ....... 3-5
3.5.4 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover Space ............. 3-6
3.5.5 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover Space.............. 3-6
3.5.6 Access Point Type, Access Point Type Being %d .................................................. 3-6
3.5.7 Failure of Reading IP Address from MML Server (Default Value %s) .................... 3-7
3.5.8 Error Code %d Returned in Socket Registration When Connecting Kernel Process3-7
3.5.9 Kernel Process Not Running................................................................................... 3-7
3.5.10 Failure of Opening Listening Port with Error Code %d ......................................... 3-7
3.5.11 Activation Failure of Asynchronous Resource ...................................................... 3-8
3.5.12 Dual-System Activation Failure ............................................................................. 3-8
3.5.13 Switchover............................................................................................................. 3-8
3.5.14 Switchover Failure................................................................................................. 3-9
3.5.15 Operation Failure at Failover Response End........................................................ 3-9
3.5.16 Starting to Perform Handover Operation .............................................................. 3-9
3.5.17 Multiple Failed Activation Attempts at Local Node and can Never be Activated
Unless Heartbeat is Interrupted ....................................................................................... 3-9
i

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Frequently Asked Questions ...................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Logging in to CDR console failed ...................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Conflicting TCP Port 6000 ................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Failure to Decode ASN.1 CDR .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.5 Failure to Run Setup Script................................................................................................ 4-3
4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System............................................................................ 4-4
4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System............................................................................ 4-4
4.8 Delayed CDR Fetching ...................................................................................................... 4-5
4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after Sudden Power-off ......................................... 4-5
4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System......................................................... 4-6
4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File ......................................................................................... 4-7
4.12 A 3MB Original CDR Generated after One or Two Calls................................................. 4-7
4.13 Connection Failure Alarm During Backup over Network ................................................. 4-8
4.14 Making Generated CDRs Meeting Special Requirements .............................................. 4-8
4.15 SUN Netra 20 cannot be started...................................................................................... 4-9
4.16 Sun Netra t1405 cannot be switched over..................................................................... 4-10
Chapter 5 System Alarms............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 ALM-0001 Insufficient Disk Space..................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 ALM-0003 BS Not Fetch CDRs for a Long Time............................................................... 5-2
5.4 ALM-0005 Heartbeat Interruption ...................................................................................... 5-3
5.5 ALM-0007 Cluster Switchover ........................................................................................... 5-3
5.6 ALM-0009 Private Network Interruption ............................................................................ 5-4
5.7 ALM-0013 IP Resource Failure ......................................................................................... 5-4
5.8 ALM-0015 Volume Resource Failure................................................................................. 5-5
5.9 ALM-0017 Hardware Failure.............................................................................................. 5-5
5.10 ALM-0019 Write File Failure ............................................................................................ 5-5
5.11 ALM-0021 Abnormal CDR ............................................................................................... 5-6
5.12 ALM-0023 File Backup Failure ........................................................................................ 5-6
5.13 ALM-0025 Backup Connection Failure............................................................................ 5-7
5.14 ALM-0027 CPU Busy....................................................................................................... 5-7
5.15 ALM-0029 Insufficient Available Memory ........................................................................ 5-7
5.16 ALM-0031 Unauthorized Client Login.............................................................................. 5-8
5.17 ALM-0033 License Notice................................................................................................ 5-8
5.18 ALM-0035 Cluster Handover ........................................................................................... 5-9
5.19 ALM-0037 Hardware Failure............................................................................................ 5-9
5.20 ALM-0039 Software Reset............................................................................................. 5-10
5.21 ALM-0051 Alarm Box Disconnection ............................................................................. 5-10
5.22 ALM-0053 User information Change ............................................................................. 5-11
5.23 ALM-0055 Insufficient Disk Space (major) .................................................................... 5-11
5.24 ALM-0057 Insufficient Available Memory (major).......................................................... 5-11
ii

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
5.25 ALM-0059 No GSN Response....................................................................................... 5-12

iii

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 1 System Overview

This section describes the basic knowledge necessary for maintaining the CG9812
system, including:
z
Types of System Users
System Directory and Main Files
Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client
1.2 Types of System Users

The CG9812 has two types of system users. See Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 User authority
Role
Description
Administrator
It is automatically created during the system setup process. The

administrator has the highest authorities.
Normal user
It is created and can only be modified by the administrator or other

user with the user-creating authority.
1.3 System Directory and Main Files

1.3.1 Directory structure and main files of the server
Usually, the CG9812 runs in UNIX. The installation directories of the CG9812
applications are listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Directory structure of CG9812 server
File path
Description
/opt/igwb
Stores all executable process files, configuration

files, and trace files.
/opt/igwb/config
Stores all configuration files of the CG9812.
/opt/igwb/config/alarm
Stores all alarm configuration files.
/opt/igwb/config/format
Stores configuration files of the currently used CDR

formats.
/opt/igwb/config/ini
Stores the system parameter configuration file,

igwb.ini.

1-1

HUAWEI CG9812
File path
Description
/opt/igwb/config/mml
Stores operation command tables of the CG9812.
/opt/igwb/config/resource
Stores the resource data used to support the

bilingual operation interface.
/opt/igwb/config/specailformat
Stores configuration files related to special CDR

formats. To use a special format, copy the
corresponding configuration file to
/opt/igwb/config/format. Modify igwb.ini according
to the parameter configuration guide.
/opt/igwb/trace
Stores trace files recorded by the CG9812 about

significant running information and fault
information.
Table 1-3shows the main files of the server.

Table 1-3 Main files of CG9812 server
File path
Description
/opt/igwb/cls_proc
Executable file of the dual-system process.
/opt/igwb/ap_proc
Executable file of the access point process.
/opt/igwb/knl_proc
Executable file of the kernel process.
/opt/igwb/om_proc
Executable file of the

maintenance process.
/opt/igwb/libformat.so
Dynamic link library of the format library.
/opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini
Parameter configuration file, in which

significant parameters such as system
working mode and external interface are set.
/opt/igwb/config/resource/resource.
dat
Language resource file.
/opt/igwb/config/mml/*.dat
Five MML command tables used by the MML

Server.
/opt/igwb/config/alarm/alarmconfig.
cfg
Alarm parameter configuration file, in which

the alarm related parameters, for example,
alarm level, are set.
/opt/igwb/trace/ap_procN_trace.txt
Trace file of the access point process. There

may exist multiple process instances on the
access point process. N refers to the access
point ID.
/opt/igwb/trace/cls_proc_trace.txt
Trace file of the dual-system process.
/opt/igwb/trace/knl_proc_trace.txt
Trace file of the kernel process.
/opt/igwb/trace/om_proc_trace.txt
Trace file of the operation and maintenance

process.

1-2
operation
and

HUAWEI CG9812
1.3.2 CDR storage directory and main files

The CG9812 processes a great amount of CDRs of different formats every day. The
maintenance personnel can find the problems as quickly as possible if they know the
structure of the CDR storage directory.
I. Structure of CDR storage directory

File path
Description
/var/frontsave
The root directory of the front disk, namely the directory storing
original CDRs. The original CDRs are stored by access point (for
example, R4), and then by date, see Figure 1-1.
/var/backsave
The root directory of the back disk, namely the directory storing
final CDRs , usually in two copies, see Figure 1-2.
1) The final CDRs are stored in
var/backsave/AccessPointName/PathName/Date. In other words,
the final CDRs are stored by access point, by path and then by
date.
2) The backup of the final CDRs is stored in
var/backsave/Second/AccessPointName/PathName. Different
from the storage structure of the final CDRs, their backup is not
stored by date. This directory is open to the billing center to fetch
CDRs. The billing center is required to delete the CDRs once they
are fetched. Consequently, the CDRs will not be accumulated in
this directory.
/var/frontsave
Access
PointName
Date
Original CDRs
Original CDRs
Date
Original CDRs
Original CDRs
Figure 1-1 Storage directory of original CDRs

1-3

HUAWEI CG9812

/var/backsave
/var/backsave
Second
AccessPointName
AccessPointName
Patch 1
Patch 1
Date
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Patch N
Date
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Patch N
Date
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Date
Final CDRs
Final CDRs
Figure 1-2 Storage directory of final CDRs
II. Main files of CDR storage

File path
Description
/var/frontsave/Acc
essPointName/Dat
e/b*.bil
The SGSN/GGSN regularly sends CDRs to CG9812. Upon

reception of the CDRs, the CG9812 generates an original
CDR file with the CDR contents until the size of the file
exceeds a specified value (3 MB usually). The CG9812
replaces another original CDR file and repeats the preceding
operations.
The file name of an original CDR is "b*.bil". The "*" represents
the serial number of the CDR, which is numbered from
0000000001 to 9999999999 based on access point. For
example b0000000009.bil in the directory of
/var/frontsave/R99/20040314 is the ninth CDR file generated
out of the access point of R99 with generation date
03-14-2004.

1-4

HUAWEI CG9812
File path
Description
When generating an original CDR, CG9812 converts the
received CDR information and generates a final CDR file with
the information until the size of the file exceeds a specified
value (1 MB usually). Then, CG9812 replaces another CDR
file and repeats the preceding operations.
/var/backsave/Acc
essPointName/Pat
hName/ Date
/b*.dat
The file name of an original CDR is "b*.dat". The "*"

represents the serial number of the CDR, which is numbered
from 00000001 to 99999999 based on path name.
For example, b00000009.dat in the directory
/var/backsave/R99/mcdr/20040314 is the ninth final bill in
normal format generated out of the access point of R99 with
generation date 03-14-2004.
Note:
z
z
The generated CDR file varies with conversion types.

In the CDR storage directory, "AccessPointName"
depends on the setting of [AccessPoint%d] /APName in
the igwb.ini file of CG9812.
1.3.3 Common directory structure and main files

The CG9812 also generates log files, alarms files, status files. Through these files, you
can know the current status of the system.
I. Structure of common file directory

File path
Description
/var/other
Stores files related to alarm, log, and status.
/var/other/alarm
Stores history alarms.
/var/other/log
Stores log related files.
/var/other/mml
Stores operator information.
/var/other/perf
Stores performance and status information.
/var/other/master
Stores the name of the activated SC switch. Either switch

replaces the content in the original file with its own switch
name after being activated. In this way, when a switch is
activated, you can know switchover happens if the switch
name in the master file is not the actual one. This concerns
program implementation only.
/var/other/querybr
owse
Stores the status file generated by the program during CDR

browsing. You can ignore this.
/var/other/cdrstat
Stores CDR statistical results.
/var/other/log_arch
ive
Stores the packed logs. On UNIX, logs are packed and saved
automatically.

1-5

HUAWEI CG9812
File path
Description
/var/other/statusfil
es
Stores backup of status files.
/var/frontsave/Acc
essPoint
Stores system status files of a particular access point.
/var/frontsave/Acc
essPoint/netowrk
Stores status file of the access point for communication with

the switch.
/var/frontsave/Acc
essPoint/save
Stores status files of the access point regarding front and back
disks.
II. Main files

File path
Description
/var/other/log/*.log
Log files. The prefix represents the date when the log
file is generated, for example, 20040420.log.
/var/other/statusfiles/backup
_status.bsf
Status file of the backup module.
/var/frontsave/AccessPoint/
netowrk/status.dat
Status file of the access point for communication with

the switch.
save/R4_FS_MAIN.stf
Stores status files of the access point regarding the

front disk., for example, R4_FS_MAIN.stf is the front
save disk status file of the access point of R4.
save/R4_BS_*_MAIN.stf
Stores status files of the access point regarding the

back disk. The question mark "*" represents the path
number, for example, R4_BS_00_MAIN.stf is the
back save disk status file of Channel0 of the access
point of R4.
1.4 Directory Structure of the CG9812 Client

The default operation system of the CG9812 client is Windows XP or Windows
2000.The default installation directory of the CG9812 Client software is c:\igwb_Client.
This directory contains two subdirectories: Bin and Data. The Bin directory stores the
executable files and DLL files; the Data directory stores the Client data files and help
files.
I. Description of the directory structure

Directory
Description
C:\iGWB_Client\bin
Store the executable files and DLL files.
C:\iGWB_Client\data
Store the Client data files and help files.

1-6

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Description of main files.

File path
Description
C:\WINNT\UICONFIG.ini
The Client parameter configuration file. It

specifies the configuration of the Client
maintenance port and the debugging port.
Generally, it is unnecessary to change the file
manually.
C:\iGWB_Client\bin\Frame.exe
The executable file of the Client CDR console. It

can be run directly.
C:\iGWB_Client\bin\debugws.exe
The executable file of the Client debugging

console. It can be run directly.

1-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 2 Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance is the basis to ensure that the equipment can run securely, stably,
and reliably for a long time. The routine maintenance of the CG9812 includes the
following.
z
System Running
Hard Disk Detection
Operation Maintenance
2.2 System Running

Table 2-1 Routine maintenance regarding system operation (for UNIX)
Maintenance
task
Checking
Process
Running
Status
Checking
Dual-System
Heartbeat
State
Checking the
CDR receiving
status of the
CG9812 from
the switch
Operation guide
Log in the CG9812 server,

and enter the command of
"#ps -ef|grep _proc" to
check whether cls_proc,
ap_proc, knl_proc, and
om_proc are running.
Open the CDR console,

and select
[Operation/State Query]
to query the heartbeat
status. The normal
heartbeat status is
displayed as "2/2".
Make a call on the switch

and send the CDR to the
CG9812.
Check the generated CDR
from the CG9812 Client.
Reference standard
For an active dual-system node, all
processes are running. For an
inactive node, all processes are not
running.
The number of the ap_proc
processes on an active node should
be the same as the settings of the
[Common]/APCount item in the
igwb.ini file.
This operation task is available only
to dual-system hardware
configuration, not to single-system
office( the heartbeat state display
0/0 ) .
In the heartbeat state display 2/2,
the denominator indicates the total
number of the heartbeat links and
the numerator indicates the number
of the currently available heartbeat
links. The two numbers should be
equal.
The CG9812 can receive the CDR
generated for this call from the
switch. You can browse this CDR on
the CDR console.
The CDR data is correct without loss
or duplicate.

2-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Maintenance
task
Operation guide
Checking CDR
Collection of
Billing Center
Login the CG9812 server.

Open the
/var/backsave/second/Ac
cessPointName/APName
directory to check whether
CDRs of more than one
day are accumulated.
Checking the
bill backup
status
After the final bills are

generated, start the
backup function in
accordance with the
destination path and
source path of the
configured backup task,
and then check the log
information or the
destination path.
Reference standard
For "AccessPointName", refer to the
settings of
[AccessPoint%d]/APName in the
igwb.ini file. If there are several
access points, check them one by
one.
"PathName" refers to the other
folders except "default" in the
/var/backsave/second/AccessPoint
Name directory, corresponding to
different types of final CDRs. There
might be one or several folders.
Check them one by one.
The log records the backup details.

The backed-up bills are saved in the
destination path.
2.3 Hard Disk Detection

Table 2-2 Routine maintenance regarding hard disk detection
Item
Operation guide
Reference standard
On the [State Query] interface, disk space is
expressed as "n/m", in which m represents the
total capacity in MBs, and the numerator n
indicates the usable space in MBs.
Checking
Hard Disk
Space
When the available disk space is less than 800

MB (the minimum alarming space) by default,
the system generates an alarm prompting that
the medium space is insufficient.
Open the CDR

console, and select
[Operation/State
Query] to query the
free space of the
front save disk and
back save disk.
When the available disk space is less than 400

MB (the minimum switchover space) by
default, the system generates an alarm
prompting that the medium space is
insufficient. For the dual systems with the
non-sharing hard disk array, the systems will
be switched over. If it is a single system, the
system cannot receive CDRs. For the dual
systems with the sharing hard disk array, the
systems will be switched over. If it is a single
system, the system cannot receive CDRs.

2-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Item
Operation guide
Reference standard
Checking
Hard Disk
Fault
Check whether the

disk array of the
CG9812 server is
operating well.
Observe the indicator of the disk array. If the

indicator is red, the hard disk is faulty and must
be replaced.
2.4 Operation Maintenance

Table 2-3 Routine maintenance regarding system operation
Item
Browsing
CDRs
Checking
trace
information
Operation guide
Start the CDR
console. View the
CDRs to check
whether there are
incorrect CDRs.
Reference standard
The CDR console marks error on the CDRs

that cannot be resolved.
Log in to the
CG9812. Check
whether the latest
contents of the files
in the Trace folder
all indicate normal.
This operation must be performed on both

nodes of the dual CG9812 systems.
1)
2)
1)
2)
Checking
debugging
information
and
checking
exception
alarm
Start the CG9812

debugging console.
Check whether the
debugging
information outputs
indicate normal and
whether there are
exception alarms.
3)
Each file in the Trace

folder
corresponds to a process.
Not all the contents in the trace files
indicate abnormal. Analysis is required.
Refer to 3.5 Trace Information and
Maintenance .
Open the debugging information output
window of the debugging console.
Observe whether there are abnormal
outputs.
Open the protocol information output
Observe whether there are CDR
reception and exception alarms.
Open the workflow information output
Observe whether there are abnormal
outputs.
Note: The outputs in the debugging

information window will be refreshed
frequently when the traffic is increasing,
which might influence your observation.
Consequently, use the preceding
observation methods when appropriate, for
example, when the traffic is light.

2-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Item
Operation guide
Reference standard
Open the CDR console, and select
[Operation/Manually Switch] to manual
switch over the CG9812 server.
Switchover
test
In dual-system
environments, test
whether the active
and standby node
can be switched
normally.
Verify whether the standby device can be

activated within five minutes.
Manually switch over the CG9812 server
again. Detect whether the active device can
be activated and the standby device can be
deactivated accordingly.
Note: Switchover test might influence the
normal operation of the system. Do not use
it frequently.

2-4

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
Generally, troubleshooting undergoes the process of information collection -> fault
location -> fault removal.
Fault positioning information about the CG9812 falls into the following types:
z
Device maintenance and fault positioning interfaces provided in the design of the
CG9812 software, such as trace information, parameter configuration, and log.
Fault positioning measures provided by the operating system, such as ifconfig,

netstat, and ping.
3.2 Fault Positioning Information on the CG9812

I. Trace Information
Trace information plays an important role in positioning a fault. Each piece of trace
information is expressed in the following format:
Trace generation time Module number writing the trace
Trace contents
Trace records are significant debugging information for the running of the system.
Trace is not equal to abnormality. Usually a large number of trace records are
generated when the system is started or shut down. A few trace records are generated
when the system is operating normally.
The CG9812 application has five types of processes, see Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Processes of CG9812 server
File path
Description
/opt/igwb/cls_proc
cls_proc_trace.txt
/opt/igwb/knl_proc
knl_proc_trace.txt
/opt/igwb/ap_proc
ap_proc access point ID_trace.txt
/opt/igwb/om_proc
om_proc_trace.txt
In the actual running, the dual-system process, kernel process, and operation and
maintenance processes have only one respective process instance, but the access
point process can start one or more process instances depending on the parameter
configuration. Each process instance of the CG9812 creates a trace file. Each trace file
has a size limit of 6 MB. When this limit is reached, the application changes the
filename suffix of the trace file txt to tmp, and then creates a new trace file.
3-1

HUAWEI CG9812
II. Configuration Information

Because a large number of faults are caused by parameter configuration errors, it is
recommended to analyze both parameter configuration files and trace information.
Configuration information of the CG9812 includes parameter configuration information
and CDR format configuration information. The parameter configuration information is
stored in the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file by default. The CDR format
configuration information is stored in the /opt/igwb/config/format.
III. CDR Files

To remove a CDR exception of the CG9812, analyze the original CDR file and the final
CDR file.
The original CDR files and the final CDR files of the CG9812 are respectively stored in
/var/frontsave and /var/backsave.
z
Original CDR: the CDR that the CG9812 collects from the switch.
Final CDR: the CDR with the information converted after being received.
IV. Log
Log records the operations performed on the device through the maintenance console.
Log is helpful in positioning faults.
Log files are stored in /var/other. The system creates a log file every day. The
generation date is used as the file name. .log is the extension of the file. Log file of the
CG9812 is stored for one month by default. After expiration, the log file will be deleted
automatically. Usually the hardware failure is recorded in the log.
V. State Query
The CG9812 provides the state query function to facilitate routine maintenance, but the
function is not very helpful in positioning faults.
You can query the current running state of the CG9812 through the debugging console.
To query the state, follow the steps below:
1)
On the CG9812 Client, select Operation/State Query.
2)
In the State Query window, click the Setting Properties shortcut icon. The
Setting Properties dialog box is displayed.
3)
Set the Save Status to Open, and the status information will be saved in the
StatsInfo.txt file under the installation directory of the maintenance terminal.
Table 3-2 lists the state available.

Table 3-2 Common running state of the CG9812
State
Primary/Secondary
State
Description
0 represents the active node, and 1 represents the standby
node.
3-2

HUAWEI CG9812
State
Heartbeat State
Description
Heartbeat state is expressed as "n/m", in which the
denominator m indicates the total number of the heartbeat
links and the numerator n indicates the number of the
currently normal heartbeat links. Usually two heartbeat links
are configured, that is, m is equal to 2.
If n is not equal to 0 and m is not equal to n, it indicates that
part of the heartbeat links is faulty.
To ensure the reliable running of the system, check the
heartbeat links and restore the faulty link.
CPU Used (%)
Currently, the CG9812 can display two CPU usages at

most. If only one CPU is configured, "-" is displayed in the
place of the second CPU usage.
Disk Space (MB)
Currently you can query the total space and available space
of the front disk and back disk, which is expressed as "n/m".
Here, the denominator m indicates the total space of the
disk in MBs, and the numerator n indicates the usable
space in MBs.
Physical MEM (MB)
The current physical memory usage is used. The format is

"n/m". Here, the denominator m indicates the total size of
the physical memory in MBs, and the numerator n indicates
the available size in MBs.
3.3 Fault positioning information on OS

I. IP Address Configuration
To obtain the IP address configuration, run # ifconfig a. The IP address can be also
obtained automatically, and this mode is recommended.
II. Network Connection State

When the network connection state is normal, the CG9812 system can run normally.
z
Execute #netstat na to obtain the current network connection state of the

operating system, including the protocol used by the routing table, gateway
address, network port No., and so on.
To dump the outputs for future reference, Execute #netstat na>*.txt to dump the
output results for later query and transfer. It is recommended to name the dumping
file the operation date. For example, 20040805 indicates that operation was
performed on Aug 5th, 2004.
III. Process Running Status

Execute #ps ef|grep _proc to check whether the processes of the CG9812 are
running. In UNIX, on an inactive node, no process runs; for an active node, the

3-3

HUAWEI CG9812
processes of cls_proc, knl_proc, om_proc and ap_proc run. Only when these
processes are activated, you can log in to the parameter configuration console.
3.4 Collection of Fault Positioning Information

Collection of fault positioning information depends on the running of the system and the
type of the fault. The following section presents the required information according to
the type of the fault.
I. Interface Communication Fault

This type of fault refers to the faults occurring to the interface between the switch and
the CG9812 or the interface between the CG9812 and the billing system. The following
information is required for removing such a fault.
z
Parameter configuration file, igwb.ini
All trace files
IP address configuration and network connection state of the operating system
II. CDR Exception

This type of fault refers to the exceptional billing information found when you are
viewing the CDRs or the billing complaints from subscribers. The following information
is required for removing such a fault.
z
CDR format configuration files (All files in the default directory \config\format).
Original and final CDR files containing the exceptional billing information
III. Startup Failure

This type of fault refers to the various exceptions occurring to the startup process of the
CG9812 application. The following information is required for removing such a fault.
z
CDR format configuration files (All files in the default directory \config\format).
All trace files
IP address configuration of the operating system
IV. Hardware Fault

Provision of the hardware fault positioning system depends on the log function of the
operating system. You can check the hard disk status indicator on the hard disk array. If
the hard disk status indicator is red, the hard disk is damaged.

3-4

HUAWEI CG9812
3.5 Trace Information and Maintenance

When the CG9812 is running, some significant running information and fault
information is recorded in the trace files in /opt/igwb/trace.
The common trace information and the related maintenance measures are presented
as follows.
3.5.1 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space
Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check the FrontSaveRootDir and excute
#df -k
Check the available space of the file system. If the available disk space is insufficient,
consider reducing the value in [DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel or delete unnecessary
CDR files.
If they are not configured, the default values for FrontSaveRootDir and
MinDiskAlarmRoom are /var/frontsave and 15% of the total disk capacity
respectively.
3.5.2 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming Space
Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check the FrontSaveRootDir and
MinDiskAlarmRoom configuration parameters under [DiskFile]. Confirm the disk
storing the final CDRs (back disk CDRs) and the size of the minimum alarming space.
Check the available space of the corresponding disk. Execute the following command
on the server.
#df -k
consider
reducing
the
value
in
[DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel
or
deleting
unnecessary CDR files.

If they are not configured, the default values for the parameters are /var/backsave and
15% of the total disk capacity respectively.
3.5.3 Usable Backup Medium Space Insufficient for the Minimum Alarming
Space
Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check MinBakDeviceRoom under
[NetBackup] and [BackupTask*]. Here, the question mark "*" represents the specific
backup task number. Execute the following command on the server.
#df -k
Check the available space of the disk. If the space is really insufficient, and

3-5

HUAWEI CG9812
z
the backup medium is a tape, consider changing a new medium, and ensure that
MinBakDeviceRoom is 50 MB.
the backup medium is the local hard disk or network storage, consider moving the
backup data to other place, so as to make available more space in the medium.
3.5.4 Usable Front Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover
Space
Open
the
/opt/igwb/config/igwb.ini
file.
Check
the
FrontSaveRootDir
and
MinDiskHandoverRoom configuration parameters under [DiskFile]. Confirm the disk

storing the original CDRs (front disk CDRs) and the size of the minimum alarming
space. Check the available space of the corresponding disk. Then, execute the
following command on the server.
#df -k
consider reducing the value in [DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel or delete unnecessary
CDR files.
If they are not configured, the default values for them are 5% of /var/frontsave.
3.5.5 Usable Back Disk Space Insufficient for the Minimum Switchover
Space
Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check the FrontSaveRootDir and
MinDiskHandoverRoom configuration parameters under [DiskFile]. Confirm the disk
storing the final CDRs (back disk CDRs) and the size of the minimum handover space.
Then, execute the following command on the server.
#df -k
consider to reduce the value in [DiskFile]/DeadLineOfAutoDel or delete unnecessary
CDR files.
If they are not configured, the default values for them are 5% of /var/backsave.
3.5.6 Access Point Type, Access Point Type Being %d

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check whether the APType parameter
under [AccessPointN] is correct. If not, correct the setting of the parameter.
AccessPointN is the parameter related to a specific access point, in which N is the ID
of the access point in the range of 1 to m, and m is the value of the APCount parameter
under [Common].
APType refers to the type of the access point which must be entered correctly. (0: fixed
network 128, 1: GSM or CDMA, 2: STP, 3: GPRS, 4:WCDMA, 5: SoftSwtich).

3-6

HUAWEI CG9812
3.5.7 Failure of Reading IP Address from MML Server (Default Value %s)
Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check whether the LocalIpToMMLClient
parameter under [MML] is correct. If not correct, correct the setting of the parameter.
LocalIpToMMLClient refers to the local IP address of the MML server for the
connection to the MML CG9812 client, that is, the IP address for the CG9812 to
connect the network management system.
3.5.8 Error Code %d Returned in Socket Registration When Connecting

Kernel Process
Probably the kernel process is not running.
Execute the following command to check whether the kernel process is running.
# ps -ef | grep knl_proc
If some similar result is output, this indicates that the kernel process is running.
root 589 1 0 12:34:54 ? 0:16 ./knl_proc
Otherwise, it is recommended to restart the CG9812 server.
3.5.9 Kernel Process Not Running

Execute the following command to check whether the kernel process is running.
# ps -ef | grep knl_proc
If some similar result is output, this indicates that the kernel process is running.
root 589 1 0 12:34:54 ? 0:16 ./knl_proc
Otherwise, it is recommended to restart the CG9812 server.
3.5.10 Failure of Opening Listening Port with Error Code %d

Open the /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini file. Check whether the IP address and the
port number of the MML server under [MML] are correct. If not, correct the settings.
LocalIpToMMLClient refers to the local IP address of the MML server for the
connection to the MML LMT. That is, the IP address for the CG9812 to connect the
network management system.
LocalPortToCM refers to the MML maintenance port of the MML server. It takes the
value of 6000.
LocalPortToAR refers to the MML alarm report port of the MML server. It takes the
value of 6001.
LocalPortToRD refers to the MML debugging port of the MML server. It takes the value
of 6007.

3-7

HUAWEI CG9812
3.5.11 Activation Failure of Asynchronous Resource

The asynchronous resource refers to the knl_proc process. In this case, open the
/opt/igwb/trace/knl_proc_trace.txt file to position the failure. In addition, an activation
failure of the knl_proc process might be caused by its sub-processes (ap_proc and
om_proc), so open the ap_proc_trace.txt and om_proc_trace.txt files for further
positioning purposes. For the specific positioning methods, refer to information in
section 3.5.1 3.5.10 .
3.5.12 Dual-System Activation Failure

Dual-system activation failure is caused by an activation failure of the asynchronous
resource. To know the reasons of the activation failure, refer to the problem in
Table 3-3.
3.5.13 Switchover
This information indicates that because the local end of the CG9812 becomes faulty, it
must be switched to the peer.
Table 3-3 Switchover cause table
Switchover
cause code
Explanation
Failed to write file, which is probably caused by insufficient disk

space.
Insufficient front disk space, which means that the size of the
available space of the disk storing the original CDRs is less than the
minimum switchover space (5% by default).
Insufficient back disk space, which means that the size of the
available space of the disk storing the final CDRs is less than the
minimum switchover space (5% by default).
Asynchronous resource failure, which refers to the failure of the

knl_proc process. For specific troubleshooting methods, refer to the
3.5.11 .
Activation failure of the cls_proc process, which is probably caused

by an asynchronous resource activation failure or resource creation
failure. Such a failure is positioned according to the specific trace
information.
Resource failure. Resource failure includes virtual IP resource

failure, volume resource failure, and service failure. Refer to the
trace information for the further troubleshooting.
Damaged hard disk of the array. Replace the damaged disk.

3-8

HUAWEI CG9812
3.5.14 Switchover Failure

Two possible causes may result in such a fault.
z
One is the failure of the local CG9812, in which the local CG9812 detects the
interruption of all heartbeats.
The other is the activation failure when the peer attempts to activate itself upon
reception of the failover command.
Such a fault is generated by the local CG9812. In this case, confirm that the peer is
running, and remove the faults at the peer.
3.5.15 Operation Failure at Failover Response End

Such a fault is caused when the local CG9812 attempts to activate itself upon reception
of the failover command, but fails.
Check other specific trace information to position the activation failure.
3.5.16 Starting to Perform Handover Operation

This information may appear in the following cases.
z
The active server is being started.
The peer CG9812 is faulty, and the local end is deactivated.
The local CG9812 receives a manual switchover command from the CG9812
LMT.
3.5.17 Multiple Failed Activation Attempts at Local Node and can Never be
Activated Unless Heartbeat is Interrupted
The local end continuously performs activation attempts (three times by default), but all
fail. In this case, the local end stops the activation operation, and enters the
FAILDOWN state. After one hour, the local end restores to the normal state, and starts
the activation operation again. The local end repeats the same until the heartbeat links
are restored to be normal.

3-9

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 4 Frequently Asked Questions

This section collects the frequently asked questions and the solutions regarding the
CG9812.
4.2 Logging in to CDR console failed

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
Problem description
Logging in to the CDR console failed

1)
The CG9812 is not running.
If you enter the correct username and password to log in to

the CDR console but the system prompts Connecting the
server failed, re-login? , it indicates that the CG9812 is not
running or running abnormally. In this case, start or restart
the CG9812 and log in to the CDR console again.
2)
Network fault occurs.
When you work on the CDR console, for example, browse

the bills or log information, if the system displays a prompt
as shown in the following figure, it indicates that the
network is faulty. In this case, check the network
connectivity, or quit the Client and reconnect the network.
Causes and solutions
3)
The CG9812 is switched over.
When you work on the CDR console, if the CG9812 is

switched over, the connection between the Client and the
Server will be interrupted until you log in to the CG9812
again after the switchover.

4-1

HUAWEI CG9812
4.3 Conflicting TCP Port 6000

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
Execute ps -ef | grep _proc on the SUN Solaris workstation
with CG9812 installed, and you may find the ap_proc,
cls_proc, knl_proc, and om_proc processes are not
running. Check /opt/igwb/config/ini/igwb.ini, and no
parameter errors are found. Check the files in the
/opt/igwb/trace directory, and you find the TRACE file of
the om_proc contains some abnormal records.
Problem description
Sat May 22 17:22:30 2004 (MT_COMM) Failed to open

listener port(129.3.1.3:6000),ErrCode=125(Address
already in use)
Sat May 22 17:22:30 2004 (MT_COMM) Failed to init
CommLayer object,ErrCode=-1
If the IP address of 129.3.1.3 exists on the SUN

workstation, the om_proc is not started because the TCP
port 6000 has been used. On Solaris, the default TCP port
of X-Windows is 6000, and the default TCP port between
the CG9812 and the maintenance console is also 6000.
That's why the TCP port 6000 conflicts.
To solve this problem, modify the following information in

the /usr/dt/config/Xservers file of SUN workstation :0
Local local_uid@console root /usr/openwin/bin/Xsun :0
nobanner
to
:50 Local local_uid@console root
/usr/openwin/bin/Xsun :50 nobanner
Then, restart the Solaris OS.
4.4 Failure to Decode ASN.1 CDR

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
Problem description
The billing center reports that decoding the ASN.1 CDRs

from the CG9812 fails. But nothing is error when you
browse the final CDRs of the same in the equipment room.
Check the CDRs collected from the billing center using
UltraEdit, and you can find the 0D 0A content.

4-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Description
There are various causes that may lead to decoding

failure. And the most common cause is that the billing
center collects CDRs in an error FTP mode. To collect
ASN.1 CDRs, the binary mode must be used. However,
the default FTP mode after login is text mode. This is
usually ignored by the billing center.
In this case, you can ask the billing center to modify the
FTP mode and recollect CDRs.
For the binary CDRs, this problem also occurs if the billing
center collects CDRs in a wrong FTP mode. In this case,
you can handle it likewise.
4.5 Failure to Run Setup Script

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
While installing the CG9812 on Solaris, execute
sh ./igwb_install.sh script. The script works abnormally.
Some prompts appear.
Problem description
: nstall.sh not found:

' unexpected tall.sh: syntax error in line 75: ìn
Check the igwb_install.sh script using the vi editor, and you

can find "^M" at the end of each line.
The cause is that the FTP mode used to upload CG9812

Solaris version is incorrect. On Solaris, any .gz file must be
transmitted in binary mode, and any .sh file must be
transmitted in text mode through FTP.

4-3

HUAWEI CG9812
4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System
Problem description
None
SUN mini computers work as the CG9812 server, the
sequence of powering on dual systems is as follow.
1)
2)
3)
Power on the disk array (for two disk arrays, the

power-on sequence is not specified).
Power on the mini computer working as the active
CG9812 and wait for 3 to 5 minutes.
Power on the mini computer working as the standby
CG9812.
For preceding procedures, be sure to first power on the

disk array.
4.7 Sequence of Powering off Dual-System

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
4.6 Sequence of Powering on Dual-System
Problem description
None
SUN mini computers work as the CG9812 server, the
sequence of powering off dual systems is as follow.
1)
2)
3)
Power off the mini computer working as the standby

CG9812.
Power off the mini computer working as the active
CG9812.
Power off the disk array (for two disk arrays, the
power-off sequence is not specified).
For the preceding procedures, be sure to power off the disk

array at last. Beside, power off the mini computer in correct
procedures. That is, first close the CG9812 program, and
then shut down the OS. Direct power-off during running of
OS is prohibited.

4-4

HUAWEI CG9812
4.8 Delayed CDR Fetching

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
Problem description
The CG9812 always reports the alarm for delayed CDR

fetching.
If the office generating the alarm is not cut over, that is, the
CG9812 and billing center are not interconnected, this
alarm is normal. If a cutover office generates this alarm,
check the alarm parameter given in Description. The
parameter indicates the channel of the CG9812 where
CDRs accumulate. You can check the directory
accordingly. If there are really CDRs accumulated, check
whether the link between the CG9812 and billing center is
interrupted, or confirm with the billing center whether the
collection frequency is too low.
In addition, for some product lines, although the CG9812

sorts many channels, the billing center only needs and
collects the CDRs under a certain channel. For example,
when applied in radio packet domain, the CG9812
generates CDRs such as S-CDR, G-CDR, and M-CDR.
But usually, only the S-CDR is used for billing. In this case,
you may use some parameter to disable the channels
where G-CDR and M-CDR are generated to generate
another CDR. For example, provided the ID of the channel
where G-CDR is 2, configure the following parameters.
[Channel1-2]
SaveSecond=0
Here, Channel1 indicates the access point ID, and
channel2 indicates the channel number.
4.9 Failure to Restart Sun Mini Computer after Sudden

Power-off
Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
Problem description
The CG9812 cabinet powers off suddenly. After you power

on the CG9812 again, the Solaris system enters the single
user mode, and SUN Cluster and CG9812 software cannot
run.

4-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Description
Sudden power-off of the Solaris, including other UNIX

operating systems, may damage the file system. In this
case, log in the system, enter the single user mode, and
then execute the command of #fsck -y repeatedly until the
system does not prompt an error to be fixed.
You must repeatedly execute the fsck command till the file
system is completely fixed, because this is the only way for
you. If this command still does not work, the only thing you
can do is to rebuild the file system, which means a loss of
all data.
4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File

After you input the user name and password for login
Solaris system, the system prompts an error.
SunOS 5.8
login: oracle
Password:
No utmpx entry. You must exec login from the lowest
level shell.
Problem description
This is usually because the root partition (/)or /var partition

are used up. For each login, the operating system
generates a record in the /var/adm/utmpx and
/var/adm/wtmpx files for audit purpose. If the disk is full,
the system rejects any login.
In this case, the login user should not log out, and the login
user who does not login as the root user should switch to
the root user using su command. Otherwise, the user can
login as the root user from the console.
Then, use the command of df -k to check the / partition or
/var partition are completely or nearly used up. Delete the
unnecessary files in the partition. Usually, the files in the
/var/adm directory, such as messages.0, and messages.1,
are the backup log files, which can be deleted. Note that
the /var/adm/messages files cannot be deleted directly,
use the following command instead.
# > /var/adm/messages

4-6

HUAWEI CG9812
4.11 Oversize /var/adm/wtmpx File

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
4.10 "No utmpx entry" When Logging in Solaris System
Problem description
With
long-term
running
of
the
system,
the
/var/adm/wtmpx file occupies more and more space.
Consequently, the system may reject user login.
Execute the following command.
# > /var/adm/wtmpx
This command is only to clear the content of the file. In this
case, the file length becomes 0 byte, but the file still exists
and file authority is kept unchanged.
The content of the /var/adm/wtmpx file is in binary format.

To view the content, use the following command to convert
it into the text format.
# /usr/lib/acct/fwtmp < /var/adm/wtmpx > wtmpx.txt
Now, you can use the vi editor to read the generated
wtmpx.txt file.
4.12 A 3MB Original CDR Generated after One or Two Calls

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
Problem description
After making one or two calls, you find that an original CDR
file of 3MB in the CG9812 server, but you only find one or
two CDRs through the CG9812 LMT.
This is a normal case. The CG9812 reserve 3MB space to

store a CDR file when receiving original CDRs. The file is
empty at first, and then has data written into it. When more
than 3MB data are written, a new file is created. This file is
also closed when the CG9812 is stopped or after several
days, which may truncate invalid data and reduce the size
of the original CDR.

4-7

HUAWEI CG9812
4.13 Connection Failure Alarm During Backup over Network

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
The alarm box always sends the alarm for "network
connection fail". The alarm cannot be removed. The setting
of the ftp server is correct, but the backup cannot be made.
The backup data in igwb.ini are as follows.
[NetBackup]
DestHostIP = 10.66.151.74 ;Destination host IP
address
LocalIP = 10.66.153.11
;Local host IP address
Password=admin
BeforeEncode=0
BackupTaskCount=1
;Total number of backup
tasks
Problem description
The password for site configuration is a plain code. You

should change the BeforeEncode value from 0 to 1, and
then restart the CG9812. This is because for backup over
network, if you configure the password to a plain code for
the first time, you must set BeforeEncode to 1. The
CG9812 will automatically encrypt the plain code in
igwb.ini, and change BeforeEncode to 0. Afterwards, you
need not modify password and BeforeEncode manually.
4.14 Making Generated CDRs Meeting Special Requirements

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault
None
Problem description
The office requires that all SCDR files on the CG9812 are
in a format of GGfileXX.YYYY. Here, GGfile is fixed; XX
values 01-99, representing different SGSN; YYYY is the
postfix, representing the sequence number. Note that the
sequence number of CDRs values 0001-9999, and
recycles from 0001 after 9999 is numbered.

4-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Description
You can modify configuration in igwb.ini to meet the office's
requirements.
Add the following information under [AccessPoint] in the
igwb.ini files of the active and standby servers of CG9812.
CsnLen=4
Prefix=GGfileXX.
Postfix=
Here are some explanations.

CsnLen=4, namely YYYY.
Prefix=GGfileXX. Namely GGfile + XX (changed with the
specific requirement) + "." (a point)
Postfix= (null). That is, configure it to null.
4.15 SUN Netra 20 cannot be started

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault

Power-off
The system cannot be started when it is powered on at the
commissioning site. The red indicator marked with ejector
lever flashes all the time, and the following prompt is
shown from the serial port:
lom>
[Host console]
LOM event: +3d+4h29m22s host power on
LOM: Couldn't read SCC ID: ensure correct insertion
LOM: insert SCC to avert power-down in 60s.
LOM event: +3d+4h29m24s host FATAL FAULT: SCC removed
LOM event: +3d+4h29m24s Fault LED 1Hz
LOM: correct SCC not replaced - shutting system down
lom>
LOM event: +3d+4h30m28s host power off
lom>
Problem description
This is because SCC cards are provided with the Metra20

and the successive medium- and high-level SUN servers.
These cards are provided for identification purpose. The
SCC card, which comes with the product ex factory, should
be inserted into the slot on the back of the small computer.
However, as shown in the prompt information, the card is
not inserted or not well contacted. This card is configured
on the leftmost back of the device. To solve the above
problem. Make sure the card is inserted and well
contacted.

4-9

HUAWEI CG9812
4.16 Sun Netra t1405 cannot be switched over

Title
Description
Severity level
Related fault

Power-off
The dual system consisting of the Netra t1405 and the
A1000 is employed at the commissioning site. However,
the system cannot be normally switched over, and the
following prompt is displayed:
Problem description
>root@igwb1 # vxvm:vxconfigd: WARNING: Disk igwbdg02

in group igwbdg: Disk
>device not found
>Jul 28 16:35:52 igwb1 Cluster.Framework: stderr:
vxvm:vxdg: WARNING
>Jul 28 16:35:52 igwb1 Cluster.Framework: stderr: :
Disk igwbdg02: Not
>found, las
>t known location: c2t5d1s2
>
>root@igwb2 # vxvm:vxconfigd: WARNING: Disk igwbdg01
in group igwbdg: Disk
>device not found
>Jul 28 16:34:38 igwb2 Cluster.Framework: stderr:
vxvm:vxdg: WARNING
>Jul 28 16:34:38 igwb2 Cluster.Framework: stderr: :
Disk igwbdg01: Not found, last known location:
c1t5d1s2
>

4-10

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Description
To solve this problem, follow the steps below:
1)
2)
In UNIX, run the commands below:

#cd /opt/SUNexpl*/*bin
#./explorer -v
Save the generated system information in
/opt/SUNWexpl*/output. With this information, the
maintenance personnel can find out why the system
cannot be switched over.
In the disks\sonoma\ directory, check the SCSI and
disk information. By comparing the information
between the two nodes, you can find that only the
complementary disk array information is detected for
the igwb1 and the igwb2. So, we can figure out that
the SCSI cable is not correctly connected. Check and
reconnect the SCSI cable tightly. The problem is
solved.
In the igwb1:
>Health Check Summary Information
>A1000-1:
Failed Module
>A1000-2:
Optimal
>
>healthck succeeded!
>---------------------------------------------------------------------A1000-1:
single-controller
Active controller a (c1t5d0)
units: 0 1
/usr/sbin/osa/rdacutil succeeded!
A1000-2:
single-controller
Active controller a (1T31878248) units: none
In the igwb2:
A1000-1:
single-controller
Active controller a (1T30354225) units: none
A1000-2:
single-controller
Active controller a (c2t5d0)
units: 0 1

4-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Chapter 5 System Alarms

This chapter introduces the internal alarms of the CG9812.The alarms are listed in
Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 System alarms
Index
Alarm
type
Alarm
Alarm
level
NMS category
ALM-0001
Insufficient Disk Space
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0003
BS Not Fetch Bills for a

Long Time
Fault
Major
Software system
ALM-0005
Heartbeat Interruption
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0007
Cluster Switchover
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0009
Private
Interruption
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0013
IP Resource Failure
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0015
Volume
Failure
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0017
Hard disk Failure
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0019
Write File Failure
Event
Critical
Software system
ALM-0021
Abnormal CDR
Event
Critical
Software system
ALM-0023
File Backup Failure
Event
Critical
Software system
ALM-0025
Backup Connection
Failure
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0027
CPU Busy
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0029
Insufficient Available
Memory
Fault
Critical
Software system
ALM-0031
Unauthorized Client
Login
Event
Major
Software system
ALM-0033
License Notice
Event
Major
Software system
ALM-0035
Cluster Handover
Event
Major
Software system
ALM-0037
Hardware Failure
Fault
Critical
Software system
Network
Resource

5-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Alarm
type
Alarm
level
Index
Alarm
NMS category
ALM-0039
Software Reset
Event
Major
Software system
ALM-0051
Alarm Box
Disconnection
Event
Major
Software system
ALM-0053
User Information
Change
Event
Major
Software system
ALM-0055
Insufficient Disk Space

(major)
Fault
Major
Software system
ALM-0057
Insufficient Available
Memory (major)
Fault
Major
Software system
ALM-0059
No GSN Response
Fault
Major
Software system
5.2 ALM-0001 Insufficient Disk Space

Title
Description
Alarm description
The disk space for storing CDRs, final bills, or backup files
is lower than the minimum space.
Alarm parameter
Disk type: 0-Front save; 1-Back save; 2-Backup disk

z
Impact on system
System response
Correlative alarms
For a dual system, it may cause active/standby

switchover.
For a single system, the bills cannot be saved so that
they may be lost or not backed up.
None
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
The disk space is insufficient to store CDRs, final bills, or

backup files.
Solution
According to the alarm parameter, find the specific disk

and then delete expired bills, or reduce the time for storing
bills.
5.3 ALM-0003 BS Not Fetch CDRs for a Long Time

Title
Description
Alarm description
The billing center has not fetched the bills for long.
Alarm parameter
Channel No.: Channel ID, access point ID.
Impact on system
None

5-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
System response
Correlative alarms
Possible cause
Description
None
z
z
Connecting with the billing system failed.

z
Solution
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
z
z
Check whether the connection between the CG9812

and the billing system.
Check whether FTP or FTAM runs normally.
Check whether the billing system runs normally.
5.4 ALM-0005 Heartbeat Interruption

Title
Description
Alarm description
In the dual system, the private network and serial ports

used for heartbeat have not received any signal from the
peer end for long.
Alarm parameter
None
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
Possible cause
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
The private network and serial ports for heartbeat of the

dual system are not connected well.
z
Solution
z
Check whether both nodes of the dual system are

running.
Check if the cable between the serial ports is correctly
connected.
Check if the private network cable is correctly
connected.
Check if the IP addresses are correctly set.
5.5 ALM-0007 Cluster Switchover

Title
Description
Alarm description
The active server runs abnormally.
Alarm parameter
None
Impact on system
None
System response
None

5-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Correlative alarms
Description
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
The active server runs abnormally.
Solution
Check whether there are some concurrent/subsequent

alarms. Then remove the fault in time.
5.6 ALM-0009 Private Network Interruption

Title
Description
Alarm description
The two nodes of the dual system cannot communicate

with each other through the private network for heartbeat.
Alarm parameter
0-Private network 1; 1-Private network 2.
Impact on system
Heartbeat No.: It may result in synchronization or

switchover failure.
System response
None
Correlative alarms
Possible cause
z
z
The two nodes of the dual system cannot communicate

with each other through the private network for heartbeat.
z
Solution
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Check the private network and IP addresses.

Check if the network cables are correctly connected.
5.7 ALM-0013 IP Resource Failure

Title
Description
Alarm description
The active server cannot use a virtual IP of the dual

system.
Alarm parameter
IP resource No.: Virtual IP No.
Impact on system
It may cause communication failure with the billing center,

the GSN, and the NMS console.
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
The active server cannot use a virtual IP of the dual

system.
Solution
Check whether the network adapter bound with the IP

address is disabled or the network cable is unplugged.

5-4

HUAWEI CG9812
5.8 ALM-0015 Volume Resource Failure

Title
Description
Alarm description
The active server detects that some volume resource for

bill storage is not available.
Alarm parameter
Volume No.: 0-Front save; 1-Back save.
Impact on system
CDRs or final bills may not be stored.
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
The active server detects that some volume resource for

bill storage is not available.
Solution
Locate the volume based on the alarm parameter and

check whether the data line of the disk is connected well.
5.9 ALM-0017 Hardware Failure

Title
Description
Alarm description
The system detects an I/O read/write error on a hard disk.
Alarm parameter
Slot No.: slot number for the hardware
Impact on system
Bills cannot be saved and may be lost.
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
I/O read/write error occurs on a hard disk.
Solution
Locate the specific hard disk based on the alarm

parameter and replace it immediately.
5.10 ALM-0019 Write File Failure

Title
Alarm description
Description
The CG9812 cannot store CDRs, final bills or backup bills.
Bill type: 0-CDR; 1-Final; 2-Backup
Alarm parameter
File name: Channel ID, the name of the bill file failed to be
stored
Impact on system
Bills may be lost.
System response
None
5-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Correlative alarms
Description
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
The CG9812 cannot store CDRs, final bills or backup bills.
Solution
Based on the alarm parameter, check whether there is no

remaining space on the corresponding disk and whether
the directory is writable.
5.11 ALM-0021 Abnormal CDR

Title
Description
Alarm description
The CG9812 detects some abnormal CDR.
Alarm parameter
Error type: Channel ID, error type (0-Length of CDR;

1-Enoding; 2-Decoding; 3-CDR type; 4-Duplicate CDR)
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
Bill length or decoding error.
Solution
Check if the length of the bill (for fixed-length bills) or

the ASN.1 description is correct.
5.12 ALM-0023 File Backup Failure

Title
Description
Alarm description
The CG9812 detects a bill backup failure.
Alarm parameter
Backup ID: the sequence number of the backup task
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
z
Possible cause
z
z
Solution
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
The write authority is not given to the operator, or the
directory name is incorrect.
The available space on the FTP disk is insufficient.
Check if the operator has write authority or if the
directory name is correct.
Locate the disk based on the alarm parameter. Delete

expired bill files or reduce the time for storing bills.

5-6

HUAWEI CG9812
5.13 ALM-0025 Backup Connection Failure

Title
Description
Alarm description
The CG9812 fails to connect with the destination device.
Alarm parameter
Backup ID: the sequence number of the backup task
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
Possible cause
z
z
The CG9812 cannot connect with the destination device.

z
Solution
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Check whether the CG9812 can connect with the

destination device.
Check whether the backup parameters in the igwb.ini
file are all correct.
5.14 ALM-0027 CPU Busy

Title
Description
Alarm description
The CG9812 detects that the CPU usage is too high.
Alarm parameter
None
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
Several programs are running simultaneously.
Solution
Stop some of the programs.
5.15 ALM-0029 Insufficient Available Memory

Title
Description
Alarm description
The CG9812 detects that the memory is insufficient.
Alarm parameter
None
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None

5-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Description
Possible cause
Solution
5.16 ALM-0031 Unauthorized Client Login

Title
Alarm description
Description
The Client attempted unauthorized login for several times.
z
Alarm parameter
z
Error type: 0-Too many login failures; 1-Login during

unauthorized period.
Login information: User IP, user name.
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
The Client failed to log in for several times.
The Client attempted to log in during unauthorized
period.
Possible cause
Solution
Find the IP address and unauthorized user name from the

CG9812 log, and stop the unauthorized login.
5.17 ALM-0033 License Notice

Title
Description
Alarm description
The License is about to expire or is illegal.
Alarm parameter
Alarm type: 0-Invalid License; 1-Temporary License

expired.
Alarm description: The detailed causes of the alarm.
Impact on system
The bill service functions of the CG9812 cannot be used if

the License is illegal or the temporary License expires.
System response
The CG9812 cannot start the access point process to

process the bills.
Correlative alarms
z
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
The current License is unauthorized.
The validity time of the temporary License is less than
seven days.
Possible cause
Solution
Apply for a valid License.

5-8

HUAWEI CG9812
5.18 ALM-0035 Cluster Handover

Title
Description
Alarm description
The operator executes switchover manually.
Alarm parameter
None
Impact on system
None
System response
The system automatically switched from the active server

to the standby server.
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
The operator executes switchover manually on the service

console.
Solution
None
5.19 ALM-0037 Hardware Failure

Title
Description
Alarm description
Some hardware of the CG9812, such as a disk, CPU, fan,

or power module, is faulty.
Alarm parameter
Hardware ID: 1-Disk; 2-Temperature; 3-Fan; 4-Power

module
z
z
Impact on system
System response
Correlative alarms
In a dual system, the CG9812 automatically switches over

the nodes.
z
z
z
Possible cause
Disk failure can cause bill storage failure.

Overhigh temperature of the CPU can cause
switchover (in a dual system) or system crash (in a
single system).
Fan failure can cause overhigh temperature of the
CPU.
Power module failure can cause the CG9812 failure
and bill loss.
z
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Hardware failure
Overhigh temperature of the CPU
Fan failure
Power module failure

5-9

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
Description
z
Solution
Find the specific faulty hardware based on the alarm

parameter.
If the temperature of CPU is overhigh, stop other
applications.
Replace the faulty hardware.
5.20 ALM-0039 Software Reset

Title
Alarm description
Description
The CG9812 is restarted.
z
Alarm parameter
Cause
value:
0-System-triggered
switchover;
1-Operator-made switchover.
Operator: The operator that resets the CG9812 is _
by default.
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
z
Possible cause
z
z
Solution
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
The operator restarts the CG9812.
The operator executes the killcluster.exe program.
Switchover is performed in the dual system.
None
5.21 ALM-0051 Alarm Box Disconnection

Title
Description
Alarm description
The CG9812 does not receive the correct data from the
alarm box in 30 seconds.
Alarm parameter
None
Impact on system
The alarm box may be unable to receive the alarm

generated by CG9812.
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
z
Possible cause
z
Solution
Consequent alarms None.

Triggering alarms None.
The serial port cable connecting the alarm box and
CG9812 is loosen.
The alarm box system is abnormal.
Check the serial port cable, and reset the alarm box.

5-10

HUAWEI CG9812
5.22 ALM-0053 User information Change

Title
Alarm description
Description
The operator adds, deletes, or modifies the user
information.
z
Update type: 0-Add; 1-Delete; 2-Modify.

Update detail: Update operating IP, updated user
name.
Alarm parameter
Impact on system
None
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
None
Solution
None
5.23 ALM-0055 Insufficient Disk Space (major)

Title
Description
Alarm description
The disk space for storing CDRs, final bills or backup bills
is lower than the minimum value.
Alarm parameter
Medium type: 0-Front save; 1-Back save; 2-Backup

medium.
Impact on system
It may trigger the alarm for insufficient disk space.
System response
None
Correlative alarms
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
The medium space that stores CDRs, final bills or backup

bills is lower than the minimum value.
Solution
According to the alarm parameter, locate the specific disk.

Delete expired bills, or reduce the time for storing bills.
5.24 ALM-0057 Insufficient Available Memory (major)

Title
Description
Alarm description
The memory is lower than the minimum value
Alarm parameter
None
Impact on system
None

5-11

HUAWEI CG9812
Title
System response
Correlative alarms
Description
None
z
z
Child alarm: None

Parent alarm: None
Possible cause
Solution
5.25 ALM-0059 No GSN Response

Title
Alarm description
Alarm parameter
Description
The GSN does not respond to the system.
z
z
Parameter 1:0-GTP.
Parameter 2:IP address of GSN.
Impact on system
The system cannot receive the CDRs from GSN.
System response
The system deletes the requests.
Correlative alarms
Possible cause
Solution
z
z
z
z
Consequent alarms: None.

Triggering alarms: None.
The communication link is abnormal.
The GSN is faulty.
Check the communication link and GSN.

5-12
HUAWEI
HUAWEI CG9812
User Manual
Appendix
User Manual Appendix

HUAWEI CG9812
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Appendix A Common UNIX Commands......................................................................................A-1
A.1 Introduction to the Chapter................................................................................................A-1
A.2 Common Operations in UNIX System...............................................................................A-1
A.3 Common Commands for UNIX User Management...........................................................A-6
A.4 UNIX Utility Commands and Programs.............................................................................A-6
A.5 UNIX System Resource Commands .................................................................................A-7
A.6 UNIX Network Communication Commands ......................................................................A-7
Appendix B Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................B-1

i

HUAWEI CG9812
Appendix A Common UNIX Commands

A.1 Introduction to the Chapter
This chapter introduces the common UNIX commands, for your reference. Including:
z
Common Operations in UNIX System
Common Commands for UNIX User Management
UNIX Utility Commands and Programs
UNIX System Resource Commands
UNIX Network Communication Commands
A.2 Common Operations in UNIX System

I. Directory browse and control
The directories of the UNIX file system looks like a tree expanding outwards from the
root. The root directory is usually represented by the symbol /. Under the root directory,
the system directories and user directories are organized. In UNIX system, you usually
enter your own home directory when login. You can create other subdirectories under
the home directory. Table A-1 lists the common directory browse and control
commands.
Table A-1 Directory browse and control commands
Command/Syntax
Function
pwd
Display the current working directory.
cd [Directory]
Switch the directory.
mkdir [Directory]
Create a directory.
rmdir [Directory]
Delete a directory.
ls [Option] [Directory or File]
List directory contents or file information.
II. File maintenance commands

To create, copy, delete or modify files, you can use the file maintenance commands
listed in Table A-2.

A-1

HUAWEI CG9812
Table A-2 File maintenance commands

Command/Usage
Function
cp [Option] File 1 File 2
Copy a file
mv File 1 File 2
Move or rename a file
rm [Option] File
Delete a file
chmod [Option] File
Change the authority of a file
chown [Option] Owner File
Change the owner of a file
chgrp [Option] Group File
Change the group of a file
III. Text File Content-Displaying Command

Table A-3 lists some common system commands used to display and browse contents
of text files.
Table A-3 Commands for text file content display & browse
Command/Usage
Function
echo Character String [Option]
Send character strings back to the screen
cat [Option] File
Display file contents
more [Option] File
Display contents by page
head [Value] File
Display the file header
tail [Value] File
Display the file tail
clear
Clear screen
IV. vi Command
Usage: # vi filename
Remarks: vi is a full-screen editor. In case of the command followed by several file
names, the second file is automatically opened when the first one is closed, and so on.
You must master vi for UNIX development.
The vi works in either command mode or input mode. In the input mode, all inputs are
inserted into the buffer area being edited currently as text. In the command mode, input
characters are translated into commands.
In the input mode, you can press <ESC> to enter the command mode.
1)
Commands for entering input mode from command mode

A-2

HUAWEI CG9812
Table A-4 Commands for entering input mode

Command/Usage
Function
Insert text after the cursor
Insert text to the end of the line where the cursor is placed.
Modify the text after the cursor
cw
Modify the character(s) in the word after the cursor
Add new text into the place where the cursor resides
Insert new text to the beginning of the current line
Insert a line after the current line
Insert a line before the current line
Replace the current character with a string
2)
Move Cursor Command
Table A-5 Commands for moving cursor

Command/Usage
Function
h, <Left>, backspace
Move the cursor leftwards
j, <Down>
Move the cursor downwards
K, <Up>
Move the cursor upwards
l, <Right>, space
Move the cursor rightwards
0 (digit)
Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line
Move the cursor to the end of the current line
b, B
Move the cursor to the first character of the word before

the original one (B for ignoring punctuations)
w, W
Move the cursor to the first character of the word after the
original one (C for ignoring punctuations)
Move the cursor to the beginning of the last sentence
Move the cursor to the beginning of the next sentence
Move the cursor to the beginning of the last paragraph

(paragraphs are divided by an empty line)
Move the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph

(paragraphs are divided by an empty line)
[[
Move the cursor to the beginning of the last section

(sections are divided by {)
]]
Move the cursor to the beginning of the next section

(sections are divided by {)

A-3

HUAWEI CG9812
Command/Usage
Function
Move the cursor to the first line of the current buffer area
Move the cursor to the last line of the current buffer area
Move the cursor to the middle line of the current buffer

area
3)
Move Edit Area Command (^ for <Ctrl>)
Table A-6 Commands for moving edit area (^ for <Ctrl>)

Command/Usage
Function
^B
One screen up(backward)
Û
Half screen up(backward)
^F
One screen down(upward)
^D
Half screen down(upward)
4)
Go to Line N
Table A-7 Going to line n

Command/Usage
Function
:n
Go to line n
nG
Go to line n
1G
Go to line 1 of the file
Go to the end of the file
5)
Modify Command
Table A-8 Modify commands

Command/Usage
Function
Replace one character, but not enter the input mode
Upper case to lower case or vice versa

A-4

HUAWEI CG9812
6)
Cancel and Repeat Command
Table A-9 Cancel and repeat commands

Command/Usage
Function
Repeat the last command to modify the buffer area
Cancel the last command
7)
Delete Text
Table A-10 Delete commands

Command/Usage
Function
dd
Delete the current line
dnd
Delete n lines below the current line
dG
Delete the contents between the cursor and the end

of the file
Delete the contents between the cursor and the end

of the line.
Delete the current character
:line1, line2d
Delete lines between line1 and line2
:line1, $ d
Delete all lines from line1 to the end of the file ($ for
the end of the file)
8)
Common Commands after : Prompt
Table A-11 Common commands after : prompt

Command/Usage
Function
:w
Save the current file
:w!
Save the file forcibly
:w file
Write the contents to the specified file
:w! file
Write the contents to the specified file forcibly
:r file
Output files to the position where the cursor is placed
:r ! command
Output command outputs to the position where the

cursor is placed
:q
Quit editing
:q!
Force quit
:e file name
Edit another file
:e !
Re-edit the file and cancel any change

A-5

HUAWEI CG9812
Command/Usage
Function
:sh
Edit after executing sh
:! command
Edit after executing commands
:n
Edit the next file
A.3 Common Commands for UNIX User Management

Table A-12 lists the common commands for UNIX user management. Note that only the
root user and authorized users can add, modify and delete users and user groups.
Table A-12 Common commands for UNIX user management
Command/Usage
Function
useradd [Option] User Name
Add a new user
userdel User Name
Delete a user
usermod [Option] User Name
Modify user login information
passwd User Name
Modify user password
groupadd User Group Name
Add a new user group
groupdel User Group Name
Delete a user group
groupmod [Option] User Group Name
Modify user group information
A.4 UNIX Utility Commands and Programs

Many powerful and useful commands are provided in UNIX system, as listed in
Table A-13.
Table A-13 Utility commands
Command/Usage
Function
find Directory Condition
Search the file
grep String File
Search the specific character string
tar [Functional Option [Modify Option]]

[File]
Utility program for file backup and

restoration
pack/unpack File
Compress/uncompress the file
pkgadd [Option] Package Name
Transfer a package to the system
pkgrm [Option] Package Name
Remove a package from the system

A-6

HUAWEI CG9812
Command/Usage
Function
Calculator
bc
A.5 UNIX System Resource Commands

Table A-14 lists the system resource reports and management commands offered by
UNIX system.
Table A-14 System resource reports and management commands
Command/Usage
Function
man [Option] Command
Get the help information of the command
df [Option] [File System]
Report the free disk space
du [Option] [Directory or File]
Report disk space occupied by each file system
ps [Option]
Display the status of an active process
kill [Option] [Process Number]
Terminate a running process
who [Option]
List information of the current login user
whereis [Option] Command
Report the command position
which command
Display the path of the specified command
hostname [Host Name]
Display or set the host name
uname [Option]
Display information about the operating system
ifconfig [Option]
View the IP address of the host
script [Option] [File]
Record screen I/O activity
date [Option] [+Format]
Display the current date and time
A.6 UNIX Network Communication Commands

Table A-15 lists the common network communication commands.
Table A-15 Common network communications commands
Command/Usage
Function
ping IP address
Test network connectivity
telnet IP address | domain name
Log into a remote computer through network
ftp IP address | domain name
Transmit files through network

A-7

HUAWEI CG9812
Command/Usage
Function
finger [User Name] [@Host

Domain Name | IP Address]
View the information of the users who are using

UNIX system on the network
netstat [Option]
Display the network status
route [Option]
Modify and maintain the routing table

A-8

HUAWEI CG9812
Appendix B Abbreviations
A
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation One
B
BIOS
Basic Input/Output System
BOM
Bill of Material
BC
Billing Center
BS
Billing system
C
CDMA
Code Division Multiple Access
CDR
Call Detail Record
CG
Charging Gateway
F
FDDI
Fiber Distributed Digital Interface
FTAM
File Transfer Access Management
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
G
G-CDR
GGSN-CDR
GGSN
Gateway GPRS Support Node
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service
GSN
GPRS Support Node
GTP
GPRS Tunneling Protocol
I
IP
Internet Protocol
L
LAN
Local Area Network
M
MML
Man Machine Language, Man-Machine Language
MO
Magneto-Optical
MSC
Mobile Switching Center

B-1

HUAWEI CG9812
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR
Mean Time to Repair
M-CDR
Mobility Management-CDR
N
NE
Network Element
NFS
Network File System
NM
Network Management
NMC
Network Management Center
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
O
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OMC
Operation & Maintenance Center
QoS
Quality of Service
OSI
Open System Interconnection
P
PC
Personal Computer
PCI
Peripheral Component Interconnect
PID
Process Identification
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
R
RAM
random-access memory
RFC
Request for Comments
S
SGSN
Serving GPRS Support Node
S-CDR
SGSN-CDR
S-SMO-CDR
SGSN delivered short message Mobile Originated - CDR
S-SMT-CDR
SGSN delivered Short message Mobile Terminated - CDR
T
TCP
Transport Control Protocol
U
UDP
user datagram protocol
UI
User Interface
W
WAN
Wide Area Network

B-2

HUAWEI CG9812
WCDMA
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access

B-3
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
Index
SC and LAN switch, 2-12
CDR
access point parameters
browse, 3-9
AP name, 1-3
print, 3-9
AP type, 1-3
quary, 3-9
local IP, 1-4
save, 3-9
localport, 1-4
CDRs
release, 1-3
final bill, 1-4
alarm management, 5-3
original bill, 1-4

CDRs management
browsing, 2-15
printing, 2-22
backup precautions
set the backup FTP, 1-30
querying, 2-16
set the backup source path, 1-30
saving, 2-22
CG fault information
set the local backup function, 1-30
CDR files, 3-2
billing interfaces
FTAM interface, 6-1
configuration, 3-2
FTP interface, 6-1
log file, 3-2

state query, 3-2
broadcast messages, 6-12, 6-11
trace information, 3-1
channel, 1-4
cabinet
checking client software, 8-8

checking system status
appearance, 3-1
backup, 2-2
cabinet configuration, 2-1

netra 20 plus storedge3310, 3-3
collecting, 2-2
netra240 plus storedge 3310, 3-2
dual-system heartbeat, 2-1
cabinet dimension, 7-2
process running, 2-1
cabinet weight, 7-2
receiving, 2-1
clent software
cable connection
between between netra 20 and TC, 2-12
IGWB client, 8-8
between LAN switches, 2-12, 2-13
uninstall system, 8-8

client
between primary and secondary server, 2-11,
CDR console, 2-2
2-12
client consists
netra 20 and storedge 3310, 2-12

netra 240 and storedge 3310, 2-12
CDR console, 1-1
netra20 and LAN swiitch, 2-11
system debugging console, 1-1

client software
netra240 and LAN swiitch, 2-10
help, 8-8
power and ground cable, 2-12, 2-13

i-1
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
backup last file, 1-25
cluster parameters
backup precautions, 1-30
cluster version, 1-2
backup source path, 1-29
common operation
backup start and end time, 1-24
closing, 2-4
backup tme list, 1-23
common operation on CDR console

auxiliary upgrade, 2-36
close, 2-2
customizing the layout, 2-4
connection retry times, 1-28
customizing the system, 2-13
defaulted backup mode, 1-22
locking, 2-3
delete source file, 1-26
logging in, 2-1
one-off backup list, 1-24
logging out, 2-3
save days, 1-28
managing CDRs, 2-15
second bill, 1-27
managing logs, 2-29
simple backup, 1-20
managing offices, 2-10
two backup tasks, 1-21
managing operators, 2-6
configuration file, 1-1
managing performance, 2-23
configuring disk arrary

connection, 3-4, 3-2
manual switchover, 2-35
map, 3-15, 3-18
common parameters
access point count, 1-2
partition, 3-12, 3-15
cluster name, 1-3
set com port, 3-3
cluster number, 1-2
set IP, 3-5, 3-3
date service, 1-3
set logical drivers, 3-6, 3-8
log host, 1-3
set SCSI channel, 3-6
server number, 1-2
configuring files, 4-13, 4-15
sluster path, 1-3
configuring FTP port, 4-15, 4-17

configuring parameters
common trace information

access point type, 3-6
access point parameters, 1-3
back disk alarming, 3-5
cluster parameters, 1-2
back disk switchover, 3-6
common parameters, 1-1
dual-system failure, 3-8
disk and file control parameters, 1-7
error code, 3-7
log parameters, 1-6
failover response end, 3-9
MML server parameters, 1-5
failure of IP, 3-7
network backup parameter, 1-8
failure of port, 3-7
configuring telnet port, 4-15, 4-17
failure of resource, 3-8
configuring the quorum device
front disk alarming, 3-5
check the DID, 5-13, 5-10
front switchover space, 3-6
create a lock disk, 5-13, 5-10
handover operation, 3-9
CPU usage, 2-24
kernel process not running, 3-7
createing adapter configuration files, 4-14, 4-16
multiple failed, 3-9
creating configuration files

bge1, 4-14
usable backup medium, 3-5
bge3, 4-15
configuration

i-2
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
qfe1, 4-16
powering off failure, 4-4
qfe3, 4-16
restart failure, 4-5

run setup script failure, 4-3
customizing lock tim, 2-14
sequence failure, 4-4
fault information about OS

IP address configuration, 3-3
directory structure
CDR storage, 1-3
network connection state, 3-3
client, 1-6
process running status, 3-3

fault positioning information
common, 1-5
about CG9812, 3-1
system, 1-1
about OS, 3-3
disk
free space
disk arrary, 1-9
back save disk, 2-2
local disk, 1-8
front save disk, 2-2
disk partioning
disk group partitioning, 1-9, 1-10
front disk space, 2-24
logical volume partitioning, 1-10
funcation
display device, 4-1
communicating with the NMS, 3-9
dual-plane structure, 3-5
communicating with the billing center, 3-9
dual-system
communicating with the GSN, 3-8

function of debug console
the active server, 3-5
browsing debug messages, 2-40
the standby server, 3-5
masking the debug level, 2-42
saving debug message, 2-41

setting debug colors, 2-44
environmental requirement
functional principles, 3-5
running environment, 7-7
functional structure, 3-5
storage environment, 7-3

transportation environment, 7-5
ES-IS protocol, 6-12, 6-11

ethernet ports, 2-7
getway IP, 2-2
FAQ
hard disk checking
cannot be started, 4-9
fault, 2-3
cannot be switched over, 4-10
space, 2-2
conflicting port, 4-2
hardware architecture, 3-1
connection failure, 4-8
hardware capacity, 7-1
decodeing CDR failure, 4-2
hardware failure, 5-5
delayed CDR fetching, 4-5
hardware power-on, 2-15, 2-14
logging failed, 4-1
hardware preparations
no utmpx entry, 4-6
LAN switch, 1-4
original CDR generate, 4-7
netra 240 minicomputer, 1-3
oversize file, 4-7
storedge 3310, 1-4

i-3
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
the VTS software, 4-17, 4-19
hardware reliability
introduction FTAM commands
hot backup, 6-3

over-current protection, 6-3
display partners, 6-15, 6-14
over-voltage protection, 6-3
get a file, 6-15, 6-14
power supply, 6-2
list, 6-14, 6-13
redundancy design, 6-3
modify partner, 6-15, 6-14

set up connection, 6-14, 6-13
haredware preparations
3310 disk arrary, 1-4
netra20 minicomputer, 1-4
TC, 1-4
key benefit, 2-1
heartbeat link, 3-5
key terminologies
heartbeat links
access point, 3-9
ce0, 2-11
bill protocol versions, 7-7
ce1, 2-11
consolidation, 7-6
eri0, 2-12
sort, 7-6
home0, 2-12
heartbeat path, 3-9

heartbeat state, 2-24
LAN switch description, 2-6, 2-7
high density, 2-5
LMT, 1-3
highest authorities, 1-1
lock system
relogin, 2-3
return to, 2-3
implementation mechanism, 3-8
log parameters
install CG server
archiving directory, 1-7
installing server software, 7-7
log storage directory, 1-7
praparations, 7-1
log storage directory
rolling back, 7-13
arctive time, 1-7
upgrading server, 7-9
save days, 1-7
installation flow, 1-1
logical host, 5-1
installation preparations, 1-3
login dialog, 2-1
installing client software, 8-1
logs
installing HA system
browsing, 2-29
configuring, 5-19, 5-16
clearing, 2-34
entering, 5-18, 5-14
printing, 2-34
installing cluster, 5-3
saving, 2-32
installing VxVM, 5-15, 5-11
LUN, 1-9
preparations, 5-1
installing solaris, 4-1

connecting, 4-1
main hardware
installing, 4-2, 4-1
disk array, 3-4
installing utilities
LAN switches, 3-2
the top software, 4-17, 4-18
mini computer, 3-2

i-4
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
netra 20 description, 2-2
maintenance management, 5-3
ambient indices, 2-3
manager license
checking correctness, 5-19, 5-16
configuration, 2-3
checking hostid, 5-18, 5-14
physical spec, 2-3
checking permanent, 5-18, 5-15
netra 240 description, 2-3
entering, 5-19, 5-15
ambient indices, 2-3
managing mask level
configuration, 2-3
delete mask level, 2-43
physical spec, 2-3
list mask level, 2-42
network backup instance
saving, 2-46
check, 1-20
set mask kevek, 2-42
modify the igwb.ini, 1-18
managing offices
open the debugging console, 1-20
adding, 2-10
reset the CG server, 1-19
deleting, 2-11
set up the FTP, 1-18

network backup parameters
modifying, 2-12
managing operator
dest host IP, 1-8
adding, 2-6
local IP, 1-8
deleting, 2-8
user name, 1-8
modifying, 2-8
networking capability, 2-2
map logical drive
NMS, 1-2
select chl1 ID 0, 3-15, 3-18
node, 1-4, 1-5
select logical drive, 3-16, 3-19

select LUN 0, 3-18, 3-21
select map host LUN, 3-18, 3-22
O&M function
select RAID5, 3-17, 3-21
configuration management, 5-2
select row 0, 3-16, 3-20
fault management, 5-3
MML server parameters
performance management, 5-2
local IP to MML client, 1-5
security management, 5-2
local port to AR, 1-6
offce management, 2-3
local port to CM, 1-6
office
local port to RD, 1-6
IP, 2-11
max number of LMT, 1-5
name, 2-11
max uer number, 1-6
type, 2-11
persis user, 1-5
OMC networking, 5-1
modifying files
operation maintenance
netmasks file, 4-16
browsing CDRs, 2-3
sd.conf, 4-16, 4-17
degugging information, 2-3
system file, 4-16, 4-18
exception alarm, 2-3

switchover test, 2-4
trace infromation, 2-3

operation on debug console
N68-22, 3-1
exiting, 2-38
navigator tree, 1-4

i-5
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
startup, 2-1
logging, 2-37
protocol message
managing debug console, 2-39
browsing, 2-46
managing protocol message, 2-45

managing workflow message, 2-47
orientation, 1-1
OSI protocol stack, 6-4, 6-3
quorum device, 5-13, 5-9
parameter description of operator
RAID, 1-8
authority, 2-7
related parameters
confirm, 2-8
NASP, 6-11, 6-10
description, 2-7
partner, 6-11, 6-10
name, 2-7
P-SELECTOR, 6-11, 6-10
password, 2-7
S-SELECTOR, 6-11, 6-10
parameters in log
T-SELECTOR, 6-11, 6-10
command detail, 2-32
reliability
date, 2-32
hardware reliability, 6-2
log source, 2-32
software reliability, 6-3
log type, 2-32
system reliability, 6-1
operation command, 2-32
resource planning, 1-6
operation place, 2-32
disk space planning, 1-8
operation result, 2-32
HA system planning, 1-6
sequence number, 2-32
IP address planning, 1-7
user name, 2-32
restarting the hosts, 4-17, 4-18
physical MEM, 2-24
root disk
planning
adding, 5-20, 5-17
dixk space planning, 1-8
checking, 5-20, 5-16
HA system Planning, 1-6
initialize, 5-20, 5-16
IP address planning, 1-7
mirroring, 5-20, 5-17
port usage
routine maintenance
ports used by application, 1-16
hard disk detection, 2-2
ports used by CG, 1-16
operation maintenance, 2-3
position in mobile network, 1-1
system running, 2-1
preparation for install HA
checking hostname, 5-3, 5-2

checking hosts file, 5-1
SC, 3-1
checking login file, 5-3
secondary state, 2-24
cleaning out date, 5-3
security management
primary state, 2-24
authority management, 5-2
processing CDRs
log management, 5-2
collecting, 4-1
service process
program on the CG server
dual_system process, 3-12

i-6
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
backsave, 1-3
service processes
frontsave, 1-3
access point process, 3-11

kernel process, 3-11
sub-window, 1-6
operation and maintenance process, 3-12
SUN cluster, 1-4, 1-5
sliding window protocol, 3-8
checking, 5-10, 5-7
software architecture, 3-11
configuring, 5-6
software configuration
edit, 5-9, 5-7

application, 1-5
application software, 1-5
SWAP, 1-8
system software, 1-5
system alarming
abnormal CDR, 5-6
software reliability
error tolerance, 6-3
alarm box disconnection, 5-10
fault monitoring, 6-4
backup connection failure, 5-7
fault processing, 6-4
BS not fetch CDRs, 5-2
protection measure, 6-3
cluster handover, 5-9

cluster switchover, 5-3
solaris patches
patch tools, 4-7, 4-9
CPU busy, 5-7
SAN patches, 4-7, 4-10, 4-12
file backup failure, 5-6
SCSI card driver, 4-11, 4-13
hardware failure, 5-9
SCSI card driver patch, 4-12, 4-14
heartbeat interruption, 5-3
solaris 8 patch, 4-10, 4-12
insufficient available memory, 5-7, 5-11

insufficient disk space, 5-2, 5-11
sorting CDRs
consolidates, 3-8
IP resource failure, 5-4
saves, 3-8
license notice, 5-8
stack manager, 6-12, 6-11
network interruption, 5-4
standard protocal
no GSN response, 5-12
FTAM, 1-3
software reset, 5-10
FTP, 1-2
unauthorized client login, 5-8

user information change, 5-11
state query, 1-2

CPU used, 3-3
volume resource failure, 5-5
disk space, 3-3
write file failure, 5-5

system features
heartbeat, 3-3
physical MEM, 3-3
high reliability, 2-1
primary/secondary, 3-2
large capacity and powerful processing
status bar, 1-6
capability, 2-1
storage environment
scalability, 2-2
simultaneous accesses, 2-1
air cleanness, 7-3
system information
biological environment, 7-3

climate environment, 7-3
debug information, 1-6
mechanical stress, 7-4
protocol trace information, 1-6

workflow trace information, 1-6
storedge 3310 description, 2-5
system parameters
structure of CDR storage

i-7
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
checking configuration, 5-26, 5-23
original CDR, 3-10
configuring NAFO, 5-24, 5-22
primary/secondary, 3-10
creating group, 5-21, 5-17
resiyrces, 3-10
installing script, 5-26, 5-23
time planning, 1-2
mirroring root disk, 5-20, 5-16
timeout setting, 2-13
registering group, 5-25, 5-22
toolbar on the CDR console

debug, 1-4
system performance status

clearing, 2-24, 2-28
help topics, 1-4
querying, 2-25
lock system, 1-4

navigator tree, 1-4
setting, 2-27
office management, 1-4
system reliability
component selection, 6-1
relogin, 1-4
maintainability design, 6-2
relogout, 1-4
toolbar on the debugging console
power reliability, 6-2
browse debug message, 1-8
redundancy design, 6-1
browse protocol message, 1-8
system software
billing gateway software, 1-5
browse workflow message, 1-8
billing interface software, 1-5
exit, 1-8
CG application, 1-5
open iGWB local manager, 1-8
cluster, 1-5
relogin, 1-8
cluster software, 1-5
set debug colors, 1-8
disk manangement, 1-5
trace management, 5-4
OS, 1-5
troubleshooting process
fault location, 3-1
volume manager, 1-5
fault removal, 3-1
system user
infrormation collection, 3-1
administrator, 1-1
two types of IP
normal user, 1-1
fixed IP, 1-7
floating IP, 1-7

two types of users
TC, 3-1
TC description, 2-6
Administrator, 2-6
technical specification
operator, 2-6
type of fault information
clock stratum, 7-1

dimension, 7-2
CDR exception, 3-4
power consumption, 7-2
hardware fault, 3-4
reliability, 7-1
interface communication fault, 3-4
weight, 7-2
startup failure, 3-4
terminologies
active/standby, 3-10
channel, 3-10
UFS, 1-8
final CDR, 3-10
upgrade server
format library, 3-10
general upgrade, 7-9

i-8
User Manual
HUAWEI CG9812
Index
special upgrade, 7-11

upgradeing client, 8-6
installing patches, 5-16, 5-12
use gateway, 2-2
modifying parameters, 5-17, 5-13
user login interface, 2-3
workflow messgae
VLAN, 2-11, 2-12
browsing, 2-48
volume manage
saving, 2-49
checking installation, 5-17, 5-14
i.

i-9

Huawei CG9812

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Huawei CG9812

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part I System Description

Table of Contents .........................................................................................

4.3.1 CDR Processing .......................................................................

Part II System Installation (Netra 240)

4.3.2 Installing Solaris 8 Patch ..........................................................

5.6.1 Mirroring Root Disk ...................................................................

Part II System Installation (Netra 20)

1.3.1 Hardware Preparations .............................................................

4.4.3 Configuring Telnet Login for root ..............................................

6.2 Installing FTP ....................................................................................

Part III Parameter Configuration and System

1.2.11 Deleting Parameters ...............................................................

2.1 Introduction .......................................................................................

Part IV Basic Operations

2.10.1 Browsing CDRs by Type ........................................................

Part V System Maintenance

2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ...............................................................

4.8 Delayed CDR Fetching .....................................................................

A.3 Common Commands for UNIX User Management ..........................

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Copyright 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,

, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Manual

Part I System Description introduces the functional features, hardware structure,

Part III Parameter Configuration and System Commissioning introduces the

Part IV Basic Operations presents the basic operations performed on the

Part V System Maintenance describes the software directory structure, routine

Appendix A Common UNIX Commands gathers the common UNIX commands

Project engineering technicians

Operation & maintenance specialists

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.

Terminal Display is in Courier New. Message input by the

II. GUI conventions

Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click

Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For

III. Keyboard operation

Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A>

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Part I System Description

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

User Manual Part I System Description

User Manual Part I System Description

4.3 Service Functions .............................................................................................................. 4-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

User Manual Part I System Description

7.4.3 Running Environment.............................................................................................. 7-7

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

User Manual Part I System Description

Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812

Chapter 1 Introduction to the CG9812

Collecting CDRs from the UMTS network entities.

Intermediating CDR storage buffering.

Processing CDR data.

Transferring the CDR data to the Billing Center.

This chapter contains the following: